Design and Construction Standardsdcm.ku.edu/sites/dcm.drupal.ku.edu/files/docs/Standards/KU-DesignStandards.pdfDesigners shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards

The University of Kansas

Design and Construction Standards

Revision Date: September 15, 2010 Issued by:

The Office of the Chancellor

Warren Corman, University Architect

Planning & Facility Management

The Office of Design & Construction Management

James Modig, Director

The Department of Facilities Operations

Douglas Riat, Director

The Department Information Services-Information Technology

Chuck Crawford, Director of IT, Enterprise Infrastructure and Security

Julie Loats, Director of IT, Enterprise Applications and Services

Copyright © 2010, by The University of Kansas, Office of Design & Construction Management

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards General Requirements 1

Revision Date: September 9, 2009 Page 1 of 19

General Requirements

GENERAL

Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form.

DEFINITIONS

"Designer", "Project Designer", “Consultant”, “Project Architect”, “Project Engineer” and “A-E” or "A/E" shall all mean the prime consulting firm and it’s sub-consultants that have been hired to provide professional services to the University of Kansas.

� These terms may be used interchangeably in referring to the firm that has been retained as the prime consultant on any project, regardless of whether that project is primarily architectural or engineering in nature, or of a specialty discipline.

� The prime consultant on a project, whether an Architect or an Engineer, shall have the same obligation to meet all of the University’s standards, regardless of the terminology used to describe the consultant.

� Each Consultant shall be responsible for verifying that their sub-consultants also comply with the requirements of these standards.

� For projects that are designed and/or constructed by the University of Kansas personnel, these terms shall refer to KU's staff, whether DCM, FO, NTS or other personnel.

“Owner”, “KU” and “University” shall generally refer to the University of Kansas, and it’s representatives. "Owner" may also refer to the State of Kansas team in general, and to the KU Endowment Association.

“DCM” shall refer to KU’s Office of Design and Construction Management.

“DFM” shall refer to the Department of Facilities Management, State of Kansas (the old State Architect's office).

"KBOR" or "BOR" shall refer to the Kansas Board of Regents.

"SFM" or "KSFMO" shall refer to the Kansas State Fire Marshal's office.

"CO" shall refer to the KU Chancellor's Office.

"KUEA" shall refer to the Kansas University Endowment Association.

“FO” shall refer to KU’s Department of Facility Operations.

“NTS” or KU-IT shall refer to KU’s Department of Information Technologies.

“EHS” shall refer to KU’s Department of Environment, Health and Safety.

1



"Contractor" or "GC" shall refer to the prime contractor who holds the construction contract with the state and/or KU. Each Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that their subcontractors and suppliers also comply with the requirements of these standards.

"Authority with Jurisdiction", as it relates to code issues, shall refer both the DFM and SFM offices.

RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS

General: The University of Kansas (KU) Design and Construction Standards have been developed by the Office of Design and Construction Management (DCM), in cooperation with other KU departments, to establish standard guidelines and minimum requirements for all University of Kansas facility improvement projects.

� These standards apply to both discretionary projects, which typically cost less $500,000, and to capital projects, which typically have construction costs greater than $500,000.

� These standards apply to design services and construction work provided by both outside consultants and contractors, as well as to State personnel, such as DCM, FO, KU-IT & DFM.

� These standards apply to projects completed for the KU Lawrence campus, as well as other offsite University of Kansas campuses, such as the Edwards Campus in Overland Park and the Kansas Law Enforcement Training Center (KLETC) in Hutchinson. They do NOT apply to projects at the KU Medical Center facilities in Kansas City or Wichita, which operate as separate entities.

� Refer to other Divisions of these standards for more detailed information that supplement the information included in these Division One provisions.

Related Standards: These Standards supplement the requirements of the Owner-Consultant Agreement, as well as the current editions of the following documents:

� DFM Policy and Procedures Manual: Also called the "P&P Manual" or "Red Book", this document establishes the procedures to be used on all projects completed for the State of Kansas. Copies are available to qualified firms from DOAS.

� KU Capital Project User's Guide: This document includes additional background information and details, such as Project Checklists, regarding the processes for initiating, developing and implementing capital improvements at KU. These documents can be viewed online at the DCM website at: http://www.ku.edu/home/fmku/

� KU Computer-Aided Drafting (CAD) Standards: This document may be viewed online at the DCM website. Current web address: http://www.ku.edu/home/fmku/

� KU Campus Master Plan: This document may be viewed online at the DCM website, as noted above.

� KU Campus Landscape Master Plan: This document may be viewed online at the DCM website, as noted above.

� KU Graphics Program Manual: Copies of this manual can be made available for review by DCM or applicable portions of the manual will be provided to the Designer.



� MasterSpec: The State of Kansas and KU require the use of AIA’s MasterSpec specifications as the basis for all project specifications.

� These standards are intended to supplement those specifications. Items that are typically covered within the MasterSpec text are not repeated herein.

� Each project's designer shall edit MasterSpec's specifications to reflect all applicable information from these standards, and to delete all Masterspec text that is not pertinent or conflicts with these standards. Questionable items shall be referred to KU's project manager for direction.

Privately-Funded Projects: The University requires that ALL privately-funded projects shall also comply with the DFM Building Design and Construction Manual requirements, except as specifically modified herein, as well as with these KU Design and Construction Standards.

� This includes projects funded by the KU Endowment Association and other non-State funding sources, such as projects for the KU Athletics Corporation (KUAC), the KU Center for Research (KUCR), the Student Unions (Memorial Corporation) or the Department of Student Housing (DSH).

POLICIES & PROCEDURES

Refer to the KU Capital Project User's Guide for a detailed explanation of the roles of the various project team members, the design and construction process, the phases and key target dates of the process, and details to be covered during each phase of the project.

PROJECT PROGRAM STATEMENT

The University's programming approach applies to all concerns in design, from structure to materials, building systems and costs. Objectives are:

� To ensure that no major decision is overlooked.

� To identify and analyze unalterable conditions affecting the solution.

� To allow more time for the A/E to concentrate on solving problems versus identifying problems.

� To allow the A/E and his consultants to get the project under complete control early.

� To permit decisions made in one phase to serve as boundaries or parameters for those to be made in subsequent phases.

� To assure that commitment to a specific solution is made at all points along the way and not reserved until the very end.

� To avoid the constant redesign which occurs when new information is introduced late in the design process.



The project's Building Committee, appointed to represent the users of the facility, will be available for program elaboration and to assist with the design reviews of the project during the preliminary design phases.

CAMPUS INFRASTRUCTURE AND FUTURE DEVELOPMENT

General: The Project Designer shall discuss with the University such items as utilities, long-range planning and information that relates to the approach toward construction on the University campus.

Campus Plan: Under direction from the Kansas Board of Regents, long-range physical development planning workbooks were produced for each of the six state colleges and universities, assuring timely and orderly growth. The Campus Plan for the University of Kansas includes information on goals, facts, concepts, needs, and overall plans.

At the initial project meeting, the Office of Design and Construction Management will introduce pertinent material from the Campus Plan to the Project Designer.

Campus Utility Studies: The University has developed studies of most of the existing utility systems on the Lawrence campus.

� The Project Designer should review these studies and long-range plans to coordinate development of utility systems for any proposed new facility or renovation project.

Infrastructure Extensions: Each project will be required to extend existing campus infrastructure to the project site as part of the project work and as part of the overall project budget, unless the Program Statement and Program Budget indicate those required infrastructure improvements are being funded and constructed by other means.

� These infrastructure improvements may include the construction of elements not within the immediate project site limits, such as site utilities, underground utility tunnels, site lighting, walks and roadways.

Future Expansion: The design of each project shall consider the potential need for future expansion and shall indicate how or where this could occur. The project shall be designed to accommodate this as easily as possible in the future.

� Construction documents shall clearly note all provisions for future needs.

� Expansion capabilities, such as empty conduits, extra electrical capacity, oversized structural components, future building addition footprints and similar features, shall be clearly indicated on the design and construction drawings for future information and implementation.



COORDINATION WITH CITY OF LAWRENCE & UTILITY PROVIDERS

General Coordination: DCM shall coordinate with the City of Lawrence and the University's utility providers, and shall arrange to meet with them when required to discuss issues of joint concern. Consultants shall be invited to attend these meetings, at their option.

Building Permits: KU is required to secure building permits for projects that occur on state property from University Fire Marshal Authority after DFM has approved projects for construction.

� Projects that occur on privately owned property, such as property owned by the KU Endowment Association; do require City and UFMA building permits. Contractors are to be instructed accordingly in the bid documents for those projects.

City of Lawrence Building Regulations: Projects on privately-owned property, such as property owned by the KU Endowment Association, must comply with all applicable building codes and regulations of the City of Lawrence.

HISTORIC STRUCTURES & RELATED DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Projects directly affecting or within 500' of facilities and properties listed on the National Register of Historic Places will require special attention to comply with applicable historic preservation guidelines. The Project Designer shall work jointly with the Office of Design and Construction Management in coordinating and working with representatives of KU's Campus Historic Preservation Board (CHPB) and when required, the City of Lawrence Historic Resources Commission (LHRC) and the Kansas State Historical Society (KSHS).

The Kansas State Historical Society has delegated authority for historic resource reviews to KU's Campus Historic Preservation Board, by a written agreement that requires KU to follow the same guidelines and standards which would govern the KSHS. The CHPB will be given the opportunity to review design documents at the Preliminary Design phases and at appropriate phases of the Construction Documents, as requested.

� DCM will coordinate reviews with the Campus Historic Preservation Board, at appropriate stages of the project's development and design.

� DCM will prepare staff reports analyzing the project's compliance with applicable historic preservation standards, with recommendations to the Board regarding approval of the project design as submitted.

� The Designer shall be required to assist DCM in preparing a staff report, by providing appropriate drawings and other graphics that can be used as attachments to DCM's report, or as larger visual displays at the Board's review.

� DCM will meet with the Campus Historic Preservation Board to review plans of projects affecting or within 500’ of listed historic sites, and shall advise the Project Designer of their comments.



� The Project Designer will typically be given the option of attending these reviews if DCM is presenting the project to the Board, or he may be asked to present the project, explain the design concepts to the Board and take questions from the Board.

� The Project Designer will be required to comply with the standards and guidelines enforced by the Kansas State Historical Society, whether the project is an alteration or addition to a listed property, or is within 500 feet of a listed property and hence subject to environs standards.

CAMPUS AESTHETIC GUIDELINES

The University of Kansas is dedicated to academic excellence and the construction of facilities that will provide all the physical requirements for academic excellence. The University believes in the importance of aesthetics, and it recognizes the obligation to create and preserve beauty in all its various forms.

The opportunity exists to combine the functional and the beautiful in architectural and landscape design, to achieve a unity which will suggest the character and philosophy of the University as a whole, and to provide a source of pleasure and inspiration for all who come to the campus.

Traditional, significant features on main campus include buildings that incorporate the following exterior features:

� Red roofs; constructed with tile, metal or slate materials; often sloped rather than flat.

� Buff or natural colored building materials; in stone, brick or precast concrete.

� Medium bronze finishes on metal window, door frames, railings and trim.

� Standardized street lighting.

The design of spaces and forms should consider the relationship of all campus structures with the specific character of the surrounding topography. KU building designs should strive for harmony in relation to the immediate site, adjacent structures, and overall campus massing and context by considering:

� scale, form, massing and shapes

� color, texture and character of materials

� points of access, openness, degree of transparency and fenestration

� careful design of the spaces between buildings, and distance from streets.

SITE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

General: Buildings should respond to opportunities afforded by the site. Throughout it's history, the University has endeavored to preserve panoramic views and to establish clear circulation corridors across campus.

� The University is a pedestrian-oriented area. It is important that parking and vehicular circulation do not interfere with dedicated pedestrian corridors.



� Spaces between buildings and other facilities should be designed as functional areas for activities. There is a need for outdoor gathering places with spaces designed for benches and other furnishings.

� Each project should provide for parking adjacent to the facility to help alleviate the shortage of parking spaces on campus, as well as supporting any additional demands the facility may create by adding employees to the campus.

Bicycle Parking: The University has considerable bicycle traffic. Areas heavily used as bicycle routes should be identified for development of bicycle parking with each project. Refer to Division Two - Sitework design standards for typical details and other related information.

Service Areas: Most new facilities will require areas planned for service functions, such as trash and recycling pickup, and delivery of supplies and materials.

� Service areas may contain loading dock facilities, some ground-mounted mechanical and electrical utility equipment, and trash boxes.

� Service areas should be designed to be an unobtrusive part of the facility.

� Architectural or landscape screening is to be provided.

� Service areas should typically provide no less than two parking stalls for University maintenance vehicles. KU Parking will provide appropriate signage for these stalls.

Equipment Screening: Placement of electrical and/or mechanical equipment should be an unobtrusive part of the facility. Architectural or landscape screening should be provided. Screening should take into consideration equipment maintenance and operational clearances, and provide a buffer for noise generated by the equipment.

� Screen walls should be constructed of masonry or architectural concrete materials, or prefinished / naturally weather-resistant metal materials. The use of wood materials for screening is discouraged due to high maintenance demands and lower durability.

Trash Removal: Much of the campus is serviced by the City of Lawrence Solid Waste Division, Department of Public Works. The city has two types of trash trucks; one is a front-loader, the other is a back-loader.

� A "Liftainer" trash system is used to handle the removal of trash from select buildings on the University campus. If it becomes necessary to consider this form of trash collection and removal, KU's FO department can provide additional information about this equipment, vehicular requirements and accessibility issues.

MATERIAL SELECTIONS

General: Appropriations for state building projects are funded with a certain degree of finality. It is expected that new facilities will not have need for major repairs or modifications



for a considerable period of time. This concern should be reflected in the selection of interior and exterior materials that require a minimal amount of maintenance.

� Maintenance shall be a prime consideration in the selection of all finishes.

� Buildings should include technological progress only where there is a proven performance history.

� Lecture halls, classrooms, seminar rooms, and rooms requiring privacy will need special acoustical treatment.

Maintenance Criteria: The University maintains an inventory of repair parts, which requires a certain amount of product standardization. See individual technical sections of this document for standard product requirements.

� The Department of Facilities Operations will provide additional information on product standardization.

"New" Products: Any materials, products or systems that are not broadly recognized as normal, industry-standard, proven practices or components shall NOT be used on KU projects, unless specifically reviewed and approved in advance by DCM.

COLOR SCHEDULES

Project Designers shall prepare a color schedule for review and approval by the University user group, the University Architect and DCM personnel.

� Conduct a preliminary review of proposed materials at the time of Design Development review.

� Conduct a more detailed review of the materials and proposed colors at the time of Final Construction Documents review.

� Conduct a final review of the materials and proposed colors during the early stages of Construction Administration

ACCESSIBILITY

Persons with physical disabilities should be able to share the total campus environment equally with those without disabilities. It is imperative that all facilities be able to accommodate and serve not only students but also University staff and visitors with permanent or temporary disabilities.

� Buildings shall be designed to be universally-accessible. Individual features of facilities shall be designed in such a way as to allow all users a similar method of access.

� "Separate but equal" as a design concept is not acceptable.



� It is the responsibility of the Project Designer and Contractor to meet all requirements of the ADA, in the design and construction of facility improvements for KU.

� The University's Architectural Barriers Committee will be given the opportunity to review construction documents at the Preliminary Design stage and at appropriate phases of the Construction Document stage which delineates accessibility. The Office of Design and Construction Management will coordinate reviews with the committee, and advise the Project Designer of their comments and requested revisions.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

General: Special care and attention must be given to hazardous materials. It is the University’s policy to remove all hazardous materials encountered within existing buildings or sites, and that the removal of these materials be done in compliance with all applicable codes and regulations.

� The Project Designer and DCM Project Manager shall review existing hazmat surveys of the areas affected by the project with KU’s EHS Department during the earliest possible stages of the project’s development.

� If an existing hazmat survey is not available, DCM shall make arrangements for the areas affected by the project to be surveyed, which will then be jointly reviewed.

� EHS will determine for each project if they feel it is necessary to abate the identified hazardous materials in any way that exceeds the current codes and regulations.

� The Project Designer must contact the Office of Design and Construction Management regarding identification of suspect hazardous materials, such as asbestos, lead, chemical, or radioactive materials.

� Refer to Appendix A1.4 – HazMat Matrix for additional information regarding the tasks, timing and responsibilities of the project team regarding the identification and abatement of hazardous materials.

Hazardous Materials: The project's construction documents shall specifically require that the work be completed without incorporating any asbestos or PCB-containing materials, or lead-based coatings into the work.

� At the time of project closeout and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a letter to DCM and EHS, which certifies that the work has been completed without incorporating any asbestos or PCB-containing materials or lead-based coatings into the work.

Abatement Design: The Office of Design and Construction Management has on-call consultants to perform hazardous materials surveys and write abatement specifications. These consultants will be assigned the project and shall be used for such work.

� The abatement design consultant shall prescribe all abatement, containment and handling procedures. If required by KU-EHS, the same consultant will provide monitoring, testing and final clearance verification services.



Abatement Project Costs: These services are a part of the project budget and are accounted for in the overall Project Budget.

� All projects shall include hazardous material surveys as part of the construction documents, unless this has already been done. This shall be true whether the test results come back as positive or negative.

Project Closeout Requirements: Refer to Appendix A1.2 for additional information regarding the provision of Material Safety Data Sheets and other related requirements at the time of Substantial Completion.

CODE ANALYSIS, COMPLIANCE AND BUILDING PERMITS

� General: Refer to Appendix A1.6 -Code Compliance, Code Analysis and Building Permits.

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS:

� The University of Kansas Main Campus in Lawrence, Kansas and the Edwards Campus in Overland Park, Kansas are in UBC Seismic Zone 2A.

� The Kansas Law Enforcement Training Center in Hutchinson, Kansas and KU facilities in Wichita, Kansas are in UBC Seismic Zone 1.

FIRESTOPPING

General: All openings in or penetrations through fire-resistive assemblies shall be protected in accordance with the Uniform Building Code.

� Firestopping materials and assemblies shall be UL-listed for the application and required fire rating.

Responsibility: Each trade which creates the opening or penetration through the fire-resistive assembly shall be responsible for the associated firestopping. The General Contractor is responsible for overall compliance and provision of firestopping on the project.



CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

Work on any construction project must accommodate the University's calendar of classes and special events. University classes and special events may limit normal working hours by the contractor.

� The Project Designer must communicate with the Office of Design and Construction Management to identify specific requirements for timing of the construction work to be included in the construction documents.

� Specific requirements for time frames or staging of the construction activities must be reviewed in detail with the University and outlined in detail in the construction documents.

GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES

The University will make arrangements to provide geotechnical services for the design process. These services will include soil borings required to evaluate site characteristics to ensure overall site development potential and to establish sitework costs early in the design process.

� Geotechnical services during the construction process will be paid for and contracted by the University. These services are a part of the project budget and are accounted for in the overall Project Budget managed by DCM.

� The Project Designer shall assist DCM and DFM in preparing a request for proposal, outlining the scope of geotechnical and soil boring information required. Designers shall provide a site drawing which dimensionally locates the proposed building outline and the specific boring locations desired.

� Project Designers shall submit applicable portions of the contract documents to the geotechnical consultant at appropriate stages of the project's development, and shall submit final construction documents for review and comment prior to the printing of bid documents. Documents to be reviewed shall include drawings and specifications related to earthwork and foundations, which the Geotechnical Engineer shall review for compliance with their geotechnical report and recommendations.

SITE SURVEY SERVICES

The University will make arrangements and separately contract to have site surveys completed of the project site, in consultation with the Project Designer, at an appropriate stage of preliminary design.

� The Project Designer shall assist DCM and DFM in preparing a request for proposal, outlining the scope of the site survey required. Designers shall provide a site drawing which dimensionally locates the proposed building outline and the specific boring locations desired. Designers shall also review a preliminary site survey drawing and advise DCM when it is satisfactory for the project's needs.

� Refer to Division Two – Sitework for additional, specific requirements.



ACOUSTICAL DESIGN SERVICES

The Designer's Basic Services for any capital improvement project at KU shall include the provision of an Acoustical Consultant's services in advising the design team. The acoustical consultant shall review the design at not less than the Design Development and Final Construction Document submittal stages. This review shall analyze the project to ensure that proper control, distribution or isolation of sound has been provided throughout the facility, so that the project's spaces may be used without disruption or diminishment for their intended purposes. The acoustical consultant shall submit a written report of his findings to the Designer, DCM and DFM.

These acoustical reviews shall specifically address the potential for sound problems from the following sources, and shall include recommendations to address those potential problems.

� Mechanical equipment, cooling towers, condensing units, chillers, pumps, transformers and other mechanical or electrical equipment. Refer to Division 15 – Mechanical section re: Mechanical Equipment Sound Control – Design Guidelines for related requirements.

� Air noise from HVAC systems, such as diffusers, grilles, registers, VAV boxes and similar equipment or air delivery devices

� Echoes or other acoustical conditions disruptive to normal speech and other activities in classrooms, meeting rooms, conference rooms, seminar rooms and public spaces

Acoustical design services that would typically be considered an additional service, unless otherwise required as part of the Architectural Program, or as agreed upon during fee and contract negotiations, would include the following:

� Audio-video projection and sound amplification systems

� Audio-video equipment selection and system design

� Special sound reinforcement systems, such as those in performing arts areas

CLASSROOM & LECTURE ROOM FACILITIES

General: Refer to Appendix A1.5 for detailed requirements related to KU's standard classroom designs.

Effective classroom design is increasingly important to the University of Kansas. Objectives stated in the Architectural Program will require the Project Designer to develop enough detail to ensure that design criteria are met.

Requirements for fixed equipment, demonstration tables, etc., may be identified in the Architectural Program and will be discussed in detail with the Office of Design and Construction Management and the Building Committee.

Noise: Effective classroom design depends on attention to detail, as well as to a clear understanding of overall objectives. An understanding of the design factors that affect auditory and visual performance can result in effective classrooms. For the classroom



listener, most noise takes the form of high background noise. The most common sources of background noise are:

� noisy HVAC systems

� lighting ballasts

� projector fans

� external noise via windows and exterior walls

� Operable windows are necessary; therefore, the design should consider external exposure to traffic, cooling towers, exhaust fans, and other equipment.

� Certain room surfaces must be hard and properly angled to provide required reflections. Other room finishes must be soft in order to prevent late reflections or delayed rear wall reflections.

� The ability to see in a classroom enhances the ability to hear. Hearing is enhanced by clear line-of-sight, by good illumination and visual contrast.

A-V & Multimedia Classrooms: Special attention should be considered in classrooms that require sound-reinforcement systems. These audio/visual systems shall be reviewed by and coordinated with the KU Media Committee and the Office of Instructional Development Services. All sound reinforcement shall comply with ADAAG Guidelines.

Standard Area Allowances: The University typically uses the following square footage guidelines in developing programs for the following space needs:

� 15 NSF per occupant: Undergraduate classrooms

� 18 - 20 NSF per occupant: Graduate classrooms

� 25 NSF per occupant: Seminar classrooms

� 30 NSF per occupant: Laboratory classrooms

SUPPORT SPACES - DESIGN GUIDELINES

Custodial Closets: Locate one on each level, with a minimum area of 300 SF in the main custodial closet and with a minimum area of 100 SF in the custodial closets on the other floors. No dimension shall be less than 7 feet in any direction. Include the following in each:

� A floor-mounted sink, located near a door.

� Hangers for wet mops over the sink and for dry mops and brooms on other walls.

� Doors shall be 36" wide and open out.

� Walls with appropriate coatings to protect from moisture and physical abuse.

� Shelves to accommodate supplies in case lots and allow for storage of liquids in 5 or 6 gallon containers.

� A location for a six-foot ladder.



� Three (3) grounded duplex receptacles on an open wall; not behind shelves.

� Floor space for large machines, such as floor polishers.

� Do not locate telephones or electrical equipment in these closets.

� Closets shall have exhaust fans, vented to the building exterior.

Telecommunication Equipment Rooms (KU-IT Closets): These rooms should be stacked vertically where possible.

� Refer to Division 17 - Telecommunications Systems standards for additional, detailed requirements.

Mail Rooms: A mail room or custom-built delivery and pickup box may be required. Mail delivery will need to be discussed with the Director of Printing Services, who administers campus mail, and the departments to determine exact requirements.

Vending Areas: A vending machine area shall be provided in each building. Verify number of vending machines and locations with DCM and KU Administration.

� Location of this area should be carefully considered to avoid noise and light contamination of adjacent spaces.

� Area should receive low-maintenance finishes.

� Trash and recycling receptacles will need to be strategically placed so that those who leave the area after refreshment can properly dispose of waste materials.

� Typically hot foods will NOT be vended unless specifically identified in the Architectural Program.

Mechanical Rooms: Doors should open directly to the outside of buildings where practical.

� The Project Designer shall incorporate knockout panels and or louvers to facilitate replacement of large items of mechanical equipment.

Electrical Rooms: Electrical distribution shall be provided within mechanical rooms or in dedicated electrical equipment closets accessible to corridors or other public space. Equipment closets should be stacked vertically where possible.

ROOM NUMBERING

A room numbering system has been established by the University to assure that the numbering of spaces in a building will facilitate management control, be consistent from building to building, and guide people to their destinations.



� The Project Designer shall submit drawings to the KU Office of Design and Construction Management for room numbering by the KU Office of Institutional Research and Planning (OIRP) prior to commencing with construction documents.

� The room and door numbers identified on the construction documents shall be the same as the numbers used in the building upon completion of the project.

� Plans for change orders that affect the layout of rooms should be submitted to the Office of Design and Construction Management for room re-numbering by OIRP.

SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS

Building Name and Street Number: There should be at least one location for exterior building letters to identify the building and street number. The University policy is to use the name that has been approved by the Kansas Board of Regents, with the name of the major activity or function in smaller letters beneath it. The Street number should be at or near the main entrance.

� Ground lighting may be required for nighttime identification.

� Other exterior directional signage is the responsibility of the University but may be discussed as it relates to site considerations.

� Refer to Division 10 Specialties, Appendix A10.2- Signage for the design standards for specific requirements.

Interior Signage: The Project Designer should include interior signage/graphics as a part of the construction documents. All signage shall comply with ADAAG guidelines.

� Refer to Division 10 Specialties, Appendix A10.2- Signage for the design standards for specific requirements.

EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS

Existing Site Plans: The University has AutoCAD drawings covering most of the main campus in a central database. Most of this data was developed from an aerial survey of the campus that was completed around 1990. These drawings are therefore subject to the normal variations in accuracy common to that type of survey. FO updates the underground utility information as work is done on those systems, and adds information from projects as they are completed.

� These CAD files can be made available to Project Designers working on University projects. By accepting them, Project Designer s acknowledge their understanding that these drawings are reasonably accurate, but may not exactly represent the current site conditions.

� University personnel can also review existing conditions onsite with Project Designers and can provide copies of printed drawings of the site, when available.



Project Designer Obligations: All critical information applicable to the project must be verified onsite by the Project Designer, either with their own forces or by a licensed surveyor that they retain at no additional cost to the University, unless otherwise agreed as part of their contract negotiations with the University.

� Refer to KU’s Division Two - Sitework design standards for additional requirements regarding existing site conditions, surveys and site plans.

EXISTING BUILDING CONDITIONS

Existing Drawings: The University can furnish floor plans of existing buildings to the A/E in the form of AutoCAD files or, if older projects, in raster-format scans of the original drawings.

Project Designer Obligations: Design work in existing buildings will require Project Designers to perform a detailed review of available contract documents and existing constraints. The Project Designer must field-verify critical as-built building conditions in sufficient detail to fully document and coordinate them with the proposed improvements, at no additional cost to the University.

The Project Designer is specifically required to measure and field-verify all critical dimensions affecting:

� exit widths, at both existing door openings and corridors

� clearances within remodeled toilet rooms for accessibility and fixtures

� clearances generally required to meet the ADA accessibility requirements

� actual dimensions required for the installation or maintenance of new equipment or proposed dimension-critical construction within existing spaces. This should include clearances required by codes or recommended by manufacturers, or required for maintenance, such as space to pull coils from installed equipment.

PROJECT NAME AND NUMBERS

Project Name: All correspondence, construction documents, cost estimates, schedules, invoices, pay requests, submittals, shop drawings and other project-related documents shall bear the official project name approved as part of the CCR request and/or as entered in the KU Project Masterlist Database.

KU Project Number: All University projects will be assigned a KU Project Number, consisting of a three digit building number, followed by a dash and a unique four digit number. EX: KU #201-5308.

� This number shall also be included on ALL project-related documents, as noted above.



State Project Number: All projects will be assigned a State project number or A number issued by DFM, which shall be included on all project-related documents, in addition to the KU project number.

Other Project Numbers: On-call construction projects and other projects bid through KU or State Purchasing may have other project numbers assigned, such as Tender or PR numbers. These shall also be included on all project-related contract documents.

� A-E Project Numbers: These may be appended after the KU and state project numbers, but may not be used in lieu of them.

DESIGN REVIEW SUBMITTALS

Quantity Required: For capital improvement projects exceeding $500,000 in value, the Project Designer shall submit not less than six (6) copies of all review submittals to the University, unless otherwise agreed.

� Designers shall verify the number of submittals required by the KU user group and the overall number of submittals to be provided for each design review with the Owner, prior to finalizing the fee negotiations.

� ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL FOR FIRE ALARM AND FIRE SPRINKLER SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE: University Fire Marshal Authority.

An additional three (3) copies of submittals are typically required for DFM and KBOR use. Therefore, a total of nine (9) submittals are typically required for each design review. These shall be distributed as follows:

1 - User Group Representative or Building Committee Chair

1 - University Architect

1 - Facility Operations (FO)

1 - Networking & Telecommunications Services (NTS)

2 - DCM; one to Architectural Manager & one to Engineering Manager

2 - DFM; one to Architectural Manager & one to Engineering Manager

1 - KBOR

9 - TOTAL (Verify)

PROJECT COST

During design, the Designer will be required to furnish periodic construction cost estimates that will help determine whether available funds are sufficient to allow design to proceed, or whether further study and design modifications are necessary.

The University will develop and periodically update the Project Budget, which will itemize the costs for work other than the project’s construction, including work by separate contracts, A/E



fees, printing of bid documents, the project’s contingency funds and other miscellaneous costs.

PROJECT DATA

Cost Estimate Data: The Project Designer shall include total area and unit cost data as part of each cost estimate submittal. This information shall include, as appropriate for each phase:

� the total gross area (GSF) of new construction or remodeled areas;

� the total net assignable area (NASF) of new construction or remodeled areas;

� the total area (in SF and acres) of site to be developed, not including the building footprint;

� key unit quantities, such as the number of seats, beds or parking stalls.

Building Data Form: After bids have been received and contracts awarded, the Project Designer will be required to complete a Building Data form, using either an American Institute of Architect's standard Building Data form, or one furnished by the University. This form will provide historical information about the project, including square footage, cost breakdowns, unit costs and general mechanical/electrical system information.

CONSULTANT FEE PAYMENT SCHEDULE

Consultants shall be paid for KU projects in accordance with the following. Consultants shall format their invoices to include each of the following line items & percentages, unless otherwise agreed. Fee retainages for electronic document submissions shall not be revised, regardless of modifications to the other phases.

Percent of Fee Phase / Submittal

15% Program Review & Concept/Schematic Design

20% Design Development

12% 30% Construction Documents

12% 60% Construction Documents

12% Final Construction Documents & Bidding

(Note: If other than three CD reviews, evenly reallocate 36% total among them.)

3% Submission of Bid Set Electronic Docs. to KU & DFM

(Note: Includes addenda; CA fees will be held until received.)

5% Contract Award & Notice to Proceed

18% Construction Administration



(Note: May be billed monthly, typically matching the Contractor's percent complete.)

3% Submission of As-Built Electronic Docs to KU & DFM

BUILDING COMMISSIONING

All KU capital projects shall typically be commissioned by a consultant specializing in these services, to ensure the proper operation of building components and systems. This consultant will be retained independently by the University, and the costs for these services will be managed by the University as part of the overall project budget.

� Refer to Division 15 - Mechanical design standards for more detailed information about this.

DIVISION ONE FRONT-END DOCUMENTS

The front-end documents for all KU project specifications shall be modified to be consistent with the information included in Appendix A1.2.

PRESS RELEASES & MEDIA RELATIONS

Relationships with the press and publicity agencies regarding progress reports and graphic representations of the building shall be the prerogative of the University, not of the Consultant. The University will release all pertinent information about the project, or must be given the opportunity to approve materials developed by the Consultant prior to their release.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_2009_Div-01-General.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Standards Variance Request Form A1.1

Revision Date: August 1, 2001 Page 1 of 1

Standards Variance Request Form

Project Name:

Project Numbers: KU # CCR A- Date:

Submitted By:

Name: Firm:

Current KU Standard for which variance is requested:

Div. No.: Page No.: Para. Title:

Briefly Describe Current KU Standard:

Requested Variance from Current KU Standard:

Reasons or Justification for Variance Approval:

KU Action: Approved Denied

DCM Asst. Director, Consultant Services: Date:

DCM Director: Date:

University Architect: Date: End of Document : D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\2000-October Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-01_A1.doc

A1.1

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Front-End Spec Requirements A1.2


Front-End Spec Requirements

GENERAL

The following information is to be incorporated by Project Designers into the bid documents, conditions of the contract and Division One documents for each project.

q On State-funded projects, these revisions or additional information shall be incorporated into the DOAS Front-End Data Form, which designers must complete for each project.

q On privately-funded projects, these revisions or additional information shall be incorporated into standard American Institute of Architects (AIA) form documents and the project specifications.

q The Project Designer shall verify that all revisions to the contract documents have been coordinated and revised consistently throughout.

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Project Summary: Designer shall prepare a written summary describing the project’s key features and scope of work, which they shall send to DOAS and the bidding services.

q Estimated Construction Cost and project area shall be included with the summary information.

Existing Building Access:

q Designers shall consult with DCM, DOAS and FO representatives, and shall establish specific dates for prospective bidders to visit the project site and inspect secured spaces.

q Bidders shall be advised that University personnel will NOT be available to provide access to existing facilities on an individual basis. Bidders shall be required to attend one of the pre-arranged site visit times to inspect existing facilities.

q One of the site visit times shall be in conjunction with the PreBid Conference.

q During construction, Contractors needing access to existing buildings can obtain keys from the Facilities Operations' Lockshop.

q It is the responsibility of each Consultant, Contractor or Subcontractor to produce a deposit for keys. The typical deposit amount is $150 per key; verify with Lockshop.

q Contractors or consultants requiring repeated building access must produce a deposit and retain their own keys.

Building Permits: Building permits are NOT required for projects constructed on State property. They are required for projects that are constructed on privately owned property, such as land owned by the KU Endowment Association.

A1.2



q Contact the City of Lawrence to verify specific permitting requirements for projects on private lands, and subject to their codes and regulations.

SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES – 01100

Hazardous Materials: Add the following text to this specification section (numbered as required to be added to DOAS' standard front-end text; modify numbering for privately-funded projects):

1.05 Hazardous Materials

A. Survey: The University's hazmat consultant has completed a hazardous materials survey of the existing areas affected by this project's work. An Executive Summary of that survey's findings has been included as supplemental information for the Contractor, following this section of the specifications.

B. Abatement: The University will separately contract for abatement of all known or suspected hazardous materials, in coordination with the Contractor's schedule. Contractors are to give the University adequate advance notice for abatement work, or testing of suspected materials, to be completed in accordance with this schedule, prior to proceeding with his work in those areas.

SUBMITTALS – 01300

Project Name & Number Identification: Each submittal shall bear the correct project name, and both the KU and state CCR project numbers.

Submittal Logs: Designers shall maintain a submittal log , which lists all submittals required by the contract documents and logs the dates of submittal, approval, rejection or resubmittal for each. Copies shall be periodically distributed to the Contractor and Owner, as requested.

MSDS Sheets: Refer to Project Closeout requirements.

Operating & Maintenance Manuals: Contractor shall submit four (4) complete sets of bound O&M manuals to the University’s Project Manager at the time of project closeout. Distribution shall be as follows:

q Three (3) copies – Facility Operations

q One (1) copy – User Group, typically kept in building’s main mechanical room



QUALITY CONTROL – 01400

Inspections: All work shall be inspected before being covered or concealed, by joint inspection conducted by representatives of the Consultant(s), Contractor, Division of Architectural Services and the Office of Design and Construction Management.

q The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting all inspections and coordinating the attendance of representatives of the A-E, DCM and DOAS.

q The Contractor shall request inspections prior to all concrete pours, giving sufficient advance notice to all parties.

q The Project Designer shall inspect all reinforcing steel for compliance with the contract documents, prior to being covered.

q Work above finished ceilings shall be formally inspected by joint inspection prior to proceeding with finishes.

Quality Control Testing: The University shall typically retain the services of an independent testing agency to perform all required construction testing, and shall pay for such testing out of the project budget. Smaller projects may have testing services provided as part of the construction contract, if approved or directed by DCM. Verify with DCM for each project.

The Project Designer shall specify the scope of testing that will be required, in each appropriate section of the project specifications. The following tests are typically to be required, and performed by the University’s testing agency:

q Earthwork: compaction & moisture content

q Drilled Piers: drilling, bearing depth, bearing material & concrete placement

q Concrete: strength, air content & slump

q Masonry: mortar strength

q Steel: welds & bolted connections

q Fireproofing: coverage & thickness

q Other Tests: As recommended by the Project Designer, and approved or requested by the University.

The Contractor shall give advance notifications to the Owner’s Representatives prior to each required test.

q The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of all testing that proves any part of the work to unacceptable, and for re-testing to assure the acceptance of all corrective work.

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS – 01500

Existing Streets and Walks: The Contractor shall photograph or videotape the site limits, and sidewalks and drives in the vicinity of the project prior to the start of demolition or construction, accompanied by the Project Designer and DCM representatives.



q Photos or videotapes may be used to establish the original condition of existing drives and sidewalks, and repairs required upon completion of the project.

q The Contractor shall keep streets and sidewalks free from debris and mud, within 24 hours after they are soiled.

Temporary Access Roads: The Contractor is responsible for maintenance and repairs of access roads within the construction area and of dedicated access roads into the construction site, including snow removal.

q Cost of maintenance and repairs of access roads, and restoration of affected areas to previous condition, shall be borne by the Contractor.

q Consultants shall review fire department access to existing buildings during construction, shall verify acceptable paths with Lawrence Fire Department administrators, and shall indicate same on construction documents.

Construction Fence: The project’s entire construction site limits shall be fenced, unless otherwise directed or approved by DCM.

q Location of construction fences, contractor access roads and gates shall be shown on site plans in construction documents.

q 6’ high chain link fence with top tension wire, and posts at 10' maximum o.c, with driven posts in lieu of posts set into concrete, shall be specified unless otherwise approved by DCM.

q Contractors shall be required to provide temporary construction fencing or barricades around isolated areas of work that may be hazardous to non-construction personnel.

Protection of Existing Trees and Plantings: The construction documents shall indicate a separate construction fence to be provided by the Contractor around the drip line of all mature trees that are within the project limits and could be damaged by construction traffic or materials storage.

Contractor Parking, Staging & Storage Areas: Parking, staging and storage areas shall be onsite, within the project’s construction limits, or shall be in off-site areas as designated or approved by the University.

q Construction vehicles shall be parked within the project’s construction limits, or legally parked in designated parking places. Parking on sidewalks and lawns will NOT be permitted.

q Refer to the current edition of the University of Kansas Parking Regulations and Map for current campus parking regulations; copies are available from the KU Parking Department . Contractors should contact the KU Parking Department (currently Rita Jordan) at (785) 864-7275, to discuss specific parking permit options and costs applicable to each project.



q Free Offsite Parking: Contractor personnel may park free-of-charge in Lot 217 on West Campus, near 21st and Iowa Streets, and make their own arrangements to bus their personnel to the project site. Campus parking lots, including gravel-surfaced lots, are to be used for the parking of automobiles or light trucks only. They may NOT be used for offsite parking of construction vehicles, trailers, equipment or materials.

q Offsite Staging Areas: The University will make designated parcels of land available upon request to the Contractor and major subcontractors for offsite storage of their construction vehicles, trailers, equipment and materials. These offsite storage areas will be on West Campus, south of 15th Street and east of the KU Motor Pool. Each Contractor who is given temporary rights to a designated parcel of land shall be required to keep his parcel in neat condition at all times, regularly mowed and free from trash and other unsightly debris. The Contractor may fence all or part of his designated parcel, at his option. Within 30 days following Substantial Completion of the last phase of the project, the Contractor shall remove all of his equipment and materials, and shall restore his designated parcel to it’s previously existing condition, including restoration of the finish grade and turf.

Emergency Exits During Construction: Designers are required to identify alternate paths of egress from existing buildings when required exits will be temporarily closed by construction of a new project. Contractor shall be required to maintain emergency exit paths for the public to exit through construction areas at all times during construction.

q The Project Designer shall review all exit paths that will be affected by construction activities and all proposed temporary measures with representatives of the State Fire Marshall’s office and DCM, and shall include all approved measures in the contract documents.

q Refer to KSFMO's Fire Fact sheet that describes these requirements in more detail.

q The Project Designer shall show in the contract documents all exit paths to be temporarily relocated during construction, and shall include appropriate drawings and descriptions of covered walkways or other temporary measures.

q Temporary egress routes shall have concrete or compacted gravel surfacing material, suitable for all-weather access or egress, and for use by persons in wheelchairs if an accessible route.

q If a required exit is closed and the alternate route is not handicapped accessible, designers shall identify or make provisions for temporary areas of refuge. Verify specific requirements for these temporary areas with DCM, DOAS and the State Fire Marshall.

Temporary Site Lighting: Designers shall include provisions in the construction documents for temporary site lighting wherever existing lights are temporarily removed or disconnected, or wherever temporary walks or egress routes are to be provided and existing site lighting is inadequate.



Storm Drainage & Dewatering: Contractor shall be required to provide temporary means of rerouting or pumping stormwater drainage off the site and away from KU facilities during construction period.

q Contractors shall be required to contact the Kansas Dept. of Health & Environment (KDHE) and file appropriate paperwork relative to the regulations governing control of stormwater from construction sites that disturb an area of one (1) or more acres.

Protection of Slopes from Erosion: Contractor shall be required to provide silt fences along bottom edge of all slopes that do not have an established turf due to construction activities.

q Provide soon after existing turf has been removed from slopes greater than 1:10, and which are subject to soil erosion onto adjacent turf or paved areas.

q Maintain until new turf or groundcovers are established.

q Silt fences shall be 12" high synthetic, semi-porous fabric secured to wood posts at no more than 4' centers.

Temporary Utilities: Water, gas, steam and electricity shall be made available to the Contractor at no additional cost from existing points of connection.

q Contractor shall make all connections and extend to point of use.

q Backflow prevention devices shall be required on all connections to water services.

Temporary Telephones: Contractor shall be required to be available during normal business hours by either a cellular phone, or a jobsite telephone with an attached answering machine.

q Contractors can arrange for wired telephone service to the project site through KU’s NTS office at 785-864-9300.

q On State property, private telephone companies like Southwestern Bell must also provide their services and installation work through KU’s NTS department. On private property, Contractors are free to make their own arrangements with telephone service providers.

q Contractors shall provide telephone numbers where their Field Superintendent or Project Manager is available on a 24-hour basis, in case of emergencies.

Temporary Toilets and Sanitary Facilities: Contractors shall be required to make their own provisions for these services.

q Contractors shall not use existing toilets or sinks.

Temporary Trash Disposal: Contractors shall be required to make their own provisions for these services.

q No burning of woody materials or rubbish is allowed on the project site.



q All trash shall be removed from the site and building, and shall be hauled to an authorized landfill.

q No dumping of trash is allowed on University or State property, or in University dumpsters.

Project Identification Sign: Contractor shall provide project sign(s) as indicated in the construction documents.

q Project signs shall include text and graphics as furnished by the University. A/E shall include KU’s standard detail in the contract documents, as indicated in Appendix A1.3.

q Designer shall verify location(s) with DCM, and shall indicate project signs in the construction documents.

q The sign shall be located as shown on the site plan and shall be erected within 30 days after award of the contract.

q The Contractor shall maintain the sign in good condition until completion of the project. No other contractor, subcontractor or trade sign shall be posted on the project site.

SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Contractor shall submit MSDS information about all major building materials incorporated into the project to the KU Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Office for their information and files. Copy transmittal to the DCM Project Manager.

q MSDS information shall be sorted in same order as project specifications and bound, with dividers for each specification section and a cover sheet identifying project name, number, Contractor’s name and address.

q A copy of these sheets shall be included in the Operating & Maintenance Manuals.

Specific Required Data Sheets: MSDS sheets are required for the following, and as requested by KU-EHS.

q Concrete Floor Sealers

q Paints and Stains

q Waterproofing Sealers on Wall Surfaces

q Floor Finishes

q Wall Finishes

q Ceiling Finishes

q Mastics and Adhesives used with other finish materials

q Joint Sealers

q Firestopping Materials



q Roofing Materials

q Coolants and other liquids used in mechanical equipment

Non-Asbestos Certification: Contractor shall submit a letter to the Director of KU's Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Office for their information and files, copied to the DCM Project Manager, which certifies that the construction of the project was completed without any asbestos-containing materials being incorporated into the work.

Building Commissioning: On larger capital improvement projects, the University will typically retain the services of an independent agency to perform these services, and shall pay for those services out of the project budget.

q Refer to Division 15 - Mechanical for additional information and requirements.

End of Document � \\FACILITY_MGMT_2\dcm\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div-01_A2.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Project Sign Detail A1.3


Project Sign Detail

GENERAL

The following information is to be incorporated by Project Designers into the bid documents, conditions of the contract and Division One documents for each project.

End of Document � G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div-01_A3.doc

A1.3

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Hazmat Matrix A1.4


Hazmat Matrix

*** End of Document � D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\2001-June Revision\Stds_sas_Div-01_A4.doc ***

A1.4 DCM / EHS Haz-Mat Matrix Haz-Mat Abatement General

EHS DCM Consultant Contractor Contractor DOAS

1. Review existing data or request survey # # a. Determine presence of Asbestos/Pb # #

2. Perform Haz-Mat Survey # #(EHS to survey project to be released for F.O. Construction) #3. Review design drawings and Haz-Mat survey data to # # determine Haz-Mat disturbance and provide recommendations # #4. Determine option to abate or manager in-place (Joint Effort) # # #5. Project Specs * #

6. Pre-Abatement Documentation a. Abatement Contractor Employer Information # b. KDHE Notifications * # * c. EPA Notifications * # * d. OSHA Notifications * # * e. Occupant Notifications * #7. Abatement Project Oversight/Inspections # #8. Hazardous Materials Disposal * # #9. Abatement Project Final Inspection * # # #10. Post-Abate Documentation a. Waste Shipment Records # # # b. Air Monitoring Records # # # c. Asbestos Removed in area * d. Occupant Notifications * # #11. Abatement Project Records #12. Prior to Construction Review/Walk Through # a. Notification of Hazards # b. Contractor Employee Info #13. Construction Project Oversight #14. ACM/Pb Free Certification # # a. Construction Contractor Letter

*10e. Copy DCM construction administrators on transmittal of Abatement close -out submittals sent to EHS.

*10f. Consultant must fax within 5 working days after project close out to EHS (Johnell Fendley #785- 864-8624 ) a document identifying remaining Haz/ Mat amounts and location.

Feasibility Study / Concept Design Stage

Construction Document Design Stage

Construction Stage

Legend: # Primary Responsibility * Secondary Responsibility

* 5a. EHS to review 90% abatement specs and drawing

*6e. General Contractors Specs must include Notification to Occupants abatement work will take place and identify the areas to EHS (Johnell Fendley)14 days prior to work beginning.

*9a. Final Abatement Inspection to be scheduled by Consultant or EHS.

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Classroom Standards A1.5


Classroom Standards

Note: The following standards have been developed and adopted by KU's Media Committee, which includes representatives from DCM, Instructional Development & Support (IDS), the Budig Hall / Hoch Auditoria staff and other campus offices.

General Classroom Characteristics

1) Location

a) Classrooms should be concentrated on the entry levels of buildings to provide easy access for students and equipment.

b) Classrooms should be located away from noise generators, such as mechanical rooms or s tudent gathering places.

c) For classrooms that need to be darkened, south, east and west-facing windows require a higher degree of blackout capability than do north-facing windows.

2) Size

a) Typically designed with 20 -- 25 square foot per student, to accommodate the programmed number of occupants with:

i) Approximately 20 sf/student for moveable seating

ii) Approximately 10 sf/student for fixed seating

iii) Approximately 20 sf/student for conference table seating

b) Ceiling height should allow for a projection screen large enough to display images of adequate size, and placed high enough off the floor to provide unobstructed sight lines, and have an average height of not less than 9'.

3) Orientation

a) The major entry should be at the rear of the room.

b) Windows should be on the sides of classrooms, not at the front or back.

4) All classrooms shall comply with the American with Disabilities Act.

5) Audio-visual accommodations

a) Support space must allow for the set up and use of audio-visual equipment.

b) Classroom design shall consider present and future instructional technology

c) Design shall focus on ease and success rate of instructional technology

A1.5



Classroom Surfaces and Finishes

1) Walls:

a) Acoustical treatment, using fabric covered acoustical panels to create an NC rating between 20 and 30.

b) Chair rails should be installed on the back wall 25" - 33" above the floor, wherever moveable seating is used.

2) Floor:

a) Vinyl composition tile, unless existing finished concrete floor or carpet is acceptable

b) Aisle areas and the area at the front of the room may be carpeted; no carpeting shall be installed under fixed seating.

c) Coverings should be of a medium to light color, with some pattern

3) Ceiling:

a) Ceilings should be light in color and made of nonreflective material.

b) Acoustical ceiling system shall be used in rooms with tile or concrete floors.

i) Standard tile is Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Product #755, 2'x4'.panel

ii) Standard grid shall be Chicago Metallic Corp., Product #250 Fire Front System; Color: White

4) Doors:

a) Doors should be a minimum of 36" wide with a 32" clear opening.

b) Doors should have a glass panel no more than 100 square inches .

c) Doors should have no ventilation louvers because of noise distractions.

Classroom Fixtures and Furniture

1) Chalkboards (marker boards upon request)

a) Green color to reduce problems with glare

b) Size:

i) 12 foot long X 4 foot high for rooms seating 24 or fewer

ii) 18 foot long X 4 foot high for rooms seating 25 to 75

iii) Designed for the room, for rooms seating 76 or more

c) Chalkboards shall be provided with a full width chalk tray and map rail with cork insert

d) Chalkboards shall be placed so they can be used when the projection screen is in use.

2) Projection screen

a) Size standards from IDS.



b) Consideration should be given to placement to maximize chalkboard use.

3) Seating

a) Moveable seating, either tables and chairs, or tablet-arm chairs, are recommended for rooms seating 48 or fewer. Fixed tables and chairs are recommended for rooms seating 60 or more. Tiered floors should be provided in rooms seating 75 or more.

b) Side chairs should be provided for lecturers and guests.

c) The distance between the projection screen and the first row of seats should be at least two times the projection height, and the distance between the screen and the last row of seats should be at most eight times the projection height.

d) Tablet-arm chairs or fixed seating should have a minimum of 10% of the seats accommodating left handed students.

e) Tablet-arms should provide a minimum of 150 square inches of working surface.

4) Instructor's station, or table and lectern, or podium

5) Light-blocking window blinds set in channels shall be provided where windows exist (Opaque drapes with cord tighteners or blackout shades by special request).

6) Clock:

a) Large, easy to read face, located so that it is easily seen by the presenter.

b) If the building is on the University clock system, classroom clocks should be as well.

7) Manual pencil sharpener located by the entry.

8) Waste receptacle located by the entry.

Classroom mechanical systems (HVAC)

1) Temperature controls

a) Adequate temperature controls to maintain the room between 65 and 78 degrees

b) Temperature controls not accessible to room occupants.

2) Ventilation

a) Adequate ventilation to allow for 4 to 6 air changes per hour.

b) If possible, air circulation system should be capable of being used independently of the heating and air-conditioning systems.

c) Windows in classrooms that seat 75 or fewer should be operable

Classroom Lighting Systems

1) Lighting shall be designed to create a variety of zones within each classroom of 24 or more:



a) Overall light for the classroom

b) Note-taking controlled lighting that only illuminates the seating area of the classroom

i) Lighting for the chalkboard/markerboard area

ii) Lighting for the instructor's station

2) Lighting levels

a) Ability to provide a minimum of 30 foot candles on writing surfaces

b) Ability to reduce general overall lighting by 50% for note taking during media presentations, with no light on the projection screen. Ability to further dim to 5%.

c) Seating areas shall be lighted so that 100% of the lamps are on, or 50% of the lamps are on and those lamps are dimmable to 5%.

d) Note taking light levels must be designed to avoid washing out visually projected images.

3) Lighting controls

a) The lighting controls shall be uniform classroom to classroom.

b) All light switches shall be clustered, simple to use, with clearly labeled functions on the switch plates.

c) Controls for the some of the room lighting should be located near the major entrance doors, and duplicated near the presentation area.

d) Controls for note taking and presentation area lighting shall be adjacent to the presentation area.

e) Motion sensors shall be used to shut off classroom lighting during prolonged unoccupied periods.

4) Light fixtures

a) Unless the room architecture indicates otherwise, 2' X 4' lay-in troffer 2, 3, or 4-lamp fluorescent fixtures shall be used.

b) Light fixtures shall have electronic ballasts.

c) Generally fixtures shall have acrylic diffusers, however, fixtures in rooms with monitors shall have parabolic diffusers to minimize glare on the screens.

d) Recessed incandescent lighting should be used for special applications or purposes only, such as side and back border lighting and note taking in media classrooms.

Classroom electrical systems

1) Conduit

a) Low voltage cables (e.g. audio, video, and control cables) are all required to run in a separate conduit from any AC wiring.

2) Circuits



a) As much as possible, audio, video, and control electrical circuits should be fed from "clean" legs from the transformer free of high inductive loads. To the extent possible, there should be no elevator motors, compressor motors, blower motors, or other electrical devices on the side of the power transformer that feeds the media equipment.

b) All electrical control circuits should come to a single location, convenient for maintenance and secure from vandalism.

3) Outlets

a) Utility AC outlets on separate circuits from the media equipment circuits should be provided inside the classroom for overhead projectors, portable VCR?s, computer terminals, vacuum cleaners, etc.

b) There should be at least one duplex outlet on each wall, as well as on the front, classroom side, of any projection booth. In rooms with tiered seating, an outlet should be provided in the face of the first riser and on the face of a riser mid-way back in the middle of the seating, both centered in the room.

c) Wall outlets should be positioned 18" above the floor.

d) Power and audio/video outlets should be mounted on vertical surfaces rather than a tabletop or the floor to avoid the intrusion of water and debris.

e) AC outlets shall be provided near or on the ceiling for rooms with monitors.

4) Minimum electronic services to be provided in classrooms:

a) Classrooms seating 24 students or fewer shall have:

i) Dual duplex data outlets at the front of the classroom

ii) Outlet for a clock

b) Classrooms seating between 25 and 75 students shall have:

i) Dual duplex data outlets at the front of the classroom and at all audio-visual equipment locations.

ii) Outlet for a clock

iii) House speaker system

iv) Voice/audio amplification system

v) Accommodation for overhead projector, slide projector, computer

Classroom Audio-Visual Systems

1) Rooms with a video projector shall have an electric motor driven screen(s).

2) Those rooms that have 3-gun projectors shall have electric motor-driven screen with side tension cables.

3) Data connections should be adjacent to the instructor's area in all classrooms.



Standard equipment in Media Classrooms (From IDS' website)

Each media classroom shall have the following core of multimedia equipment. Internet access is available in all the rooms.

q VCR – videotape recorder-player

q Visual presenter

q Sound amplifier/speakers

q Slide projector

q LCD video/data projector with 640x480 resolution

q Projection screen

q Computer connections:

q VGA cable for PC computer connection

q Mac cable for Mac systems

q Audio cable – mini-plug for external sound

q Ethernet cable (10BaseT)

*** End of Document � D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\2001-June Revision\Stds_sas_Div-01_A4.doc ***

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards General Requirements- Code Compliance A1.6


General Requirements-

Code Compiance, Code Analysis and

Building Permits NEW SECTION

GENERAL

All projects require review and acceptance from the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) before specific phases of the project can be started. Failure to follow the submittal process will result in possible delays, redesign and or fines from the AHJ. The AHJ duties are delegated by agreement with the State Fire Marshal’s office to DFM (Department of Facilities Management) in Topeka. DFM IS THE AHJ. The DFM web site- http://www.da.ks.gov/fp/manual.htm provides current review requirements and submittal forms and is updated every quarter or in some cases whenever a change is needed. Changes are made WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE; therefore submittal documents MUST be downloaded and used from their site. Failure to use the correct form might result in a review delay.

CODE ANALYSIS

� The Architect/Engineer is responsible to provide a full analysis of code compliance for every design and document that analysis on a Code footprint. DCM is responsible to oversee this process, review submittal documents for completeness and adherence to DFM and DCM standard practices. The KU Director of Fire & Life Safety representing the University Fire Marshal Authority is responsible to oversee all associated submittal processes, review the projects Fire and Life Safety systems throughout the design and construction process for compliance with listed codes along with the Kansas Fire Prevention Code.

CODE FOOTPRINT:

� Submit per DFM and DCM graphic standards � Answer all DFM “Request for Review” form check sheet items. � Utilize DFM symbol legend; do not delete any symbols, symbols can be added. � Utilize DCM template for cover sheet and DCM format for site and floor plans. CFPs

not using the standard template shall be rejected. Template is available through Joe Friday at DCM.

� Include all required items per KSFMO Fire Fact 61 and DFM Building Manual see chapter 7.

� Include all existing and new special agreements which would include any alternate means and methods negotiated during the design process. IMPORTANT- if any alternate method is not documented on the CFP it is NOT agreed to and will be rejected.

� Utilize 11x17 inch sheet format, black and white in the approved AutoCAD format. � Inserted complete CFP on to the CDs at 1 to 1 never reduced or orient differently

than plans on contract documents. Utilize original signed and sealed CFP on CDs if

A1.6



available at the time of printing. Issue signed and approved document as a change order to make it a part of the Contract Documents if they were not included on the original CD sheets.

� The CFP shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed codes. Variances, alternate means and methods or equivalent designs will not be considered in new construction unless agreed to by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and by the agency (KU-DCM) in writing before the Schematic Design stage is complete.

� When utilizing the KU small scale drawings, Designers are required to field-verify all critical information that may affect or be affected by the project's particular requirements. KU small scale drawings are diagrammatic and may not reflect recent changes to the building.

� Provide an AS Built CFP if changes were made during construction that effect the content of the CFP. Submittal shall be in both AutoCAD and PDF formats. All sheets in a PDF submittal shall be in one file.

� Per KU standards along with the full contract document submittal provide a separate electronic submittal of the CFP sheets to DCM attention Bob Rombach at [email protected].

� CFP shall include but may not be limited too:

� The total gross square footage of each level in the facility.

� Occupancy group(s) and separations with graphic lines.

� Type(s) of construction.

� The square footage of each assembly occupancy and the calculated occupant loads within each space.

� Chemical control zones with projected chemical quantities (Research Labs)

� Dashed line of major egress routes to required exits, with cumulative occupant loads at junctions with tributary egress routes.

� Clearly designate each required exit, at both interior and exterior locations.

� Provide total occupant load & calculated egress width at each required exit & actual exit width per graphic legend.

� Indicate areas of refuge at required exits that are not HC-accessible, in non-sprinklered buildings.

� Hour ratings for fire-rated walls, partitions and roof-ceiling assembly; include in bid docs, as part of partition schedules, details &/or wall / building sections.

� Fire extinguisher locations and lines indicating radii of coverage in public access area, per NFPA 10. Show required extinguishers in labs or special systems.

� Local hydrant tests related to water pressure and volume for sprinkler system design if applicable. The information must be no older than 3 years.

� Location of fire hydrants and fire access lanes on site. Utilize and graphically show the 300 foot to fire apparatus and 150 foot fire hose reach requirement from the staged apparatus to every exterior part of the buiding.

� Distances from building to assumed or actual property lines.

� Standpipe and post indicator valve locations.

� Primary fire department access, verify with KU Fire Marshal and City FD.

� Fire Dept. "Knox box" locations on exterior of building.

� Show main fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator panel locations.

� Area Of Refuge master intercom call station location, if provided

� Temporary Egress Plan- Show locations of temporary exit stairs and/or egress paths during construction on a separate temporary egress sheet if needed. Show 1 hour fire



rated construction separation partitions. (gyp bd. on both side of metal studs at 24” OC not taped.

� Storm shelter locations, if any.

� Show other critical code compliance and life safety information.

PERFORMANCE BASED DESIGN

� Shall not be allowed or considered in new construction, and is discouraged in all cases. Performance-based design will be considered for projects in existing facilities only on a case-by-case basis.

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS- FINAL

� Submit sealed final Contract Document set along with the DFM REQUEST for REVIEW to DCM- Fire & Life Safety Director who will review completeness of submittal, log it for tracking purposes and submit it to DFM for permitting review. Most projects will not be approved for construction without this being complete.

BUILDING PERMIT:

� Is required and will be issued by University Fire Marshal Authority (UFMA) before construction is to proceed on all projects on State and KU Endowment owned land on west campus. On State land UFMA permits are issued after all approvals for construction are received from DFM who is the Authority having jurisdiction. On Endowment land UFMA permits are issued when KSFMO reviews and approves a code footprint submitted through UFMA.

� City permits and City inspection is required on KU Endowment owned land.

� Projects started without a building permit will be stopped. Possible fines of $1000.00 a day will be assessed by the State Fire Marshal along with an order to Cease and Desist sent to the Chancellor. To avoid this legal action from the State, the KU Fire Marshal shall issue a stop work order.

� Projects on privately owned land and KU Endowment land are subject to the Jurisdiction of the City they are in. For the City of Lawrence, City review, permitting and inspection apply. If the buildings are for the use of University personnel and programs they are subject to State Fire Marshal and University Fire Marshal review, permitting and inspection.

LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS

� Fire Alarm- Require submittal to DFM by the A/E through DCM (Fire & Life Safety Director)

� Fire Sprinkler- Require submittal to DFM by the A/E through DCM (Fire & Life Safety Director)

� Submittal approvals from DFM are required before work can proceed on project site.

CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY:

� (Final or Partial)- DFM requires the A/E to request the Certificate of Occupancy coordinated to the DFM field inspector’s inspection. Partial area occupancy can be granted if the area is complete and defined on a plan by the A/E.



� TEMPORARY CofO- NO TEMPORARY Certificate of Occupancies will be granted by DFM. If it is not complete they will not issue the certificate of occupancy and the area requested cannot be occupied. If found occupied DFM will send a notice to the State Fire Marshal who will without question order a Cease and Desist and assess a fine.

SUBMITTAL PROCESS:

Refer to Chapter 7 of the DFM “BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MANUAL” for detailed DFM requirements of the submittal and inspection process outlined below: http://www.da.ks.gov/fp/manual.htm . ALL submittals MUST be processed through DCM Fire & Life Safety Compliance Director. Direct DFM submittals will not be processed without special arrangements being agreed to.

� Compliance Submittals- All compliance submittals MUST go through KU DCM, Attention Bob Rombach, Fire & Life Safety Director who will review for completeness and submit to DFM. Please have them logged in at the 2nd floor desk. If items are found needing correction, comments will be issued

� DFM State project number- Must be requested through DFM and must be on all Review for Requests to DFM. Also please include the KU project number.

� Is a CFP (Code Footprint) required- This form should be used if the A/E feels that a CFP is NOT needed. Include a small scale plan of the project so DFM can understand what is being requested. The A/E must submit the DFM form and have sign- off from DFM to defer the CFP, otherwise IT IS REQUIRED. If there is no intention to defer, request is not needed.

� CFP preliminary submittal- In progress CFPs should be submitted to KU DCM only at schematic design. It is not recommended to send to DFM. Please verify with the DCM PM. The DFM review at this stage if done is for information purposes only.

� CFP Final submittal- A sealed and signed final CFP is required at the conclusion of Design and Development phase of work. This will be reviewed by the DCM Project Manager and the University Fire Marshal before the Agency signature is applied and 3 original CFPs are sent to DFM for formal approval. This MUST have the DFM request for review form properly filled out or it will not be reviewed. The Agency contact is Bob Rombach for all projects. Documents are sent every Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 10am. Allow at least one business day for DCM review and processing. Allow 2 weeks for DFM review. Request status of review from both DFM and DCM at the end of 2 weeks to insure it is being processed.

� CFP Comments- DFM comments are submitted to the Single Agency contact and A/E listed on the Request for review. It is the responsibility of the A/E to respond and / or correct per DFM comments directly to DFM and copy the necessary DCM parties. Revised CFPs, if needed, will require a re-issue of the package and re-submittal through DCM.

� CFP Approval- In many cases this will allow the issuance of a “PERMIT TO BUILD”

allowing construction to proceed, however at the discretion of DFM construction approval will be held pending final CD (Contract Document) submittal and approval.



� CD preliminary submittal- Recommended to be submitted to DCM only who has project management responsibilities. DFM does not have project management responsibilities and does not review preliminary submittals in detail. They will offer preliminary code clarification on specific issues if identified clearly however they will only fully review the plans when they are final.

� CD FINAL Submittal- Submit a FINAL sealed set of plans to DFM through DCM the same as the CFP submittal even if they receive those same plans for printing. It must have the Request for Review and be tracked separately. If DFM is printing the set still send a separate sealed set through the process above to be properly reviewed. Failure to do so may result in a delay in getting the Permit to Build.

� CD Comments- Same as CFP comments. Please respond to each item, correct drawings if needed and copy all necessary parties. Supplemental drawings are recommended. Request a status of the review after 2 weeks.

� Project Document Acceptance- Will result in an electronic acceptance form being

sent out by DFM to the Agency Contact (Bob Rombach) and the A/E. DCM at this time will process the acceptance, verify accuracy, log all activities and issue a “PERMIT TO BUILD” which will include the approved final CFP and necessary inspection requirements and shop drawing submittal requirements. CHANGES to the design after this point that effect code compliance features MUST be submitted to DFM and the University Fire Marshal for review. CHANGES to any features shown on the CFP will require the CFP to be updated and re-accepted before a Certificate of Occupancy can be issued by DFM. The CFP re-submittal shall be done using the original process submitted for review and signature to DCM.

� Fire Alarm Shop Drawing Submittal- Is required before work can start on the fire alarm system. The A/E is to submit the Engineered reviewed shop drawing along with a REQUEST FOR REVIEW form to DCM attention Bob Rombach. After a DCM review they will be submitted to DFM for final compliance review. Failure to include the Request for Review or sending them direct to DFM will result in the drawings not being reviewed which will result in a denial of the certificate of occupancy.

� Fire Sprinkler Shop Drawing Submittal- Is required before work can start on the fire sprinkler system. The A/E is to submit the Engineered reviewed shop drawing along with a REQUEST FOR REVIEW form to DCM attention Bob Rombach. After a DCM review they will be submitted to DFM for final compliance review. Failure to include the Request for Review or sending them direct to DFM will result in the drawings not being reviewed which will result in a denial of the certificate of occupancy.

� Review Time- DFM requires 2 weeks for review and processing. After two weeks it is recommended the A/E request directly to DFM a status of the review. Copy the DCM project manager and University Fire Marshal of any requests for status.

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Sitework 2

Revision Date: © August 1, 2001 Page 1 of 15

Sitework

GENERAL Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form.

RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section.

Division 1 - General Requirements; refer to sections regarding construction testing and field quality control requirements. Also contains additional information re: information that KU can furnish and the consultant’s obligations to field-verify existing conditions.

Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project.

Quality Control Testing of Sewer Lines: Video scans of sewer systems may be arranged for by the Owner, if appropriate.

Campus Landscape Master Plan: All projects shall be designed and constructed to be consistent with the Campus Landscape Master Plan.

Current editions of this document can be viewed at the KU-DCM website: http://www.ku.edu/home/fmku/

Division 3 – Concrete: These requirements are also applicable for site-related concrete work.

Division 5 – Metals: Contains requirements for handrails and guardrails.

Division 15 – Mechanical: Contains additional information applicable to site utilities.

Division 16 – Electrical: Contains information on site lighting and site utilities.

Division 17 – Telecommunication Systems: Contains information on site infrastructure related to telecommunications systems.

STREETS & PARKING LOTS – DESIGN GUIDELINES Reference Standards: Comply with the following.

"Standard Specification for State Road and Bridge Construction," Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT)

2



"Specifications and Construction Methods for Asphalt Concrete," The Asphalt Institute.

Parking – Typical Dimensions:

Drive Lane with 90-Degree Stalls on each side: 65' back-to-back is recommended overall dimension; 58’ back-to-back is the minimum overall dimension.

Parking Stalls: 8’-5” typical o.c. stall widths.

Emergency Vehicle Access: Each project shall consider access routes for police, fire and emergency medical vehicles to drive up close to buildings. Indicate proposed access routes on preliminary site plans and code plans, and discuss need for paving with KU.

Minimum Paving Thickness:

Service Drives & Drive Lanes: 8” asphalt (6” base & 2” top course); or 6” p.c. concrete.

Parking Areas: 6” asphalt (4” base & 2” top course); or 6” AB-3 compacted base with 4” asphalt; or 6” p.c. concrete.

Loading Dock Aprons: 8” – 10” p.c. concrete; verify thickness required for actual loading conditions; do not use asphalt pavements in loading dock areas where trucks may park for extended periods of time.

Jointwork: Comply with recommendations of the Portland Cement Association (PCA).

Consultants shall show all control and expansion joints in all pavements on site plans.

Striping: 4” wide; white for typical stalls; yellow for handicapped stalls, centerlines and crosswalks.

Curb and Gutters: Cast-in-place portland cement (P.C.) concrete, reinforced; include KU’s standard details as shown in Appendices A2.4 and A2.5 in the drawings. Asphaltic curbs are NOT to be used.

Underground Conduits and Sleeves: Provide marker at top of curb above all underground conduit or sleeve locations.

Use a 2" high "S" symbol cast or embossed into concrete.

Handicapped Parking: Indicate handicapped parking stalls on site plans. KU prefers to use universal stalls, as shown in the ADA Accessibility Guidelines, to greatest extent possible.

Service Vehicle Parking: Indicate on site plans at least one stall adjacent to each new or renovated building for temporary parking of delivery, service or maintenance vehicles.



Verify location and quantity required with DCM and user group.

KU Parking Department shall provide appropriate signage for each stall of this type.

Parking Lot Signage: KU Parking shall provide standard university signage for handicapped, visitor or maintenance stalls, as well as signage designating parking lot zone designations or directional signage.

Designers may provide appropriate posts for the mounting of handicapped, visitor or maintenance parking stall signage, or KU can arrange to provide the simple steel tube posts with the signage.

SIDEWALKS – DESIGN GUIDELINES Accessibility:

Layout walks to achieve 1:20 or less slopes in all locations, to greatest extent feasible.

Avoid use of 1:12 ramps as much as possible.

All walks to be noted to have a 1:50 (1/4" per foot) maximum cross-slope.

Provide accessible routes from building entrances to accessible parking or loading zones and, wherever feasible, to other walks and accessible routes across campus.

Standard Widths:

8’ minimum width at main circulation walks

6' minimum at secondary, less-heavily traveled walks

4' minimum at incidental, low-traffic walks.

Standard Thickness: 5-1/2” (due to maintenance vehicle traffic on walks).

Concrete Mix: 4,000 psi; 3" to 4" slump; 6% +/- 1% air-entrained concrete.

Expansion & Control Joints: Designers shall show on site or floor plans.

Expansion joints shall be required at all walk to curb, manhole, structure or building abutments, and at no greater than 40' o.c. in continuous walks or slabs in each direction.

Expansion joints details shall require ½" diameter x 12" long smooth dowels at 18" maximum o.c., centered in depth of walk and set perpendicular to walk's long dimension.

Expansion joints shall be detailed to indicate sealant on top of ½" thick joint filler.

Control joints shall be detailed to be sawcut s or tooled / trowel-cut joints, penetrating one-fourth the depth of the slab.



Subgrade: Require undisturbed or compacted earth subgrade; sand fill is NOT acceptable; 1" or 2" of granular fill may be used for leveling subgrade only.

Thickened Edges: Exposed edges of all sidewalks and walks on each side of expansion joints shall be detailed to be thickened to be not less than 8" deep, with bottom of thickened edge angled up to bottom of walk at no more than 45 degree slope.

Finish: All walks shall receive a broom finish, perpendicular to the primary direction of travel.

HANDICAPPED CURB RAMPS – DESIGN GUIDELINES Handicapped curb ramps shall be provided at each location where new walks abut curbs. They shall be set at approximately 90-degree angles to the curb and directly opposite each other, in the direction of travel.

Comply with provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act, and KU’s standard curb ramp detail.

Designers shall include KU's standard curb ramp detail, as shown in Appendix A2.2, in the bid documents.

Brick Pavers on Ramp: Glen-Gery "Chambersburg", brown color, with chamfered edges

BICYCLE PARKING AREAS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: The University has considerable bicycle traffic and has adopted a standard for bicycle parking rails. Areas heavily used as bicycle routes should be identified for development of bicycle parking with each project.

Each project shall include bicycle parking in an unobtrusive area near one or more building entrances.

KU’s standard bike rack detail, as shown in Appendix A2.3, shall be included in the construction drawings.

RETAINING WALLS – DESIGN GUIDELINES Retaining walls shall be constructed of appropriate materials for the context of each location, and shall be one of the following materials.

Low Walls (typically 3' or less): Concrete, concrete masonry or stone materials.



Medium to Tall (3' or higher): Reinforced concrete, with a sandblasted or otherwise appropriate decorative finish and rustication joint patterns. Also required for walls supporting significant lateral loads.

SITE SURVEYS AND LAYOUTS Facilities Operations will provide benchmarks, with coordinate point locations and elevation information, per the University's established campus-wide coordinate system.

A qualified land surveyor or civil engineer must layout all work. Facilities Operations will not layout projects for consultants or contractors.

Survey Drawings: Comply with all applicable requirements for Site Plan Drawings, as noted below.

SITE PLAN DRAWINGS All site surveys and site plan drawings shall comply with the following, unless otherwise directed or approved by the University.

Scale: 1” = 20’-0” (preferred)

Optional Scales: 1” = 30'-0” , 40’-0”, 50’-0” or 100’-0”, as approved by KU.

Campus Coordinate System: Show KU’s campus-wide coordinate grid on all site plans, including surveys.

Grid Interval: 100’ in both directions, 50' when appropriate, or as approved by KU.

KU-FO will locate campus coordinate system onsite for site surveyors. DCM can provide copies of existing site plans in AutoCAD files which include this information, for designers to use during preliminary design.

Topographic Contours:

Planning or Preliminary Design Drawings: Two-foot intervals, or as approved by KU.

Surveys & Construction Drawings: One-foot intervals.

Survey Drawings:

The unedited survey drawing shall be included in the contract documents, with an annotation: This sheet is included for reference and information only.

Include the surveyor’s seal and firm information on each survey drawing, in addition to the primary project consultant’s project title block.



Existing Underground Utility Lines: Add the following text to the bid documents. Typically, include these notes on each site plan drawing which contains information about new &/or existing site utilities:

Contractor shall call both Kansas One Call (1-800 DIG-SAFE; 1-800-344-7233) to request a utility locate ticket and the Facility Operations Engineering office (785-864-5620; cell: 785-393-4235) prior to beginning any excavation work, for onsite assistance in locating known underground utilities in the area of work.

Contractor shall contact FO Engineering office (785-864-5620; cell: 785-393-4235), prior to backfilling any underground utility lines and shall allow adequate time during normal business hours for FO personnel to survey and establish location and depths of all lines.

EARTHWORK - 02300 Geotechnical Engineering Report: Consultant shall edit applicable specification sections to incorporate or reflect contents of this report, shall note that the entire report is available for review at the Owner or Architect’s office, and shall note that this information is included for reference and general information only.

Designers shall NOT simply reference the geotechnical report and indicate that the Contractor is to comply with the report recommendations. These reports often contain optional or analytical statements, which require the Designer to evaluate and select the most appropriate actions. Designers are required to include appropriate and explicit details or specification text regarding the geotechnical report's recommendations in the bid documents for each project.

Soil Borings shall be copied and bound into the project manual as an appendix at the end of the Division Two specifications.

Stripping and Stockpiling:

Indicate the area of grading to be stripped and salvage topsoil for reuse onsite.

Identify the area for stockpiling on the drawings.

Fill Materials: If onsite material is not available in sufficient quantity, Contractor shall purchase and haul in approved off-site materials.

Backfill:

Backfill compaction work shall follow the recommendations of KDOT Section 210 (1990), unless directed otherwise by Engineering Geologist.

Under Slabs & Walks: Only granular fills will be allowed beneath walks or slabs-on-grade. Sand is explicitly prohibited for use as a fill material.

Backfill behind walls shall be free-draining crushed limestone at weep holes, wrapped with an acceptable, permeable geotextile fabric, topped with an 18" deep compacted soil cap.



Drainage fill shall be a washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 1 1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

Piping Trench Backfill: Use CS-1 materials (pea gravel is acceptable, but NOT sand).

Backfill in utility trenches where rollers cannot reach shall be compacted with power tampers in 6-inch (maximum) layers to meet specified type of compaction.

Topsoil: Include the following in the contract documents:

Topsoil must be of good quality, friable loam, free of extraneous material and plant growth, and shall not consist of more than 30% clay.

A minimum of six inches (6") of topsoil shall be spread in all designated areas.

All areas to receive topsoil that are densely compacted, glazed or "hard-panned," shall be roughed-up or scarified prior to topsoil placement.

Excess Cut Materials: Haul and dispose excess cut materials at off-site locations, per governing regulations, unless onsite locations are made available by the University.

TERMITE CONTROL – 02361 Termite control treatments shall be provided under all slab-on-grade construction.

UTILITY TUNNELS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: Each new building or addition shall be required to extend the campus utility tunnel system as necessary to convey appropriate site utilities to it, as part of it's scope of work.

In some cases, the University may determine that the location or character of the building or addition does not require utility tunnel extensions.

Identification System: KU has developed a system for identifying utility tunnel components, which shall be used on all projects. The University can provide site plans of existing tunnel designations, and shall assign appropriate designations to all new tunnel components. Designers shall show the designations for pertinent tunnel components, both existing and new, on drawings.

Design: Each new utility tunnel shall be designed to accommodate current and future utility needs those parts of the campus served by it, as determined by the University.

Designers shall consult with DCM, FO and NTS to determine the best location for tunnels. DCM's Planning staff shall also be consulted to identify future proposed building or



infrastructure locations, which shall be shown on proposed tunnel site plans, to verify that the needs of both have been coordinated.

Construction documents shall include dimensioned site plans to clearly locate all tunnel segments, cross-sections and appropriate details. Drawings shall also include vertical and horizontal profiles of each tunnel segment, showing all existing structures and utility lines crossing or abutting tunnel segments.

Minimum Interior Dimensions: Tunnels shall be designed to be a walk-through system, and shall typically have a 7' clear interior height. Tunnels shall be not less than 7' wide. This width is intended to accommodate not less than a 4' interior clear walkway width between the anticipated utility lines and their support systems. This assumes a 2' width along one side for wet piping, and a 1' width along the opposite side for dry piping/conduits. If light fixtures are ceiling-mounted, the 7' clear height is from their bottom surface.

Profile: Tunnels are typically recilinear, but other profies will be considered on a per-project basis.

Utility Lines in Tunnels: Tunnels are intended to accommodate the following utility lines: Steam, condensate, chilled water and primary electrical lines. Domestic water, irrigation water, sanitary sewers, storm sewers and gas lines are NOT to be routed within tunnels.

Telecommunication Lines: Telecommunication lines are typically NOT to be routed within utility tunnels, as determined by NTS and DCM on a per-project basis. The preferred alternative is to construct a concrete-encased conduit ductbank which is poured directly adjacent to the campus utility tunnels, and which terminates in pullboxes or telecommunication rooms that are adjacent to tunnel entry points. Refer to Division 17 for additional requirements.

Existing Utility Lines: When new tunnels cross-over existing underground utility lines, the existing lines shall be relocated as required as part of the new tunnel's project, to accommodate the desired tunnel routing.

Existing or new cross-over utility lines shall not be penetrate tunnel walls, unless it is technically infeasible to relocate them. If cross-over lines are specifically approved by KU to penetrate tunnel walls, the Designer must detail their points of penetrations to be watertight, using sleeves, sealed fittings or other means.

Structural Loads: Tunnels shall be designed to withstand vehicular traffic loading over the top of them, whether exposed on grade as a sidewalk, street or parking area, or fully buried below grade.

Maintenance Access & Egress: Tunnels shall be accessible from standard swing doors to the greatest extent feasible. On-grade entrances with sloped hatches and sloping walkways are preferred. DCM or FO personnel can illustrate by some existing examples, such as the Mississippi Street tunnel entrance. Tunnel walking surfaces shall be level or uniformly sloped. Where changes in height occur abruptly or when access is from above or below, stairs shall be used in lieu of ladders or manholes to provide access.

Material Access: Tunnels and access points shall be designed to accommodate easy access of materials and equipment into any segment, for maintenance or new construction purposes. If 20' sections of piping cannot be carried into each tunnel segment through nearby pedestrian access points, piping access shall be provided into each tunnel segment by access ports, trench grates or similar means.



Security: All entry points for pedestrians or materials shall be secured, either by locks or mechanical fasteners. Locksets on doors into tunnels shall be locked on exterior at all times, but operable from the interior at any time (no interior keyed locks or deadbolts).

Safety: Utility tunnels shall be designed in compliance with OSHA standards regarding "confined spaces".

Per KU-FO policy, contractors and consultants working within tunnels are advised that nobody is to enter the tunnels alone, and they are to wear hardhats and carry a flashlight and two-way radio or cell phone with them at all times.

Contact the KU Facility Operations Safety Officer prior to initial tunnel access, to review KU's tunnel access safety policy. Verify and complete any training, permits or documentation that may be required by FO before entering tunnels.

Drainage: Tunnels shall have a means of conveying intruded water to drains spaced at appropriate intervals that daylight onto grade. If tunnel segments are below-grade, provide sumps and sump pumps which direct intruded water out onto grade. Detail outlets so they will not be damaged by mowing equipment or vehicular traffic, and to exclude small animals from entering tunnel system.

One option for internal drainage is to slope tunnel floor ¼" per foot to one side, and provide a 1-1/2" deep x 3-1/2" wide cast-in-place gutter along the low side of the tunnel floor, directing water to drains or sumps.

Ventilation: Provide by natural or mechanical means, as appropriate for conditions expected within each tunnel segment.

Lighting & Power: Provide general illumination throughout all sections of utility tunnels, operable by internally-illuminated light switches at each access point into tunnel.

LIght fixtures shall be corner-type, mounted above the "dry piping" side of the tunnel, with a polycarbonate lens and flourescent bulbs. Space fixtures at intervals adequate for wayfinding and egress. Recommended lighting levels are 1 fc minimum, and 5 fc average. All lighting shall be fed from a circuit that has emergency backup power.

Ground-fault duplex outlets shall be provided at 100' maximum spacings within tunnels, fed by 20 amp circuits that are independent of the lighting system. Install duplex outlets adjacent to light fixtures as much as possible.

Telephones: Provide campus-only telephones at major nodes and adjacent to equipment rooms, for use by maintenance personnel. Phones shall be secured in a waterproof box, with a lock keyed to KU's maintenance keys.

Construction: Utility tunnels shall be constructed of materials and configurations deemed appropriate for each application.

Tunnels shall be constructed of either cast-in-place concrete, or precast concrete.

Corrugated metal and metal deck framing materials are NOT allowed in new tunnels.

Utility Support Systems: Support components and fasteners shall be of non-corrosive materials or of hot-dipped galvanized steel. Utility lines are not to be hung from tunnel ceilings, though light fixtures and duplex outlets may be ceiling-mounted.



Waterproofing: Tunnels shall have dampproofing applied on below-grade wall surfaces and, if below grade, on top surfaces. Tunnels in areas where the water table or groundwater is expected to consistently occur above the tunnel's floor elevation, or where a sidewalk is poured above the tunnel roof, shall receive waterproof membranes on all below-grade surfaces, including bottoms.

ALL below-grade construction joints shall be detailed to have continuous waterstops (if cast-in-place concrete) or mastic seals (if precast concrete) applied within the joint, to limit groundwater or surface water intrusion.

Tunnel Terminations at Buildings: Detail so that tunnels are separated from buildings with one-hour fire-rated doors and walls. All penetrations through termination walls shall be firestopped. Doors shall have locksets and smoke gasketing. Provide sleeves through termination walls for future utility lines, as directed by DCM.

Steam And Condensate Piping Insulation In Tunnels: Designers shall specify preformed Mineral-Fiber (fiber glass) insulation per ASTM C547, type I in thicknesses identified below. Install field-applied, 30-mil minimum, PVC fitting covers and insulation jacketing per ASTM D1784.

Insulation thicknesses greater than 2-inches shall be built-up of multiple-layer installations, with each layer secured separately. Joints in multiple layer installations shall be staggered.

Submittals and Quality Control sections of the specification should specifically include the "mockup" requirements identified within Masterspec Section 15083 for Contractor demonstrations of quality of insulation applications and finishes.

Other product and execution requirements should be per Masterspec Section 15083.

Tables – Required Pipe Insulation Thicknesses:

Pipe Size (Inches)

Total Insulation Thickness (Inches)

1 1-½

1-½ 2-½

2 2-½

3 3

4 3

6 4

Pipe Size (Inches)

Total Insulation Thickness (Inches)

8 4

10 4

12 4

14 4

16 4

>16 4 (min.)

SITE UTILITIES – DESIGN GUIDELINES Construction Profile Drawings: Designers shall include profile drawings in the construction documents for new water service, sanitary sewer and storm sewer piping systems.

Profile drawings shall show new lines in vertical relationship to all other piping or underground structures that they cross, to scale and to correct elevation for each.



Profiles shall also show all thrust blocks required at vertical changes in direction in water service lines, and reference appropriate details.

Piping Trench Backfill: Refer to Earthwork - 02300 for requirements. Flush-Grade Valve Boxes: All boxes or enclosures for accessing valves in underground utility piping shall be embedded in a 5-1/2" thick cast-in-place concrete collar, set flush to adjacent grades and extending 6" on all sides around valve box.

Manholes and Valve Boxes: Do NOT locate these structures in steps or walks. If existing manholes or valve boxes are to occur in new steps or walks, review optional locations with DCM and adjust as agreed upon.

Plastic Lines: All plastic utility lines, such as sanitary sewers, low-voltage electrical, irrigation systems and gas lines, shall be wrapped with trace wire.

Piping & Supports for Underground Utility Lines thru Exterior Walls:

All sanitary and storm sewers leaving the building shall be cast iron for a distance of at least 10 feet from the building, or for the full distance if in filled or unstable ground. Where cast iron pipe enters or leaves the building, a sleeve shall be provided in the wall and sealant shall be installed between the sleeve and pipe to allow for movement.

All services leaving the building which are laid on filled earth, including sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water main, shall be supported at each joint and elbow on reinforced concrete beams until the pipe rests on solid undisturbed soil.

Concrete beams shall bear on a ledge or pocket in the foundation wall and on at least five feet of solid undisturbed earth beyond the excavation. Construction of beams shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor. Ledges or pockets in foundation walls shall be provided by the contractor responsible for constructing those walls.

The Mechanical Subcontractor shall have complete responsibility for proper installation of all exterior underground piping installed by him, shall warranty these lines against breakage and shall be liable for all damages, repairs, and replacement caused by settling of pipe or backfill one year warranty period specified in the General Conditions.

WATER DISTRIBUTION – 02510 System Ownership and Authority: At the outset of design, the designer shall determine, through discussions with KU personnel, if water service extensions are to be made from a source that is owned by the University or from a source that is owned by an outside authority. Subsequent design criteria and specification editing will be guided by this determination.



Water Metering: Refer to Division 15 for metering and backflow prevention requirements.

Materials: Water distribution pipe to buildings may be one of the following.

Lines 4” Diameter and Greater: AWWA cement-lined ductile iron.

Lines less than 4” Diameter: Annealed Type K copper.

The use of polywrap or PVC piping is not allowed on underground water lines.

Thrust Blocks: All water services lines shall have cast-in-place concrete thrust blocks provided at all changes in direction, both horizontal and vertical. Thrust blocks shall be engineered for each condition and detailed by Designer on construction drawings.

Steam Lines: Direct-buried steam lines are NOT acceptable. Steam lines shall be located in accessible tunnels.

Fire Hydrants: All fire hydrants shall be painted OSHA yellow.

SANITARY SEWERAGE – 02530 Materials – Beneath Buildings & Structures:

Cast iron piping (Class 500).

Extend cast-iron piping to at least 5’ outside of building’s exterior walls.

No other materials will be acceptable under buildings.

Materials – Outside Buildings: The university will allow the use of the following, as indicated by the A/E for each project.

Plastic pipe: ANSI/ASTM D3034-89, type PSM, SDR 35, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

Cast iron piping (Class 500).

Vitreous clay piping (VCP) will not be allowed.

Joints: Bell and spigot joints shall be used; no-hub joints are NOT permitted.

Manholes: Provide a manhole at each point of connection of new lines to existing lines, and at changes in direction of underground lines.



Discharge Monitoring Flume: Designers shall consult with KU's Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) office to verify if a discharge monitoring flume shall be required for those projects that may carry sanitary wastes other than those from standard toilet or locker room sources. Comply with EHS and City of Lawrence recommendations or requirements.

NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION – 02553 General: The university is provided natural gas service by Kansas Public Service. All extensions of gas service lines from KPS gas mains shall be provided by KPS, to within immediate proximity of new building.

STEAM DISTRIBUTION – 02555 General: Direct-buried steam or condensate lines are NOT acceptable.

STORM DRAINAGE – 02630 General: Runoff from new roofs shall be discharged through underground storm sewer systems, unless otherwise approved or directed by the University.

Storm Water Detention: The City of Lawrence Stormwater Ordinances shall be met on all projects, unless otherwise directed or approved by the University. Copies of those ordinances may be obtained by contacting the City Engineer of Lawrence.

Materials: Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) or poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) piping may be used.

Storm sewers shall be RCP for sizes 8" diameter and larger.

Storm sewers smaller than 8” may be cast iron or, if the area is not rocky, PVC piping (Schedule 80, SDR 35 minimum).

Vitreous clay piping (VCP) is NOT an acceptable material for storm drainage systems.

Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) is discouraged, but may be permitted on a case-by-case basis, as approved by the Director of DCM.

Grates: Designers shall carefully select all storm water structures and grates to avoid hazardous conditions within areas subject to pedestrian or bicycle traffic.

Specify grates and structures that exclude bicycle tires, wheelchair tires and high heels in areas subject to that traffic. All grates and drains in areas of pedestrian traffic shall be ADA-compliant.



HOT- MIX ASPHALT PAVING – 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Base Course: KDOT Section 1103, Mix BM-2B

Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course: KDOT Section 1103, Mix BM-2

Gravel Surfacing Aggregate: KDOT Section 1111, Type SA-1 or SA-X

Base Aggregate: KDOT Section 1111, Type AB-3

LAWN SPRINKLER PIPING – 02813 General: Underground lawn sprinkler systems may utilize automatic pop-up heads or may provide quick disconnects for hoses and sprinkler devices to be manually attached by the Owner. Verify which types of systems are appropriate for each project with the University’s Landscape Architect.

Lawn Sprinkler System Piping: PVC, Schedule 40, rated for 160 psi.

Backflow Preventers: Provide on each irrigation system water service line. Locations inside buildings are preferred to exterior pits.

Sprinkler Components: Limited to products produced by Weathermatic only.

Controls: Review options for including KU's central building automation control system (BACS) components as part of sprinkler system controls with KU Landscape Architect, FO and DCM personnel.

LAWNS AND GRASSES – 02920 Seed and Sod: Project Designer shall edit KU's standard specification section, included herein as Appendix A2.1, as applicable for each project and include it in the bid documents.

All disturbed areas, fills and embankments shall be seeded and fertilized.

Seeding rate varies and shall be determined in consultation with the University Landscape Architect.



EXTERIOR PLANTS – 02930 General: Plants shall be true to name and shall conform to the grading criteria set forth in the "USA Standards for Nursery Stock".

The University Landscape Architect in the Office of Design and Construction Management shall inspect all plant materials prior to commencing with planting work. No plant excavations shall be undertaken by the Contractor prior to the approval of the University Landscape Architect.

Facilities Operations shall be consulted for location of underground utility lines, which must be taken into account in the excavation of the planting areas.

Remove planting debris from project site.

Maintenance of Plantings: The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining plants in healthy growing condition for a period of nine (9) months from the date of acceptance by the University Landscape Architect.

Any plants which do not survive in good condition past this time period, as judged by the University Landscape Architect, shall be replaced at no additional cost to the University and warranted for an additional nine months from the date of their re-acceptance.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001-May Revision\Stds_sas_Div-02.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Lawns & Grasses Specification A2.1


Lawns & Grasses Specification

NOTE TO SPECIFIERS: This specification is to be incorporated into the contract documents on all projects which require lawns or grasses for the University of Kansas, reformatted to match numbering system of other spec sections. SECTION 02920 – LAWNS AND GRASSES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work

A. All disturbed areas, fills and embankments shall be seeded and fertilized.

B. Verify seeding rate with University Landscape Architect prior to beginning work, and adjust as deemed necessary for site and climatic conditions.

C. Seeding and fertilization shall be done between the period of August 15 and September 30 or February 15 and May 1, unless otherwise approved by the University Landscape Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Grass Seed

A. General: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seed mixture composed of grass species, proportions and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed, as specified.

1. 90% Fine Leaf Fescue (Festuca arundinacea): Rebel, Rebel II, Wrangler, Bonanza and Mojave (or approved equal).

2. 10% Kentucky Bluegrass (Poa pratensis): Midnight, Rugby II, Midiron varieties or equal.

3. Required Minimum Test Results: 98% purity and 85% germination. 4. Blend of varieties to be approved by the Landscape Architect.

2.02 Sod A. General: All grass sod shall be a nursery-grown native mixture of Rebel, Rebel II,

Wrangler, Bonanza and Mojave Tall Turf-type Fescue, or approved equal, with 10 percent Bluegrass Blend that is free of objectionable grassy and broadleaf weeds.

B. Sod shall be considered free of such weeds if less than five such plants are found per 100 square feet of area.

A2.1



1. Sod will not be acceptable if it contains any of the following weeds: common bermudagrass (wiregrass), quackgrass, johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass.

C. Thickness of Cut: Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 5/8" plus or minus 1/4" at the time of cutting. Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch.

D. Pad size: Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier’s standard width and length. Maximum allowable deviation from standard width and length shall be +/- 1/2" on width and +/- 5 percent on length. Broken pads and torn or uneven ends will not be accepted.

E. Strength of Sod Sections: Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their own weight and retain their size and shape when supported vertically from a firm grasp on the upper 10 percent of the section.

F. Moisture Content: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content is excessively wet or dry and may adversely affect the sod’s survival.

G. Time Limitations: Sod shall be harvested, delivered and transplanted within a 36 hour period unless suitable preservation method is approved prior to delivery.

H. Mowing Height: Before stripping, sod shall be mowed uniformly at a 2" height. 2.03 Mulch And Erosion Control

A. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Lawn and seeding mulch manufactured from recycled paper or secondary ground wood fibers.

1. Acceptable Products: Mulch manufactured by Central Fiber Corporation, 4814 Fiber Lane, Wellsville, Kansas 66092, known as Second Nature Paper Fiber Hydroseeding Mulch, or approved equal.

2. Mulch specifications:

a. Moisture content = 12% ± 3%; pH range = 6.5 ± 1.

b. Organic matter content (over dry weight): 98% minimum. c. Inorganic matter content: 2% maximum.

d. Dye of materials shall be biodegradable and shall not inhibit plant growth.

e. Color: Green. 3. Mulch is to be mixed in a hydraulic application machine (hydroseeder) and

applied as a liquid slurry which contains the recommended rates of seed and fertilizer.

4. Apply at rate of 1,500-2,000 lbs/acre mixed with seed and fertilizer at recommended rates.

B. Tacking material shall be "Tacpac GT 100% Pure Guar Gum Tackifier" as manufactured by Central Fiber Corporation, an organic derivative, negative gum material containing no toxic chemicals or harmful substances. The product is safe to plant and animal life. 1. Apply fiber mulch "Tackifier" on slopes of 2:1 or less at a rate of 20 lbs./acre.



2. Apply as a soil stabilizer at the rate of 40-60 lbs./acre mixed in 800-1,000 gallons of water.

PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.01 Seeding New Lawns

A. For areas less than 20,000 SF or where hydro-seeding is impracticable, sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Wheat drills are not acceptable. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 1. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with

fine spray.

B. For areas larger than 20,000 SF, hydro-seeding is the preferred seeding method. Mix specified seed, fertilizer and pulverized mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydro-seed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded. Rate of application shall be as required to obtain specified seed sowing rate. 1. Don't use seed that is wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.

C. Sow seed and fertilizer at the following rates: 1. 400 pounds per acre for seed mix

2. 500 pounds per acre for 5-10-5 dry, commercial-grade fertilizer

D. Protect seeded slopes of 4:1 or greater against erosion with methods acceptable to the University Landscape Architect.

E. Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading specified lawn mulch after completion of seeding operations.

1. The preferred mulch material for all lawn seeding is recycled paper or secondary ground wood fibers.

2. Other mulch materials for lawn seeding that may be used with the approval of the Landscape Architect include:

a. Burlap fabric, 7 oz./square yard. Standard width is 40"; secure with 6" staples manufactured for that purpose.

b. Jute erosion mesh, with an open 1" x 1" weave, provided in 4' width. Secure with 6" staples manufactured for that purpose.

c. Other materials as approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.02 Sodding New Lawns

A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen.



B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 1. Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage.

C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. 3.03 Maintenance

A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting.

B. Maintain fescue lawns for not less than the period stated below, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 1. Seeded lawns: Not less than 2 weeks after germination.

a. If seeded in fall and not given full 45 days of maintenance, or if not considered acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established.

2. Sodded lawns: Maintenance period shall extend for two weeks or until sod is well rooted and cannot be lifted out of place.

C. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, re-grading and re-planting as required to establish a smooth lawn free of eroded or bare areas, acceptable to Landscape Architect.

3.04 Cleanup And Protection A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in orderly condition.

B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

3.05 Inspection And Acceptance A. Fescue seeding will be considered acceptable when all specified requirements,

including maintenance period, have been complied with and a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds, surface irregularities and bare spots larger than 1-1/2" diameter.

B. Fescue sod will be acceptable when all specified criteria, including maintenance, have been complied with and a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds, bare spots, open joints, and surface irregularities.

End of Section

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Handicapped Curb Ramp Detail A2.2

Revision Date: July 17, 2006 Page 1 of 1

Handicapped Curb Ramp Detail

NOTE: Designers shall include the following detail in the construction drawings. An original AutoCAD .DWG file of this detail can be accessed at the DCM website at: xxxxx

End of Document : D:\Steve \KU DCM\Design Stds\Oct., 2000 Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-02_A2.doc

A2.2

jfriday

Stamp

jfriday

Stamp

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Handicapped Parking Space Detail A2.2.2

Revision Date: © July 19, 2006 Page 1 of 1

Handicapped Parking Space Detail

NOTE: Designers shall include the following detail in the construction drawings. An original AutoCAD .DWG file of this detail can be accessed at the DCM website at: www.dcm.ku.edu

A2.2.2

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Handicapped Parking sign with Bollard Detail A2.2.3

Revision Date: © July 19, 2006 Page 1 of 1

Handicapped Parking sign with Bollard Detail

NOTE: Designers shall include the following detail in the construction drawings. An original AutoCAD .DWG file of this detail can be accessed at the DCM website at: www.dcm.ku.edu

A2.2.3

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Bike Rack Detail A2.3


Bike Rack Detail


A2.3

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Bike Rack Detail A2.3


End of Document : D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\Oct., 2000 Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-02_A2.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Dry Curb & Gutter Detail A2.4


Dry Curb & Gutter Detail


End of Document : G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision \Stds_sas_Div-02_A4.doc

A2.4

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Wet Curb & Gutter Detail A2.5


Wet Curb & Gutter Detail


End of Document : G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision \Stds_sas_Div-02_A5.doc

A2.5

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Concrete 3


Concrete

GENERAL



Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section.

q Division 1 - General Requirements; refer to sections regarding construction testing and field quality control requirements.

q Quality Control Testing: Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project.

q On smaller projects, concrete and geotechnical testing may be included as part of the Contractor's work, if approved by DCM.

q Division 2 – Sitework: Includes sections regarding walks, paving, curbs and gutters.

CONCRETE STAIRS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

All concrete stairs shall be detailed to indicate the following.

q Railings shall be detailed to maintain no less than 1" clear from edge of railing to side of concrete and shall be returned to the ground at their ends, or shall otherwise avoid leaving ends of railings protruding as a potential hazard to pedestrians.

q Riser faces shall have a continuously sloped face, projecting 1" out to nosings.

q Interior stairs with an exposed concrete finish shall have cast-in-place abrasive steel or aluminum nosings (latter with asphaltic bond break where in contact with concrete).

q Exterior stairs shall receive a broom finish and a ¼" radius nosing, but no cast nosings.

q Exterior stairs shall include cheek walls along each edge.

q Exterior stair treads shall be noted to slope ¼" from rear to nosing.

3



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Standards: Concrete work shall be specified to meet the latest requirements of the American Concrete Institute standards.

Quality Control Testing: An independent testing lab shall test all concrete. Test cylinders shall be taken in accordance with American Concrete Institute standards.

q Specs shall require that one set of three cylinders shall be taken for every 50 cubic yards of concrete poured in one day. One cylinder shall be broken at seven days, one at 28 days and one shall be held in reserve until project is complete.

q If Contractor plans to pour a small quantity of concrete and testing agency has confirmed that Contractor's personnel have demonstrated proper ACI methodologies, Contractor may be required to make test cylinders and deliver same to testing lab.

Concrete Mix – Exterior Slabs and Walks:

q 4,000 psi; slump between 3" and 4"; 6% entrained air, +/- 1%.

q The use of calcium chloride shall be prohibited.

Subgrade:

q The engineering geologist shall test and approve all subgrades for compliance with compaction and moisture content requirements, prior to placement of concrete. Contractor shall arrange for geologist to re-inspect any subgrades that may have changed due to weather conditions or traffic.

q Granular Bed: Require per geotechnical engineer’s recommendations, 2” minimum thickness for leveling.

q Sand is NOT an acceptable underbed material, beneath slabs or walks.

Backfilling: Contractor shall backfill walls immediately after form removal.

Vapor Barriers: Provide under all slabs-on-grade, 6 mil minimum thickness, 6” minimum laps, placed beneath granular bed.

Slab Reinforcing:

q Welded wire reinforcing shall be specified to be in flat sheets, not rolls.

q Wire reinforcing shall be placed on concrete bricks or sand plate chairs or runners.

q Specs shall stipulate that clay bricks shall NOT be allowed, and wire reinforcing shall NOT be lifted into position only, in lieu of other supports.



Floor Sealers: All bare concrete not receiving another finish shall receive a clear sealer finish placed on it as a final maintenance surface.

q The Contractor shall provide technical data and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any seals or finishes applied as a final maintenance surface.

Formwork: Insulated concrete forming systems, such as "Blue Maxx", shall NOT be used unless specifically approved in advance by DCM.

Equipment Bases: Require 3-1/2" high concrete bases to be provided beneath all floor-mounted mechanical or electrical equipment, or where three or more conduit penetrate floor slabs.

q Show and note locations and approximate sizes of pads on floor plans in bid documents.

q Note that Mechanical & Electrical Contractors are to verify actual sizes required.

q Note that bases are to be provided by General Contractor, based upon actual sizes provided by others.

CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE – 03331

Standards: Architectural concrete work shall be specified to meet the latest requirements of the American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards.

Design Approval: The use of architectural or precast concrete shall be discussed in detail with Office of Design and Construction Management regarding color and texture conformity with the campus building materials palette.

Sample Walls: Architectural concrete will require a sample to be constructed by the General Contractor and reviewed for approval by the Designer and the Office of Design and Construction Management.

PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE – 03410

Standards: Structural precast concrete work shall be specified to meet the latest requirements of the Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) standards.

q Plants fabricating precast units shall be PCI-certified for the types of precast work to be done at each location. Certifications shall be documented and approved together with other submittals



Architectural Standards: Structural precast concrete units that are to be left exposed to view as finished components of the building shall also be required to comply with the requirements of Precast Architectural Concrete – 03450.

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE – 03450

Standards: Architectural precast concrete work shall be specified to meet the latest requirements of the Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) standards.

q Plants fabricating precast units shall be PCI-certified for the types of precast work to be done at each location. Certifications shall be documented and approved at time of other submittals.

Design Approval: The use of architectural precast concrete shall be discussed in detail with Office of Design and Construction Management regarding color and texture conformity to the campus building materials palette.

Sample Walls: Architectural precast concrete will require a full-scale sample of an appropriate size to be constructed by the General Contractor and reviewed for approval by the Designer and the Office of Design and Construction Management.

Damaged Panels: The Project Architect, Office of Design and Construction Management and the Division of Architectural Services shall review all damaged precast concrete.

q Damage that affects structural performance or aesthetics shall be rejected and replaced.

q Patching of imperfections or damaged areas or the use of paints or coatings to cover them is NOT acceptable.

Storage: Precast panels are not to be stored on the ground and are to be protected from staining, discoloration or damage as work progresses.

End of Document: D:\Steve \KU DCM\Design Stds\Oct., 2000 Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-03.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Masonry 4


Masonry

GENERAL






q Division 3 - Concrete: Coordinate with concrete specifications, if in this section.

MASONRY – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Material Selections: Masonry selections shall be discussed in detail with the Office of Design and Construction Management regarding color and texture conformity to the campus building materials palette.

q Existing Materials: The Designer is expected to closely match existing mortar colors and materials of adjacent work on remodeling and addition projects.

q Older Buildings: Some of these mortars are lime mortars. If unsure of the mortar type when doing work which will place new mortars in contact with old mortars, such as tuckpointing, ask DCM to have mortars tested to verify type and composition. Designer will be responsible for specifying a compatible mortar with existing materials.

q Corridor Walls: Structural glazed tile, brick, ground-face concrete masonry units or tile finishes are recommended for maintenance-free durability. KU's experience indicates that stone walls may not be a good choice in public areas.

Material Approvals: Neither the Designer nor the Contractor shall consider masonry selections final until a sample masonry wall panel has been reviewed and approved by the Office of Design and Construction Management and the Designer.

4



Seismic Design: All masonry walls, both interior and exterior, shall be designed, detailed and reinforced to comply with applicable seismic code criteria. Designers shall verify required detailing with a structural engineer.

Brick Specifications: Brick may be incorporated into each project by either specifying one or more brick manufacturers, colors and patterns that have been pre-approved by the University, or by an allowance amount in the base bid.

q The University prefers that all brick for a project be pre-selected and specified in the project bid documents.

q Brick being used to remodel or within additions to existing buildings shall be pre-selected with the Owner and specified, or it shall be incorporated as an allowance. It is NOT acceptable to specify brick, in any case, to “match existing”, since this can lead to differing judgements and cost disputes with the low bidder.

q If an allowance is approved by the University, the cost of brick should be specified in the construction documents as an allowance, as a cost per thousand brick, which will be adjusted based upon the Contractor's final cost per thousand and the total quantity for the project.

q The specifications shall state that the Contractor’s base bid shall include the delivery, handling and installation of all masonry materials. The only amount to be adjusted by allowance is the purchase price of the masonry materials.

q The bid documents shall include a space for bidders to identify the quantity of brick required to do the project, and upon which the allowance adjustment shall be based.

Stone:

q Limestone Exterior Walls: Detail to avoid placing limestone in contact with the ground, where moisture can be wicked into stone and cause staining or exfoliation. Use of other non-absorbent materials is recommended, such as cast stone, granite or concrete, to a height of 12" minimum above finish grade.

q Only stainless steel anchors are permitted for use with stone.

Concrete Masonry Units:

q Interior CMU partitions shall not be less than 6" thick.

q Exposed exterior concrete block surfaces shall all be waterproofed in a manner acceptable to DCM, and shall NOT be left unfinished.

q Parapet walls of concrete block construction shall be covered with roof flashings or a waterproof membrane compatible with adjoining roofing materials.

Weep Holes: Provide for each application as recommended by the appropriate professional association (BIA, NCMA, ILI).



q Weeps shall be spaced at 16" or 24" o.c. maximum, depending upon application.

q KU encourages the use of cotton rope weeps, that extend along the profile of the thru-wall flashings and are tied to a joint reinforcing wire or tie at least 16" above the thru-wall location of the weeps. Other weep details shall be reviewed with DCM.

q Weeps and flashings shall be shown to extend through wall at a point above finish grade.

q Cavities shall be shown to be grouted full below the bottom of thru-wall flashings, with additional flashings behind grouted cavity as required to prevent water intrusion.

CAST STONE - 04720

The University has had recently had some poor experiences with cast stone materials, mostly related to damage caused in handling by fabricators and erectors. Designers are encouraged to use real stone materials as much as possible.

q If cast stone products are used, Designers must verify that strict requirements are specified regarding handling and corrective work or replacement of defective or damaged materials.

q Review all cast stone applications, details and specifications in detail with DCM.

UNIT MASONRY – 04810

Standards: Masonry work shall be detailed and specified to meet the latest requirements of the following standards, as applicable to the type of masonry in each project.

q Brick Institute of America.

q National Concrete Masonry Association.

q Indiana Limestone Association.

Field Quality Control:

q Testing: An independent testing lab shall perform all required testing. Unless stipulated otherwise, the Owner shall retain the services of the testing laboratory.

q Sample Wall Panel: The Contractor shall construct a masonry sample wall panel, not less than 4' wide by 4' high, which incorporates each kind of masonry material to be used in the project, and demonstrates typical details of construction.

q These include through-wall flashings, copings, control joints, expansion joints, corners and aesthetic details such as reveals or bands. Verify specifics with DCM.

q Sample panel shall be located in proximity to existing building and parallel to primary existing wall elevation, so materials can be compared with the same sun exposures.

q Sample walls shall be constructed before brick or other masonry materials are ordered in quantity, and shall be built upon a plywood-covered storage pallet, for portability.



Joint Reinforcing: All joint reinforcing in exterior walls shall be hot-dip galvanized.

q The specs shall stipulate that if the exterior veneer wythe is to be installed after the backup wythes are completed, the joint reinforcing shall be two-piece joint systems with adjustable, U-shaped wires which extend into the exterior veneer.

Through-Wall Flashings: The following materials are to be used in the locations noted, and shall be indicated in the project details and/or specs.

q Cut Stone or Precast Concrete: Stainless steel sheet flashing, with hemmed or soldered seams and joints.

q Brick or Stone Masonry: Copper-clad fabric; EPDM flashings are not recommended, and shall not be used if flashings are to be left exposed to UV / sunlight for extended periods of time, or if inner wythe is built before exterior wythe.

q Laps: 6” minimum, sealed with mastic at laps between like materials and where setting upon or abutting dissimilar materials.

q Parapet Flashings: Thru-wall flashings are required under parapet wall copings.

Concrete Masonry Units:

q Quality Control: The Contractor shall inspect all concrete blocks before installation, and shall cull out and remove all units that have chips or other blemishes that exceed specified tolerances.

q Units with minor chips that are still within tolerances shall be culled out by the mason and laid in locations that are not readily visible, such as above ceilings or at higher wall elevations.

q Special Units: Provide bullnosed corners on CMU's at all outside corners or window sills.

Tooled Joints:

q All joints shall be uniformly tooled repeatedly in both directions at intersections, forming neat ridges on all sides, with no lipped edges.

q Masonry joints, as well as pattern bond, of new work shall match that of existing buildings, when new work occurs within or immediately adjacent to existing buildings.

q Raked joints are NOT acceptable.


The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Metals 5


Metals

GENERAL






q Division 2 – Sitework: Contains additional information about ramps, walks, and site improvements that may be related to work of this section.

FASTENERS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Designers shall be responsible for determining the appropriate fasteners to be used for each type of connection and material, taking into account structural requirements such as dead and live loads, atmospheric exposures, code requirements and durability needs. Each required fastener shall be indicated in the drawings or specified, with the following information included.

q Material (steel, stainless steel, high-strength steel, etc.)

q Finish, if applicable (galvanized, pre-finished paint to match substrate material)

q Diameter (1/4”, 3/8”, etc.)

q Length &/or Embedment, if applicable (EX: depth of embedment for expansion anchors determines load bearing capacity, & is to be specified by designers.)

q Head or Type, if applicable (truss bolt, panhead, sheet metal screw, gasketed SMS, carriage bolt, etc)

q On-Center Spacing (EX: UL Standard I-28 stipulates specific o.c. spacings for fasteners in roof edge nailers in order to meet certain wind uplift criteria; as well as other criteria such as fastener diameters; designers are to stipulate fastener spacings.)

5



Nailer, Blocking & Miscellaneous Roofing System Members: Designers shall pay particular attention to the designation of fasteners for members to which roofing membranes, flashings, roof edges and copings are attached.

q Designers shall verify manufacturer’s fastener requirements in order to meet specified wind uplift or fire rating requirements, and indicate the specific fasteners accordingly.

METAL RAILINGS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Exterior Guardrails: The University’s currently preferred guardrail design incorporates a double top rail, and narrow vertical balusters that extend from the bottom rail to the lower of the two top rails.

q Example Railing: The guardrails along 15th Street, east of Engel Road, on top of the retaining walls near the Jayhawker Towers parking lots, are the a good example of an acceptable railing design.

Handrails:

q All handrails shall be round and shall have no more than a 1-5/8" actual outside diameter.

q All handrails shall be detailed to return to walls, and shall be noted to have closed ends.

Mounting Method:

q The preferred mounting method is to embed the vertical railing members into sleeves cast into concrete structures, or cast them directly into poured concrete structures.

q Sleeved embeds shall be filled with non-shrink, flowable grout, formed to drain away from vertical embedded railing members.

q A coved bead of sealant shall be shown to seal joint around base of embedded pipe.

q Designers shall pay special attention to railing details to avoid edge "breakout" or spalling conditions. No railing or embedded sleeve shall extend closer than 1” clear to the edge of concrete structure edges.

Expansion: Metal handrails and guardrails shall be sectioned to provide for expansion and contraction, with appropriate slip joints that maintain railings in alignment.

Exit Stop Gates: Provide gates at top of “down” stairs to prevent pedestrian travel past a required exit.

q Exit stop gates shall not be secured directly to walls, since expansion-anchored, individual hinge screws have proven easy to pull out of walls.

q It is recommended to attach to walls with either a continuous hinge with multiple anchors, or a steel support post anchored to wall, with hinges welded to it.



METAL STAIRS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Risers: Steel-framed stairways shall have closed metal pan risers.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS – 05521

Materials: Guardrails and handrails should be fabricated from structurally durable materials.

q Round pipe railings shall be fabricated from 1-1/4" nominal diameter, Schedule 40 steel pipe (1-5/8" actual O.D.) or similar aluminum or stainless steel materials, rather than 1-1/2" nominal diameter pipe (1-7/8" actual O.D.).

q Square tube railings shall be fabricated from 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" outside dimension steel tubes, with not less than a 14 gauge wall thickness.

q Vertical balusters shall be fabricated from solid plates, wires or bars. Hollow or lightweight materials are not acceptable.

Fabrication: All railings shall have mitered and fully welded joints, filled with epoxy body putty and ground smooth as required to create smooth joint transitions.

q Mechanical connections should be carefully considered. Side-mounted, friction-kept, or Allen-screw-mounted mechanical connections of stair rail systems have not proven to be durable, and are not recommended.

Wall Brackets: All wall-mounted handrail brackets shall have concealed fasteners to wall substrates.

Finishes:

q All exterior guardrails shall be fabricated and then receive a full coverage, hot-dip galvanized coating.

q Railings shall have a medium bronze anodized or prefinished coating, or shall be painted to match KU's standard medium bronze metal trim color.

ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS – 05811

All building expansion joints 1" or greater in width, for both vertical and horizontal joints, shall be detailed to receive a pre-manufactured joint system to cover and seal the joint.

q Joint systems shall be mechanically fastened to wall, floor or ceiling substrates; taped or adhesive-only attachments are not acceptable.


The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Woods and Plastics 6


Woods and Plastics

GENERAL





q Division 5 – Metals: Contains information about fasteners used to secure wood nailers, blocking and miscellaneous wood framing members.

q Division 11 – Equipment: Contains information about laboratory equipment.

q Division 12 –Furnishings: Contains information about pre-manufactured casework.

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Built-In’s: The use of "built-in" furniture, bookshelves, and equipment is discouraged. The inclusion of such items should be discussed with the Office of Design and Construction Management before incorporating them into the project.

Standard Sizes: Custom millwork is recommended to be detailed in standard-sized modules of approximate 3'-0" lengths for future flexibility.

Countertops:

q Countertops in food preparation kitchens, restrooms and wet laboratories shall be made of solid composition materials.

q Plastic laminate tops are only acceptable in dry laboratory or kitchenette environments,

q Laboratory or scientific equipment countertops shall be 1” thick epoxy resin.

6

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Woods and Plastics 6


q "Trespa" tops are NOT acceptable, due to recent durability problems KU has experienced with them.

Window Sills: Solid composition materials shall be used for window sills, in lieu of plastic laminate fabrications, due to their superior moisture resistance and permanence.

Laminate Substrates: All plastic laminate substrates shall be plywood materials. Particle board shall not be used as a substrate for plastic laminates.

ROUGH CARPENTRY – 06100

Spacing:

q Wood framing in walls shall be spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center.

Moisture-Resistant Treated Materials:

q All wood sill plates, nailers, blocking and wood members in contact with masonry or concrete, or within roofing systems, shall be CCA-treated lumber or plywood.

q Exterior-grade, Type 1 plywood shall be used where there is potential for exposure to moisture.

q All blocking in walls behind toilets, lavatories, urinals, sinks and other plumbing fixtures shall be CCA-treated lumber or plywood.

Telecommunication (NTS) Backboards:

q Each networking and telecommunications (NTS) room shall have not less than one 4’ H x 8’ W plywood panel provided for the mounting of NTS wiring and devices, as requested by KU’s NTS Department for each project.

q Plywood backing panels shall be fire-retardant treated materials.

q Expansion anchor or screw to substrate, at 24” o.c. along perimeter and within field area of each plywood sheet.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK – 06402

Particle board or flake board substrates are not allowed for casework or custom woodwork. Use plywood substrate materials in all cases.

End of Document: \\FACILITY_MGMT_2\dcm\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div-06.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Thermal & Moisture Protection 7


Thermal & Moisture Protection

GENERAL





q Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project.

q Division 2 –Sitework: Contains information about foundation and storm drainage systems, to which all roof drainage systems shall connect, unless otherwise approved by KU.

q Division 16 – Electrical: Contains requirements for lightning protection, which is required for all University of Kansas buildings, unless specifically approved otherwise by DCM.

WATERPROOFING AND FOUNDATION DRAINAGE – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Waterproof membranes, drainage membranes and/or granular fill, and foundation drains shall be provided on all foundation walls of below-grade interior spaces.

q Waterproof membranes shall be sheet goods only. Liquid-applied waterproofing is not allowed.

q Sheet waterproofing shall be provided beneath all wood floors on slabs-on-grade, in lieu of less effective vapor barriers.

q Utility tunnels shall also have waterproof membranes and foundation drainage, unless otherwise directed by DCM.

q Dampproofing shall not be used in lieu of waterproofing systems.

Foundation and Underfloor Drains: 4” diameter rigid perforated PVC and pre-fabricated fittings. Flexible bellows-type drainage piping is not to be used.

7



Underfloor Drainage: Provide beneath all slabs-on-grade that occur below finish grade and are in areas where water tables or sub-surface water is possible to occur.

Waterstops: Bituminous flexible strip waterstops may be preferable over traditional rubber or PVC waterstops with fused or prefab covers at splices. Provide waterstops in all concrete joints below grade, whether in walls or slabs, or where walls meet slabs or other walls.

Below-Grade Expansion Joints: Designers shall detail sealant on backer rod on both sides of below-grade expansions joints, such as when a new foundation wall abuts an existing wall, even if exterior-side of joint is covered by a waterproof membrane. Continue joints in all directions, vertically and horizontally, to provide continuous water protection.

INSULATION – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Energy conservation is an important goal of the University. Structures shall be well insulated; preferably beyond minimum industry standards.

Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: If used, EPS insulation must be 2.0 PCF or higher.

q When used as a roofing insulation, provide with ½" high-density wood fiberboard factory-bonded to top.

Tapered Roof Insulations: Taper to 1" minimum thickness, and complete remainder of taper with fiber or perlite edge.

ROOFING – GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Roofing systems and their detailing are an area of great concern to the University. Consultants shall select an appropriate roofing system for each project that is of the highest possible quality. The proposed roofing systems and associated details shall be reviewed thoroughly with KU, with special care and attention given these by the consultant to ensure that durable, watertight, easily maintained roofing systems are achieved on each project.

Wind Uplift: Systems shall be designed to be consistent with UL I-90 wind uplift requirements.

Class Rating: All roofing systems shall be UL Class A compliant.



Roofing Warranties: KU projects shall be required to stipulate roofing warranty requirements in accordance with Appendix A7.1, in lieu of MasterSpec’s text or the warranty provisions of roofing manufacturers.

q Consultants shall verify the warranty requirements for each project with DCM. In some cases, where long-term warranties are offered by the manufacturer, the University may wish to consider them; EX: 50-year warranties on synthetic slate roofing materials.

Color: Main campus has an aesthetic tradition for red roofs that should be respected and continued on all roof assemblies, both steep-sloped and low-sloped.

Vapor Barriers: Detail in locations required for vapor control or temporary moisture protection. Typically by means of 43# vapor barrier felts mopped-down directly onto concrete roof decks or onto ½" gypsum board adhered to steel roof decks; verify acceptable system with roofing manufacturer.

Roof Drains: Interior roof drain lines shall be not less than 4” diameter.

Roof Access: Designers shall provide a built-in means of accessing every low-slope roof area for maintenance, by means of stairs to roofs, ladders and roof access hatches, ladders between varying roof levels, and similar means. Verify specific provisions with DCM and FO.

Roof Walkways: Provide to all rooftop equipment that may require periodic maintenance and at high traffic areas. Walkways shall extend from roof hatches or other designated access points to and around all sides of each piece of equipment. Walkway material shall be as approved by roofing manufacturer, and shall be adhered to roofing membrane.

Rooftop Equipment: Permanent visual screening shall be provided around all equipment located on roofs and visible to pedestrians from any point on campus. Verify specific requirements with DCM.

Maintenance Materials: Verify roofing materials and quantities that are to be specified as maintenance materials with DCM and FO (DSH, on their projects).

STEEP-SLOPE ROOFING SYSTEMS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: The University prefers steep sloped roofs be incorporated on projects to the greatest extent possible, rather than low-slope roofing systems.

Acceptable Steep Slope Roofing Systems:



q Clay Tile (Ludowici or equal)

q Slate

q Synthetic Slate (Eternit or equal)

q Metal Roofing (concealed fasteners, mechanically-seamed)

q Asphalt Shingles are discouraged and shall be used only as approved by DCM.

q Others as approved or requested by KU.

Steep-Slope Roofing Underlayment: All steep roofing systems, regardless of roofing type used, are to be specified and detailed to require the provision of a layer of an "Ice Barrier"-type, adhesive, elastomeric underlayment material under 100% of the roof area, in lieu of traditional 30# felt underlayment.

q Acceptable Manufacturers: Manville; GAF; Tamko

LOW-SLOPE ROOFING SYSTEMS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Low-slope (“flat”) roofs shall be used judiciously. Typically, these systems can be expected at areas where rooftop equipment is clustered or other project requirements make them advisable.

q All low-slope roofs shall be sloped ¼" per foot minimum over their entire surface area, with no flat areas permitted, and with positive drainage over entire area to roof drains, gutters, downspouts or scuppers.

q Water is not permitted to sheet drain over roof edges, but shall be directed down and away from buildings in a controlled manner acceptable to Owner.

q Red granular facings on low-slope roofing systems have had mixed success, and shall be used only if approved or requested by DCM. Granular colors of any type must be approved prior to installation by DCM.

Acceptable Low-Slope Roofing Systems:

q EPDM

q Modified Bitumen

q Reinforced PVC

q Others as approved or requested by KU.

Installation Method: Roofs shall either be fully adhered or, if approved by DCM, mechanically anchored.

q Pavers and gravel ballast are not recommended.

q Ballasted EPDM roof systems with loose rock ballast are not allowed.



ROOF ACCESSORIES – 07720

Equipment Roof Curbs: Details or specifications shall require all roof curbs to extend a minimum of 8” above adjacent roof surfaces.

q Roof curbs shall be insulated, with wood nailer on top.

q Bid documents shall clearly stipulate whether roof curbs are to be provided by the General Contractor or each trade furnishing the equipment to be supported.

PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS – 07810

General: All skylights shall be required to have thermal-break frames and double glazing. Verify frame finish colors with DCM.

JOINT SEALANTS – 07920

Sealant Materials: Polyurethane, one or two-part sealants, are typically used on campus. Silicone sealants are typically limited to glazing systems.

Sealant Application: Installers shall be required to submit proof of at least five years successful experience applying products of the type specified. Designers are expected to check on these qualifications prior to approving proposed subcontractors and submitttals.

q Joints in horizontal masonry systems, such as copings, sills and ledges, shall be sealed with joint sealant in lieu of mortar.

Sealant Colors: Verify proposed colors with DCM Architectural Manager for each sealant location. Do not leave this decision to construction personnel.

q As a general rule, it is recommended to match the brick color rather than the mortar color, since sealants will then tend to blend into the field color of the brick and be less noticeable.


The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Special Roofing Warranty A7.1


Special Roofing Warranty

NOTE: Designers shall incorporate the following text into the project specifications.

Special Roofing Warranty

General: The warranties specified in the Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

In lieu of the roofing manufacturer’s standard warranties, the Contractor shall be expressly responsible for the repair of roof leaks for the work of this contract, including related metal flashing and sealant work, and the repair or replacement of defects in the roof system attributed to ordinary wear and tear, or deficiencies of material or workmanship, for a period of five (5) years following written acceptance of the Work.

q The five-year warranty period shall commence on the official date of Substantial Completion of the project.

q Repair or replacement shall include but not be limited to splits, blisters, fish mouths, wrinkles, slippage and related metal flashing or sealant defects.

Upon notification of roof leaks or defects, the Contractor shall promptly make contact with KU Facilities Operations personnel for site location and inspection of the defective areas. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs, including all labor and materials, at the Contractor’s expense. Upon making the required repairs, the Contractor shall report his findings to the KU Facilities Operations personnel, including a verbal or graphic description of the area repaired, the nature of the problem and the corrective actions taken, and the dates of all inspections and repairs.

End of Document : \\FACILITY_MGMT_2\dcm\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div-07_A1.doc

A7.1

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Doors and Windows 8


Doors and Windows

GENERAL




q Division 1 - General Requirements

DOORS AND WINDOWS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Windows: University buildings shall be provided with operable windows in each occupied space. Window types for multi-story buildings shall be selected to allow cleaning from the interior.

q Frames: All exterior windows shall have thermal-break frames and insulating glass units.

q Glazing: Exterior windows are recommended to be tinted bronze and have a low-E coating. Verify specific criteria for each project with DCM.

q Window Screens: Operable windows shall NOT receive window screens, due to problems the University has had retaining them in-place and in undamaged condition.

q Exception: Projects for the Dept. of Student Housing typically include screens on operable windows. Verify with DSH for each project.

q Window Locking Devices: Provide more than one locking device on windows 3' or more in width.

q Fire-Rated Locations: Designers shall verify and clearly indicate all window locations which are to be fire-rated, and shall schedule appropriate steel frames and wired glass or fire-rated glazing systems.

Doors and Frames: Exterior building entry doors and frames shall be heavyweight, wide stile, pre-finished aluminum units, due to lower maintenance requirements than painted hollow metal frames.

q Power-assisted or automatic doors shall be provided at the primary building entrance(s), to assist the handicapped in overcoming the force of wind in opening exterior doors.

8



q In vestibules, provide door operators on both an interior and exterior door in the same path of travel, independently operable from each side and within the vestibule.

q Specify 4" square, over-sized push buttons for power operators, and mount on walls or posts outside of door swing footprints.

q Exterior Service Entry Doors: Specify to be 18 gauge steel face materials, insulated core doors in 16 gauge steel frames.

q Magnetic Hold-Opens: High-traffic interior doors and doors on stairs or elevator door openings should be held open with magnetic hold-open devices.

q Kickplates: Provide on all doors into janitor closets, mechanical/electrical rooms, storage rooms, kitchens, loading dock doors and other spaces where equipment may be wheeled in and out through doors. Depending on equipment expected to move through and potentially damage doors, Designers shall consider the provision of taller armor plates to protect door surfaces.

q Pairs of Doors: The use of removable center mullions is discouraged, especially within corridors, at fire-rated door locations or other high-traffic areas.

q Hardware Schedule: At entrances with multiple doors ganged together, only one door shall be keyed from the exterior. Other doors in multiple gangs shall be pull only, with key-dogging on interior panic devices. Omit dogging on fire-rated doors.

q Humid Environments: Consultants shall carefully review environmental criteria for door and window units in humid environments, and select units capable of withstanding those conditions for long periods of times.

ACCESS DOORS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Bid documents shall show location and size of all wall or ceiling access doors that are required to access mechanical/electrical equipment, devices or plumbing lines for maintenance or initial balancing.

q Minimum size: 24" wide x 36" high, to facilitate entry into tight spaces by maintenance personnel.

q Other size doors will be acceptable if existing conditions dictate otherwise, or if provided for hand access to valves and similar elements.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS – 08211

General: In existing building partial remodels or additions, match species and finish of existing wood doors.

q Interior Doors: Solid core construction.

q Jamb edges of wood doors shall be hardwood to match the door’s face material species.



ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS – 08410

Aluminum Frames: Provide in thermal-break construction. Color & Finish for the following shall be:

q New Construction or Total Renovations: Medium Bronze Anodized, unless otherwise approved or directed by DCM and University Architect.

q Additions or Partial Renovations: Match existing, unless otherwise approved or directed by DCM and University Architect.

Glazing: Refer to Section 08800 – Glazing requirements.

DOOR HARDWARE – 08710

Hardware Finishes:

q New Construction or Total Renovations: Satin Brass or Satin Chrome, as selected with DCM and University Architect. Note: Bright Brass or Polished Finishes are discouraged, due to University experience with poor long-term durability and high maintenance demands.


Lockset Manurfacturers: Facility Operations stocks replacement parts for the following manufacturers and for maintenance reasons, the University will allow the provision of products by one of the following acceptable manufacturers only:

q Schlage

q Sargent

q Corbin

q Best (this is the preferred lockset for the Dept. of Student Housing only; not to be used on other campus buildings)(DSH)

q Falcon (only alternative manufacturer for DSH projects)

Replacement Locksets: New locksets replacing existing locksets shall be required to match the manufacturer, model, style and finish of the unit being replaced.

Locksets in Additions or Partial Renovations: The University prefers that locksets installed within each building be limited to only one manufacturer’s, for ease of maintenance and continuity of appearance. Specs shall require new locksets to match the manufacturer, model, style and finish of the units predominant in the areas adjacent to the area to be remodeled. Verify with DCM.

Lockset Grade of Construction: Heavy-duty; not less than the following.



q Bored: ANSI 156.2, Grade 1.

q Mortise: ANSI 156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1.

Lockset Functions: Review and verify operation of door locks with the University’s user group, DCM Project Manager & Architectural Support personnel, and FO Lock Shop representatives. The following are typical functions to be used

q Mechanical Rooms, Janitor Closets and NTS Rooms: Sargent #04 - Storeroom Function, or equal; with rigid outside lever handle.

q Classrooms: Sargent #37 - Classroom function, or equal.

q Offices: Sargent #05 - Office Function, or equal.

q Public Toilet Rooms: Sargent #114 – Hospital Latch, or equal; with “Push” and “Pull” lettering engraved in top of escutcheons, with both lever handles extending down.

Lockset Trim Styles:

q Partial Renovations or Additions: Lockset handles, roses and finishes shall match those in existing buildings.

q New Construction or Total Renovation: Tapered lever handle with continuous curved return to door face, OR round wire lever handles with a radiused, perpendicular return to door.

q Sargent Style LNP (curved) or LNJ (round)

q Schlage Style #17 (curved) or #73 (round)

q Others only as approved or requested by DCM and University Architect.

q Straight lever handles that do not return to within ½" of door face are NOT acceptable, since they can more easily catch and damage clothing, backpacks, etc.

Panic Device Manufacturers: Due to maintenance requirements, the University will only allow the provision of products by one of the following:

q Von Duprin

q Sargent

Panic Device Functions:

q Keyed Exterior Doors: Sargent function #04 or equal; key retracts latchbolt on exterior.

q Non-keyed Doors: Sargent function #10.

q Do NOT use Sargent function #13, since building users may accidentally leave this unlocked after-hours.



Panic Device Trim Style: Pull devices with round, ¾” nominal diameter pulls and standard width plates are preferred.

Pairs of Doors: Where pairs of doors at exits or stairwells are required and individual doors within frames cannot be used, rim-type exit devices which are center-locking should be installed with a removable mullion.

q Astragals for pairs of fire doors that do not have a center mullion shall be fiber type, NOT a metal overlapping astragal with coordinators.

q Vertical rod latching systems shall be used only where doors are held open with magnetic hold-opens.

Vertical Rod Panic Devices: Vertical rod panic devices shall omit the bottom rod, per the current ADA Accessibility Guidelines and due to KU maintenance problems.

Magnetic Hold-Open Devices: These are to be specified and provided as part of the fire alarm system work, in Division 13.

Closers: LCN 4040 Series, Super Smoothee is preferred KU model, or approved equal. Provide with parallel arm, to greatest extent possible.

Hinges: Provide not less than 3 per door, heavy-duty type, mortised. An option is to provide continuous "Roton" type hinges, if approved or requested by DCM.

Silencers: Provide 3 minimum per door, unless door is to receive weatherstripping.

Stops: Provide one stop per door. First choice is to provide wall stops. If walls stop is infeasible, provide a floor stop unless it may pose a hazard to walking. If floor stop is infeasible, provide an overhead stop.

Keying:

q Cylinders: Lockset cylinders shall ONLY be provided by Medeco Security Locks, Inc., with a high-security keyway corresponding with the University of Kansas system.

q Exception: The KU Dept. of Student Housing uses Best cylinders.

q Construction Keying: Required on all University projects. The final lockset keys shall NOT be used during construction, and shall not be delivered to the jobsite, or stored in an unsecured manner.

q Keying Conference: Within 30 days after execution of the contract, the Contractor shall initiate a keying conference between the Hardware Contractor, representatives of



Facilities Operations and Design and Construction Management, and representatives of the occupants of the building.

q Hardware Delivery Confirmation: As soon as hardware is ordered, the Hardware Contractor shall send to the Department of Facilities Operations the factory order number and the factory shipping date.

q Delivery of Keys: Keys shall be delivered directly to the University locksmith, along with a typed schedule of keys, before Substantial Completion of the project. Keys shall be sent via certified mail or personal delivery, with a copy of the receipt that has been signed by FO Lockshop personnel given to the DCM Construction Manager.

q Refer to Division One for criteria regarding temporary keys for access to existing spaces.

POWER DOOR OPERATORS – 08716

Acceptable Manufacturers/Models: Besam "Easy Swing" or equal.

Operation: Provide over-sized push pads, that display the universal symbol of accessibility on 4” +/-square or 6" dirameter pads, to actuate door operation.

q Mount a push pad on the interior and exterior side of each power-operated door at 36” AFF to actuate operation.

q Mount push pads on sidewalls or free-standing posts at the outer edge of power-operated doors when they are in the open position, being certain that disabled persons will not be within the door swing path when actuating the door operation.

q Specify operators to come with an automatic shut-off to disengage motor when door is activated but is locked in the closed position.

q Identify each door equipped with an operator by adhering to the exterior door face.

GLAZING – 08800

Exterior Locations:

q Construction: Double-pane insulating glass units.

q Color/Tint:

q New Construction or Total Renovations: Bronze tint, unless otherwise approved or directed by DCM and University Architect.


q Low-E Coating: Include on all exterior insulating glass, on the #3 surface.

End of Document : G:\STAFF\Design Stds \2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div -08.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Finishes 9


Finishes

GENERAL




q Division 1 - General Requirements

q KU Graphics Program Manual, re: painted graphics or signage

SELECTION OF MATERIALS, COLORS & FINISHES – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: The Project Architect shall develop a "Finish & Color Board" during the construction document phase, to be reviewed and approved for general content by the DCM Project Manager, DCM Architectural Support person, DCM Director, University Architect and the Building Committee.

q The Project Architect shall provide a "Final Finish & Color Board" to be reviewed and approved by these same persons during the early stages of construction.

q Paints: Since the University is required to use painting materials produced by the Kansas Dept. of Corrections, Designers are encouraged to select colors that are available from their color ranges.

q Flat Paints: Shall not be used in high-traffic areas such as corridors, classrooms and support spaces.

q Restrooms: Ceramic tile on floors, bases and walls. Extend wall tile to the ceiling. Wall base tile and grout shall match floor.

q Mechanical Rooms: Walls and ceilings shall be painted. Floors shall be sealed concrete, with no wall base.

q Plaster: The use of exterior portland cement or synthetic plasters should be limited to protected soffit areas, as approved by DCM, due to poor KU experience with these materials on both older and more recent facilities.

q Stairs and Corridors: Flooring shall be a durable, easily maintained finish material. Carpet shall not be used except for corridors within office suites.

9



q Classrooms Over 20 Persons: Flooring shall be VCT or similar hard, durable finish material under seating areas. Aisles and teaching areas may be carpet, if approved by DCM.

GENERAL SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES – ALL SECTIONS

Maintenance Materials: The Designer shall require the Contractor to provide designated minimum amounts of finish materials for ceilings, flooring, paints and other materials as identified by the Owner to the University as maintenance materials.

q Verify specific materials and quantities to be specified with DCM and FO for each project.

q Maintenance materials shall be delivered to storage areas either within the building under construction, or elsewhere on campus, as designated by FO.

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES – 09260

Metal Stud Framing:

q 16" on-center or less; anchored or braced at 4’-0” on-center or less to the structure above.

q Specs shall require that all metal studs be screw-attached on both sides to runners, top and bottom of walls.

Gypsum Board:

q 5/8” minimum thickness on all walls and ceilings.

q All gypsum board shall be Type "X", even if not required to be, to accommodate future renovations or occupancy changes.

Blocking:

q Provide 2x wood blocking in all gypsum board partitions behind all wall-mounted equipment.

q Verify locations of all current and future equipment and blocking locations with user group.

Acoustical Insulation:

q Provide in all gypsum board partitions.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS – 09511

General: KU prefers to limit the number of different acoustical ceiling panel and grid systems that need to be maintained in stock, so Designers are to limit the number and type of ceiling systems within each new building to those that are commonly maintained in production. Verify proposed ceiling systems are acceptable to DCM.

q Standard ceilings are typically 2' x 4' x 5/8" square-edged panels, with random fissured texture and a white finish, in a 1" wide heavy-duty white ceiling grid.

q Premium ceilings are typically 2' x 2' x ¾" tegular-edged panels, with a random nubby texture and a white finish, in a 1" wide heavy-duty white ceiling grid.

q High-humidity environments, such as animal labs, kitchens, cage wash areas and similar locations, are typically "Glasboard" or similar humidity-resistant products, utilitizing stainless steel hanger wires (not aluminum hanger wires, which can stretch over time) and an aluminum face grid.

q Acoustical Insulation: Designers shall specify that a two foot (2') minimum width of acoustical insulation shall be placed along each side of all walls that extend to but not above ceilings.

WOOD FLOORING – 09640

General: Select systems that have been tested and engineered to provide appropriate resiliency and other properties, suitable for intended uses of space to receive wood flooring.

q Parquet floors are discouraged, and shall only be used if approved by the DCM Director.

Finish: Solvent-based, per manufacturer's recommendations. Apply first coat immediately after finishing of wood floors is completed. Second coat shall be applied shortly before time of Substantial Completion.

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE – 09651

General: 1/8" minimum thickness required for resilient flooring products. Raised rubber disc tiles are discouraged, due to more difficult maintenance.

CARPET – 09680

General: Select carpets based on durability, stain hiding and ease of maintenance criteria. Review proposed carpets with DCM.

q Carpets shall be secured with direct glue-down methods.

q Carpet fibers shall be solution-dyed nylon, type 6.

q Level loop tuft is preferred for durability.



q Tuft-bind shall be 20 pound average, wet or dry.

q Backing system shall be latex-free.

PAINTING – 09910

General: Latex enamel paints are typical material used on campus. Typical sheens are "eggshell" on walls and "semi-gloss" on trim.

Solvent-based products are not to be specified unless specifically approved by DCM.

All concrete masonry is to receive at least one coat of block filler.

End of Document � G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div -09.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Specialties 10


Specialties

GENERAL




� Division 1 - General Requirements

� KU Graphics Program Manual, re: Signage - 10425

VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS – 10100

General: Refer to Appendix A1.5 for KU’s Standard Classroom Guidelines. Verify the types, sizes & locations of visual display boards with the user group(s) for each project.

Tackable Display Units: Typically provide one outside each departmental office, for posting of notices, schedules and general info. Provide with enclosed, lockable, glass door fronts, to minimize vandalism.

Chalkboards or Markerboards / Whiteboards: Provide either type, as preferred by the applicable user representatives or Building Committee.

Marking Supplies: Users should note that KU-FO will provide chalk for traditional chalkboards, but users are required to provide their own dry-erase markers for markerboards / whiteboards.

Trim for Chalkboards (CB), Tackboards (TB), Markerboards (MB) or Whiteboards (WB):

� Heavy-duty, extruded aluminum trim

� Natural anodized finish

� Fabricate with mitered corners and all cut edges deburred or eased.

� Install with concealed anchorage to wall substrates, and to adjacent trim pieces.

10



TOILET ROOMS – GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES

DCM can provide examples of typical University toilet room elevations and detail options. Designers shall give particular attention to toilet room layouts, to verify that sight lines are controlled and appropriately screened for privacy from outside.

� Finishes: Shall be ceramic tile on floors, wall base and full-height on walls. Floor and wall base shall have matching tile and grout, with mid-range or darker colors recommended for soil hiding ability over time.

� Vanity tops or continuous countertops with individual lavatories shall be solid composition materials (Corian or equal), not plastic laminate.

� Urinals and water closets shall be wall-mounted.

� Pipe chases serving toilets and other wet areas should be no less than 24" clear interior width, preferably 36" clear width. Access to chases shall be by means of standard, full-height swing doors for maintenance access, unless infeasible. When provided, access doors shall be 24"w x 36"h; verify locations with FO and DCM.

� Toilet Accessories: Provide as noted elsewhere in the document.

� Bookracks should be provided within toilet rooms, and included as part of the contract documents.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS – 10155

Toilet and urinal compartment panels shall be either solid plastic or stainless steel materials, due to lower vandalism and better maintenance. Baked enamel metal, plastic laminate and other materials are not to be used, unless otherwise approved by DCM due to location, type of users or budget. Exception: In partial remodels of existing toilet rooms, match existing type and appearance.

� Type: Overhead-braced, floor-mounted. Other types, such as ceiling-hung, are not permitted due to poor durability experiences KU has had with them in the past.

� Special Wall Mounting Requirements: Urinal screens & toilet compartment dividing wall shall be specified to be secured to walls with continuous wall brackets, in lieu of individual mounting brackets, for greater durability.

� Hardware shall all be stainless steel and heavy-duty quality.

TOILET ACCESSORIES – 10801

General: A careful review of the layout of toilet fixtures and accessories, especially for required mounting heights and other handicapped-accessibility requirements, shall be coordinated with the Office of Design and Construction Management. All toilet accessories shall be stainless steel materials, with satin finish, heavy-duty construction. Provide units indicated, as manufactured by Bobrick, or equal as approved by DCM.



Mirrors: Surface-mounted mirrors shall be provided with fully-welded, seamless stainless steel frame, tempered glass mirror, and secured with concealed theft-proof mounting.

� Tall Mirrors: Provide one in each public restroom. Minimum size: 24" wide x 60" high, with top mounted at 6'-8" AFF.

� Mirrors behind lavatories are discouraged by FO, due to increased maintenance from hair brushing over sinks.

Paper Towel Dispensers: Units for 8-inch-wide, 8-inch-diameter paper roll. Provide with lever handle operation, not crank.

� Bobrick Model #3960 or #3961, recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle.

� Bobrick Model #3861 or #38616, recessed or semi-recessed paper towel dispenser.

� Bobrick Model #2860, surface-mounted paper towel dispenser.

Paper Towel Waste Receptacles: Built-in units shall be largest capacity available.

� If loose units to be provided by FO Housekeeping, verify size of units to be provided and show locations dashed on drawings and noted as such.

� Locations and sizes must not alter accessibility of toilet rooms, toilet accessories or plumbing fixtures. Loose waste receptacles can violate ADA or exiting criteria if improperly placed. Designers must therefore indicate recommended locations on construction drawings which comply with ADA and building code requirements.

Soap Dispensers: Provide units for either powdered soap or liquid soap, as requested by building users. Units should be mounted over the lavatory counter and allow easy access for refilling without crawling below counter or lavatory.

� Bobrick Model #B-8226 Series, liquid soap dispenser, countertop-mounted with top refill. Position so nozzles extend over lavatory.

� Bobrick Model #B-2111 or #B-2112, liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted.

� Bobrick Model #B-132, powdered soap dispenser, wall-mounted.

Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Units that accommodate two rolls of toilet tissue, side-by-side. The dispenser shall be mounted on the partition on the hinge-side of the toilet stall door. Dispensers shall move in complete circles and shall not have controlled-flow feature.

� Bobrick Model #2740, surface-mounted dispenser.

Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units: Provide one feminine hygiene disposal unit in each woman’s toilet stall.

� Bobrick Model #270, or equal.



Sanitary Napkin Dispensers: These units shall be provided by the University's vending service provider. Construction drawings shall an appropriate location for each.

� Models shall be as determined by vendor, based on types of products to be dispensed, costs to be charged and coins to be accepted.

DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS – 10416

Building Directory: Provide in main entrance lobby(s). Limit text to public spaces and a general description of spaces on each floor. Individual blades for each line of text, or a traditional grooved background for press-in letters are both acceptable, but shall be enclosed and lockable to prevent theft or vandalism. An 8.5" x 11.5" slot for changeable paper inserts can be included for posting of computer-generated lists of faculty room assignments.

� Graphic Maps are generally discouraged, due to cost of updating them over time as space uses are reassigned & buildings are remodeled. However, for buildings of unusual geometry or complexity, this is sometimes a better option than a list of rooms or directional signage. If used, a plexiglas-covered sign that accepts paper floor plan drawings, which can be easily printed by computer and replaced periodically, is preferred.

SIGNAGE – 10431

� Refer to Appendix A10.1 for standard examples and guidelines copied from the KU Graphics Manual.

� Refer to Appendix A10.2 for standard signage

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES – 10520

Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Provide for all fire extinguisher locations except those within non-public spaces, such as mechanical/electrical rooms or unfinished work areas.

� Locations/Spacing: As required by NFPA-10 code standard. Graphically show locations of each fire extinguisher and it’s radius of coverage on code compliance plans.

� Fire Extinguishers: Provided by University’s Facility Operations department.

� Cabinets: Solid clear glass doors, with no locks on doors, trim color as appropriate for adjacent wall surfaces.

� Size: Interior dimensions adequate to receive up to a ten (10) pound ABC extinguisher.

Fire Hose Cabinets: Provide units with similar trim and appearance to fire extinguisher cabinets, in location(s) required by code plans. Provide units without fire hoses.

Fire Standpipe Cabinets: Provide 18”x18” units for 2 ½” fire department connection with similar trim and appearance to fire extinguisher cabinets, in location(s) required by code.



MAILROOMS & POSTAL SPECIALTIES – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Mail slots may be required as a part of the program. They should not be located in rated corridor walls.

Central Mail Rooms: DCM's PM shall review design with KU Printing Services, who functions as campus mail coordinating department. Provide space within or near rooms for waste and recycling containers.

FIRE-RATED OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS – 10653

General: Fire-rated operable panel partitions shall be used only if reviewed and approved by the University Fire Marshal (currently: Bob Rombach, DCM- [email protected]).

� Verify operation, controls and interface with KU's campus-wide fire alarm system and the KU-PS 911 Emergency Response Center.

TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES – 10750

General: KU's Architectural Barriers Committee has requested that at least one public text telephone be provided in each building on campus, even if not required by ADA. Designers shall verify closest existing text telephone locations within building and determine with DCM if an accessible, text telephone shall be provided.

WARDROBE SPECIALTIES – 10900

General: Heavy-duty coat racks and bookshelves shall be provided in toilet rooms and in waiting areas, as requested by user group or DCM. Lockers may supplement this need. The use of plastic assemblies, supports and hooks shall be minimized.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_2009_Div-10-Specialties.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards KU Graphics Manual Excerpts A10.1


KU Graphics Manual Excerpts

End of Document : D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\2000-October Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-01_A1.doc

A10.1

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Specialties- Signage A10.2


Specialties- Signage NEW SECTION

DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS – 10416

Building Directory: Provide in main entrance lobby(s). Limit text to public spaces and a general description of spaces on each floor. Individual blades for each line of text, or a traditional grooved background for press-in letters are both acceptable, but shall be enclosed and lockable to prevent theft or vandalism. An 8.5" x 11.5" slot for changeable paper inserts can be included for posting of computer-generated lists of faculty room assignments.

� Graphic Maps are generally discouraged, due to cost of updating them over time as space uses are reassigned & buildings are remodeled. However, for buildings of unusual geometry or complexity, this is sometimes a better option than a list of rooms or directional signage. If used, a plexiglas-covered sign that accepts paper floor plan drawings, which can be easily printed by computer and replaced periodically, is preferred.

SIGNAGE – 10431

General:

Refer to Appendix A10.1 for standard examples and guidelines copied from the KU Graphics Manual. Designers shall review the complete KU Graphics Manual for additional information, not included herein, which may be applicable to their project. DCM's Project Manager can arrange to make a copy of the Graphics Manual available for review.

Designers shall include scale drawings of each sign type to be provided for a project, and shall show mounting locations, noting all are to be field-verified with Owner prior to installation. The following signage shall be provided as part of the construction contract for each KU project, as applicable.

Exterior Signage:

� Exterior Building Name, Street number & Program Name: (New Buildings or major additions only) Include near main entrance(s), on wall of building; locations shall be approved by DCM & UA. Specs:

� Letters: Cast aluminum, Medium Bronze anodized finish, Helvetica Medium font, all caps.

� Heights: Building name shall be 8” to 10” high letters, appropriate to building's scale; generic name of program shall be smaller and below , typically 6" to 8" high; ½” to 1” deep letters. Street number at or near main entrance typically 6" to 8" high. Example:

LEARNED HALL

ENGINEERING (Street number) 1246

� Mounting: Concealed, with minimal space off substrate, to limit insect & bird nesting.

A10 . 2



� Power-Operated Building Entrance Doors Signs: 6” x 6” pictograms with universal symbol of accessibility, white on blue background, adhesively applied onto face of each door equipped with a power operator, 36” to 60” AFF.

� Other Accessible Entrance Signs: When all entrances to a building are not accessible, provide adhered 6" x 6" pictogram signs on the accessible doors, and provide signs at inaccessible entrances providing directions to accessible entrances. Main entrances must be accessible.

� Handicapped Parking Signs: GC shall provide painted galvanized steel posts for handicapped parking signs; Owner shall provide signage & mount it on these posts.

Code Required Interior Signage:

CODE REQUIRED signs shall be provided and installed prior to final inspection for occupancy. Failure to provide and install signage shall delay the certificate of occupancy being issued by the AHJ. Show all these signs on the contract documents.

� Required sign list:

� Tactile exits signs

� Stair identification signs

� Toilet Room signs

� Stairwell Level signs

� Elevator- Do not use signs

� Elevator- Emergency Handicapped Egress signs

� Braille on Room number signs if provided

� Room maximum occupancy signs

� Emergency Plan Signs

� Severe weather signs- Standard KU sign

� Area of Refuge Instructions

� Tactile Exit Sign: On the approach side of ALL exterior exit doors, Horizontal exit doors and stairwell doors, 2 ¼” x 4 ½” blade , on the latch side at 60” AFF to centerline of sign. Refer to IBC_(section #)_. Signs for stairwells should include stairwell designation indicated below. Provide large text- 1 ½” with Braille on signs without stair designations.

EXIT BRAILLE



� Stairwell Identification Signs: On corridor side mounted on the latch side at 60” AFF to centerline of sign. Provide one 2 ¼” x 4 ½” sign with ‘EXIT’ then the stair name text (Ex: ‘Stair 3S1’) with Braille below text. In the example, ‘3’ refers to 3rd floor and ‘S1’ refers to the stairwell number assigned by KU.

� Toilet Rooms: Provide 6”x 8” sign with ADA pictogram and 1” text below pictogram which reads ‘Men’, ‘Women’ or ‘ Family Restroom’ (if shared restroom).

� Stairwell Level sign: Inside stairwells on each landing, provide code-required signs, 10” x 10” size (per IBC). Text shall be 3/4” high letters with a 3” high floor number. Install sign with centerline 5’ above elevation of landing, in a readily visible location when all doors are open and closed (ref. IBC 1005.3.2.4).

� Elevator Signage: Provide per code. Text to read ‘Do Not Use in Case of Fire’ and include standard pictogram. Coordinate with elevator specs and submittals; omit separate sign if signage provided by elevator manufacturer.

� Elevator Emergency Egress Sign: Provide10” x 10” sign if elevator is used for Handicapped emergency egress and the elevator is equipped for that function and is on emergency power. Locate sign at every elevator call station. Sign to read :

� Room number signs: provide one for each door in building. Standard size to be 2 ¼” x 4 ½” blade with room number in raised letters, with Braille below text. Provide larger blade to identify multiple distinct room numbers occurring beyond door.

EMERGENCY EGRESS

ELEVATOR

IN CASE OF FIRE HANDICAPPED USE

ONLY

ALL OTHER OCCUPANTS USE

STAIRS

STAIR S1

NO ROOF ACCESS

3 1 THRU 6

EXIT DOWN AT FLOOR 1



� Room Maximum Occupancy Signs: Provide a 10”X10” sign installed in ALL assembly occupancies (over 40 occupants) with loose or fixed seating. Locate sign on the latch side of the entrance door, top of sign even with the top of door frame. Text shall be- 1st 2 lines 1” high, occupancy number 2 ½” high, last 2 lines ¾” high (no braille) Text as follows:

� Emergency Plan Signs: Provide one sign holder at primary firefighter’s entrance; typically sized to receive an inserted 11” x 17” sheet of paper with a clearly legible floor plan indicating all emergency exits and exit corridors. For new construction, consultants shall provide this floor plan printout, which can be modified from the final code footprint.

Refer to appendix A10.3 for sample

� Severe Weather Signs: Provide 10”x10” University Standard Severe weather signs throughout building at the following locations:

� Elevator lobbies

� Corridor side of stairwells at latch side of door or adjacent wall

� Emergency Lighting Testing Instructions: In assemble occupancies with normally OFF emergency lighting provide a sign; gray with red letters, 4 1/2 inches wide (the width of double gang wall switch) and 2 inches high; text ¼” high, located just above the typical room lighting wall switch on the latch side of the primary entrance door to the room. Sign should be mounted just above the wall switch or at 60" above finished floor. Sign shall state the following:

Severe Weather Procedures

1. Stay Indoors.

2. Go to the lowest floor of the building.

3. Stay in interior hallways.

4. Keep away from exterior doors and windows.

MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY

60 By Order of the Fire Marshal



� Area of Refuge Instructions: (if communications system is provided) - Information on how to use communication device per code. Standard text as follows, 5/8” high letters:

General Informational Interior Signage (recommended, not code required):

� Building Directory: Refer to requirements specified under the Directories and Bulletin Boards - 10416 section of this Division.

� Directional Signage: Provide as required to clearly direct traffic through building. Typically provide on each floor outside elevator or stairs in main lobbies, noting sequence of room numbers that occur in each direction of travel. If the location of the elevator is not obvious when entering the building provide a directional sign as to the direction of travel to reach the elevator.

� Room Numbers with Descriptive Room Names: Provide only at permanent locations where this information is needed. Examples: Dean of Fine Arts; Inge Theater; Lecture Hall; Multimedia Classroom; Vending; Mechanical; Electrical; Tunnel Access; Telecom; Utility; Housekeeping; Storage; Roof; . Provide in standardized module widths and heights as appropriate for each project.

� Room Numbers & Occupant Names: If desired by building users and the project budget allows it, provide signs in those locations with an integral slot covered with clear plastic for removable inserts designating the room occupants’ names are typically not included in KU room signage. If included, they shall have a fixed clear cover over the insert, and

EMERGENCY LIGHTING PROVIDED

TO TEST (REQUIRED MONTHLY)

TRIP CIRCUIT _____ AT PANEL _____

PANEL LOCATED IN ROOM_________

AREA OF REFUGE INSTRUCTIONS

Braille

EVACUATE BUILDING, UNLESS

ASSISTING OTHERS

Braille

IF THIS EXIT IS BLOCKED

FOLLOW ILLUMINATED EXIT

SIGNS TO ALTERNATE EXITS

Braille

INTERCOM IS ONLY ACTIVATED

IN A LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY



allow room occupants to create computer-generated inserts rather than being required to purchase pre-manufactured inserts.

Interior Signage Specifications:

� Materials: Solid phenolic material; engraved, etched or blasted to create both raised relief letters and Braille.

� Colors may either be integral or hard-coat paint, as approved by DCM.

� Corners: Required to have a 3/8” radius.

� Fonts: Size shall be 5/8” to 1” high. 1 inch is preferred. All interior text shall be Helvetica Medium font, title-case (first letter capitalized, unless specified otherwise), left-justified unless pointing to rooms to right.

� Applied letters, numbers or braille text that are separate from substrate materials, and adhered to it, whether chemically or by heat, are NOT acceptable due to poor performance.

� Special graphics on signs, in addition to normal text, are discouraged on signs that might typically require replacement or additional matching signs in the future. These include room numbers, whether plain or including room names or insert slots, and building directories.

� Typical Colors: White letters on a dark background, in a color consistent with other interior colors. Brown or bronze background is the standard background color, unless the color scheme suggests other colors that would be more appropriate. Verify with DCM (approval required).

� Partial Remodels: Match existing signage (style, colors, fonts, etc) to greatest extent feasible.

� Typical Mounting Locations: Mount per ADA & other code requirements. Typically mount 2" clear off the door frame's strike jamb, 60” AFF to centerline of sign.

� Typical Mounting Methods: Either of the following methods are acceptable:

� Not less than 80% coverage double-sided tape over entire back of sign.

� Double-sided tape to temporarily hold in position, with continuous perimeter coverage of silicone sealant/adhesive.

� If mounted on glass sidelight, provide back plate to hide mounting tape.

Signage by Owner

� Handicapped Parking Signage (posts by GC)

� Parking Lot Designations

� Traffic Control Signage

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_2009_Div-10-A2-signage.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Equipment 11


Equipment

GENERAL




q Division 1 - General Requirements; specifically refer to the "Design Guidelines – Support Spaces” for additional information regarding the design of loading docks, service areas, lecture halls, classrooms, vending areas and other spaces which incorporate equipment items.

q Appendix A1.5 - Classroom Standards

q Division 12 - Furnishings; Laboratory Casework & Equipment – Design Guidelines; Wood Laboratory Casework (Section 12348)

Definitions: Equipment and furniture have been organized into the following classifications:

Fixed Equipment: Items that are specified by the Project Architect as a part of the Construction Documents or attached to the building, such as chalkboards, laboratory furniture, carpet, blinds, casework, auditorium seating, and items requiring mechanical or electrical connections.

Movable Equipment: Items that are carried on an equipment inventory and/or have a life expectancy of one year or more. The University will be responsible for purchasing movable equipment and furniture.

AUDIO/VIDEO PROJECTION SYSTEMS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: A careful review of technical requirements for equipment such as projection screens, overhead projectors, video projectors, lecterns and controls shall be coordinated with DCM, FO, NTS, the KU Media Committee and the Office of Instructional Development Services (IDS).

q Refer to Appendix A1.5 - Classroom Standards for specific criteria re: rough-in requirements, conduit bundles, future expansion criteria, etc.

11



KU Media Committee: For projects which include A-V systems, drawings of those spaces are to be given to DCM's Project Manager at the Design Development stage, who will forward them to the DCM Media Committee rep (currently: Mark Reiske), for review and comment by this committee.

q This committee generally meets every two to four weeks, and is charged with coordinating the design of multimedia classroom spaces and equipment in these types of spaces across campus.

q It is University policy that faculty should be able to use any A-V multimedia teaching space on campus and find consistent equipment and capabilities at any location.

Special Consultants: Designers shall include the services of acoustical, A-V and/or lighting consultants as needed to provide the level of design and achieve the functional outcomes outlined in the architectural program, so that each space is properly designed to meet it's intended use.

A-V Equipment Installation: KU’s FO or IDS departments shall install video projection equipment and controls for equipment that are procured separately by the University, outside of the construction contract.

LOADING DOCKS AND EQUIPMENT – DESIGN GUIDELINES

Loading Dock Heights: Verify types of vehicles which will be using loading docks with user groups. Design docks with appropriate height(s), as approved by user groups, FO and DCM.

Dock Levelers: If the range of vehicle heights requires it, provide built-in dock plates or levelers that will accept the range of heights required.

Loading Dock Edges: Protect top edges with not less than a 3”x3” steel angle, hot-dip galvanized, embedded in the concrete dock’s exposed upper edge, full-width.

Trash and Recycling Containers: Identify location(s) for all trash or recycling containers that are proposed to be stored near loading docks. Show and note their locations, to-scale, on site plan construction documents. Verify that access routes in and out of this area for vehicles serving these containers are appropriately provided.

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Food service equipment shall meet all the requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Sanitation Foundation and shall be UL listed. Carefully review the requirements for accessibility, especially for reach limitations at self-serve stations.



Accessibility shall include the possibility for handicapped employees to work in the food preparation areas.

q Designers shall include the services of food service consultants as needed to provide the level of design and achieve the functional outcomes outlined in the architectural program, so that each food service preparation space is properly designed to meet it's intended use.

VENDING EQUIPMENT – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: The requirements for vending services shall be reviewed with the Office of Design and Construction Management and the University Director of Administration (currently: Theresa Klinkenberg). Verify that the following are provided at each vending location.

q Location: Show vending machines, to scale, on construction drawings. Locate machines near main circulation routes and so they are easily located, but at same time design of vending machine area shall control noise and light pollution into adjoining spaces.

q Do NOT locate vending machines within stairwells, protected horizontal exits or exit passageways.

q Installation: All vending machines shall be mechanically anchored in-place by vending service provider. Designer shall provide blocking in wall behind or in ceiling / soffit above vending machines, suitable to receive fasteners.

q Electrical Power: Provide appropriate to each piece of equipment. Include outlets for future equipment, if space allows for future units.

q HVAC: Condition vending areas to maintain constant temperatures and to exhaust excess heat produced by equipment.

q NTS: Verify if telecommunication lines will be required for KU Smart Card or other bank card pay systems. Provide dedicated conduit and blank boxes as requested.

q Recycling Containers: Provide space for appropriate recycling containers near vending machines. Show locations on floor plans of construction drawings. Containers will be provided by KU.

Coca-Cola Contract: The University has entered into an exclusive-provider, long-term contract with the Coca-Cola Company to provide soft drink vending machines on the main campus.

q Verify locations and numbers of vending machines to be incorporated into new or renovated facilities during the Design Development phase of each project. Consult with DCM and appropriate administrators of this contract.

Kansas Union Snack Bar Option: In addition to, or in lieu of, locating vending machines within a building, it is possible that a snack bar administered by the Kansas & Burge Unions could be provided, if the Union Director and KU Administration agree to this approach.



RECYCLING EQUIPMENT – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: Recycling containers shall be incorporated into the design of all vending areas, and into appropriate locations for the recycling of office waste materials.

q Review proposed vending areas and floor plans with KU’s Recycling Coordinator (currently: Victoria Silva, 785-864-2855) to determine types of containers, quantities and locations.

q Standard recommendations and guidelines are available at the KU-EHS, Recycling Program website: http://www.ehs.ukans.edu/recycling/

DARKROOMS – DESIGN GUIDELINES

General: All darkroom facilities shall be fully accessible to the handicapped. Provisions for accessibility shall include darkroom doors which fold, pop-out or otherwise provide handicapped egress. The Project Architect shall review and verify the specific requirements for ventilation, make-up air and plumbing systems with DCM, FO, the Director of EHS and the user group of each proposed darkroom.

EHS Approval: All darkroom designs must be reviewed and approved by the Director of KU's Environmental Health & Safety Office (currently: Mike Russell).

Backflow Protection: Water supplies shall be provided with backflow devices.

Waste Metal Collection: Waste water systems may require local collection systems of waste metals; verify type and maintenance plan with EHS.

Exhaust System: Darkrooms shall have dedicated exhaust systems, to prevent fumes bleeding back into other spaces, especially under power failure.

DARKROOM EQUIPMENT – 11470

q Doors into darkrooms may either use an oversized, light-tight, circular darkroom door; a square coiled-curtain darkroom door assembly; or a std. darkroom door with adjacent 3’ wide swing door.

q Provide at least one enlarger location with an adjustable-height easel for handicapped use.

q Photographic sinks shall also be open base, accessible type.



LABORATORY FUME HOODS – 11610

General: The State has a negotiated procurement contract in-place for the purchase of fume hoods. Consult with DCM and the user group to verify if fume hoods for each project will be purchased through the State contract or as part of the construction project.

q Verify that the bid documents clearly designate the scope of work to be provided by the Contractor to rough-in or prepare the space, or to install fume hoods that are to be furnished by others.

q The layout of lab equipment shall include accessible fume hood stations in both teaching and research laboratories.

q Fume Hoods shall not be located adjacent to exits from rooms.

q Base cabinets for fume hoods should be specified to match other lab casework within space. Coordinate provision of base cabinets for fume hoods with lab casework specified in Division 12.

q Fume hoods shall be connected to a single, dedicated exhaust fan for each hood, except that fume hoods in the same lab are typically allowed to be manifolded to a single exhaust fan. Manifold exhaust systems will also be considered when if can be shown that this is a more energy-efficient system.

q No manifold exhaust systems are allowed unless specifically approved by DCM and EHS during the preliminary design phases.

q Fume hoods shall include alarms tied into the building energy management system for failure detection.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision\Stds_sas_Div-11.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Furnishings 12


Furnishings


RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section. Division 1 - General Requirements Section 11610 - Equipment, Laboratory Fume Hoods

PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK (SECTION 12304) General: Plastic laminate casework may be used in lower abuse areas, such as offices and reception areas. Solid polymer tops are recommended for kitchenette areas. All hardware shall be heavy-duty.

LABORATORY CASEWORK & EQUIPMENT – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: Laboratory casework and equipment are considered fixed equipment and shall be bid as a part of the construction project. The layout of lab equipment shall include accessible stations in both teaching and research laboratories. EHS Approval: All laboratory designs must be reviewed and approved by the Director of

KU's Environmental Health & Safety Office (currently: Mike Russell). Lab Classification: Laboratories at the University of Kansas are generally classified as

Class "B", rather than Class "H" spaces, and do not require an out-swinging door. Verify rating with DCM & EHS; modify door swings accordingly. Exits: All laboratories shall have two exits, even if less SF than codes would require to

have two exits. This prevents future citations and additional remodeling work, if more hazardous materials are used within the space at some point in the future.

12



WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK – 12348 General: KU’s laboratory casework shall be of wood or metal construction, as appropriate to the casework function. Tops: Chemical-resistant tops are required; sand-based epoxy resin tops are preferred

type. All countertops are to be mechanically attached, not just secured with silicone sealant. Cabinets: Wood cabinets shall be constructed of solid hardwood and hardwood veneer

materials. Particle board materials are NOT permitted. Bases: Ventilation of base cabinets is not required. Provide coved base on all cabinets to

floor. Chases: Provide 8" chase space between all tall or base cabinets and walls, or between

back-to-back cabinets, for routing of plumbing lines. Doors & Drawers: Provide number plates on each door and drawer. Verify with user

group if keyed locks are required on doors &/or drawers. If required, verify if doors &/or drawers are to be keyed alike or separate, and number of keys required for each. Reagent Racks: Provide in resin materials only. Wood, plastic laminate or metal are

NOT acceptable. Hazardous Materials Fire-Rated Storage Cabinets: Verify types of materials to be

used and stored within each lab space with users; review with EHS and provide types of storage cabinets directed by EHS.

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: Recessed mats with an open design that collects debris and dirt are desirable at all major building entrances. They shall be provided with a recessed frame, set so their top surfaces are flush to the adjacent finish flooring materials.

WINDOW TREATMENTS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: Window treatments shall be bid as a part of the Construction Documents. The method of light control on windows will depend upon the design and program requirements.

Typical KU Window Treatment: Aluminum 1-inch mini blinds. One color shall be selected building-wide for consistent appearance from exterior of building.

Draperies: It is possible that draperies will need to be provided in special areas. Light Control: Provide additional light control for windows when necessary to create appropriate environments for video projection and similar functions. KU has had better



experience with vinyl-type cellular and folding light-control shades. Metal-framed, roll-up blackout shades are discouraged due to past operating and maintenance problems.

FURNISHINGS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: All loose equipment, furnishings and landscape partitions shall be shown on construction drawings, even if to be provided by Owner (show dashed). The project design shall coordinate the accessibility and egress requirements of the space, mechanical and lighting systems with these loose furnishings and equipment. Accessibility Compliance: Space planning shall consider handicapped accessibility when locating fixed and movable equipment and furniture. All drawings that indicate movable equipment shall comply with ADA guidelines for

accessible routes and other accommodations. Where critical ADA compliance’s must be met as part of the loose furnishings for the

project, those criteria shall be noted, shown and dimensioned on the project drawings. University user groups shall comply with ADA guidelines when selecting, purchasing and

placing loose furnishings within spaces. Reception desks shall be provided with 36" high x 36" wide accessible counters in at

least one location.

Furnishings Procurement: The University will be responsible for purchasing movable equipment and furniture, through it's Purchasing Department. The DCM Project Manager and user group reps shall meet with the Director of KU

Purchasing at the DD and early CA stages to review and coordinate the procurement and delivery of all loose furnishings.

Exits and State Fire Marshall Compliance: Loose furnishings shall not be shown or placed within exit passageways or corridors. If loose furniture is desired to be placed within or near those areas, it shall be secured in-

place so it cannot be moved and block the code-required exit paths. If it is not, the University &/or State Fire Marshall’s reps shall cite the offenses and issue an order for the condition to be corrected. If not corrected within a specified time, KU will have FO correct it and bill the department. Landscape partitions shall be coordinated with code-required exit sign locations, so they

are visible from appropriate locations in the exit pathways, in coordination with the height of the partitions.



FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING – 12610 General: Tablet arms or fixed lecture tables are generally required in assembly classroom areas. Provide lecture tables with modesty panels. Verify data and power requirements with each user group, DCM and NTS, as well as the KU Media Committee. Tablet Arms: If provided, tablet arms shall be oversized.

INTERIOR PLANTS AND PLANTERS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: The University typically discourages the provision of interior planters and live plants as part of University projects, due to high maintenance demands that the University's FO Housekeeping staff cannot provide as part of their usual service. If provided at all, interior planters for live plants should be limited to those areas where

departmental staff from the building occupants will be committed to care for them.

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Special Construction 13


Special Construction

GENERAL




� Division 1 - General Requirements; refer to sections regarding construction testing and field quality control requirements.

� Division 16 – Electrical

LIGHTNING PROTECTION – 13100

General: All University buildings shall be provided with lightning protection, unless the University waives this requirement.

System Requirements: All new projects will require a complete building lightning protection system. All new systems should have the UL Master Label which should be attached permanently to the building along with the installer's name plate. The location shall be as determined by the University. The evaluation and design should, as a minimum, meet the requirements of the NEC, LPI, NFPA 780 and/or UL96 and 96A.

� Down conductors should be hidden from view where possible.

� Down conductors shall be selected from copper, tin-copper or aluminum materials that are compatible with roofing or substrate materials.

� Where down conductors extend to grade level, they shall be placed in metallic conduit to protect them for the bottom 8' above finish grade, which shall be painted to closely match color of substrate materials.

� Air terminals shall be mechanically-fastened to substrates. Adhesive-only attachments are NOT acceptable. Mount above roof and flash or seal fastener penetrations to make watertight. Concrete block bases may also be used, set on flat roofs.

13



� The lightning protection system ground, the electrical power system ground, and all other system grounds such as telephone and cable television, shall be bonded together per NEC requirements.

Surge Suppression: Lightning surge arresters should be installed at all building primary power transformers and all other wire services where they enter the building and they should have the lowest possible voltage breakdown for maximum protection. The electrical primary service system is 12,470/7,200 volts, and the surge arrester should be 9KV.

� Where service is provided by the power company at the use voltage, the surge suppression should be located at the point the service enters the building.

� Reroofing projects shall require maintaining the existing lightning protection system, upgrading it as required to meet current codes, or adding one if none exists.

KENNELS & ANIMAL SHELTERS – 13185

The design of animal holding facilities must meet the regulations of the National Institute of Health for the care and use of laboratory animals.

INTRUSION DETECTION – 13720

Engineered System Definitions. The University has established the following distinction between security and access control systems.

� Security Systems include those non-programmable devices that monitor the status of occupancy of a secured area (including motion detectors) as well as those devices that monitor the positions of doors, windows, and gates located at the perimeter of a secured area (including magnetic contact switches).

� Access Control Systems include equipment that is capable of reading encoded data from personalized ID cards and interrogating programmed databases to determine an individuals authority to gain access to the secured area.

Scope of Systems: Requirements for security and access control will be determined on a project-by-project basis. The Designer should determine, through discussions with University personnel if the project programming has included a requirement for either security or access control equipment.

System Components:

� Security system designs are to be completed using Simplex-proprietary part and model numbers for appliances, devices and control hardware and software. In this manner, security data may be transmitted to remote monitoring stations by the existing campus-wide fire alarm system communications network.



� Access Control systems, where required, are not to form a part of the fire alarm/security system communications network. Access control system hardware is to be linked to PC file servers and/or workstations that are the responsibility of individual University departments and building users, and are not to be monitored by the University Office of Public Safety.

FIRE ALARM – 13851

General: The University has a negotiated procurement contract in-place for the provision of fire alarm systems on all University buildings. The majority of projects SimplexGrinnell shall provide a turnkey installation including the electrical sub-contractor’s work. SimplexGrinnell shall provide a bid to the General Contractor or Construction Manager for this work.

� Refer to Appendix A13.1 for the Fire Alarm Standards.

� Refer to Appendix A13.2 for the Standard Fire Alarm Specification. Please download and use.

� Refer to Appendix A13.3 for the Fire Alarm standard Graphic Symbols. Please download and use.

Local Fire Dept. Coordination: Although the AHJ for the majority of projects on State owned land is DFM (State Division of Facilities Management), the local entity charged with responding to fire and safety emergency situations at the University is the city of Lawrence Fire Department (LDCFM- Lawrence Douglas County Fire Medical). As the designated initial responders, LDCFM should be consulted to determine the appropriate locations for Knox boxes, fire alarm control panels/annuciators, primary and secondary Fire Department Access, fire lanes and fire hydrants. .

� It is the Designer’s responsibility to obtain approval through the University Fire Marshal acting as liaison to the local authorities for the specific locations and arrangements of devices critical to timely and effective initial response activities.

Design Requirements: All new installations, and all system upgrades should be designed as active multiplexed systems, with addressable appliances and devices. Building control panels should be designed to link by fiber-connection to, and be monitored by, an existing campus-wide fire alarm system communications network.

� Specific design requirements for fire alarm system projects are described Appendix A13.1 - Integrated and Multiplexed Intrusion Detection/Fire Alarm Systems.

Basis for Design: The Designer should use the following documents as basis for design:

� NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

� NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

� NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

� Current IBC version approved by DFM or local jurisdiction if not on State land



� Kansas Fire Prevention Code- State Fire Marshal's Handbook

� 1991 ADA Accessibility Guidelines (change anticipated for July 1, 2010)

Responsibilities for Design: The Designer is responsible for development of a code-compliant system design that meets the specific needs of the site and/or building location of the project. The SimplexGrinnell provides and bid to the general contractor and and installs the system under that contract.

Coordination with Other Disciplines: The Designer should be aware of the following typical coordination requirements for fully-functioning, code-compliant campus fire alarm systems:

� Designers shall consider including a framed, permanently mounted reduced graphic floor plan directory with room numbers adjacent to the remote annunciator panel, to orient firefighters to the building.

� Specifications for door hardware should require that magnetic door holders are a part of the fire alarm system and furnished by the fire alarm manufacturer in lieu of the door hardware manufacturer.

� Designs in project areas served by the University building automation control system (BACS) should include an interface module.

� Designers shall show interface with Machanical for duct detection locations and Fire Protection for fire sprinkler control and monitoring locations.

Submittals: Refer to Section A1.6 for code compliance submittal requirements.

Record “As Built” Documents: Contractor shall provide record documents of the fire alarm installation to the Owner. Refer to A13.1 for requirements.

CLOCK CONTROLS - 13810

General: The University has a limited master clock system. Determination if the affected project areas are to be added to the existing master clock system will be on a case-by-case basis. The Designer should determine, by discussions with the University, if interface with the existing system is desired.

Design Criteria for Uncontrolled Clock Installations: Wall clock outlets shall be provided in public areas, classrooms seating 21 or more persons, and assembly areas of 100 or more persons. Recessed clock outlets shall be included in the project construction documents. Purchase of clocks should be specified to be part of the Simplex procurement contract.



FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - 13900

Relevant Masterspec Sections:

Section No. Section Title Description

13915 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING Classes I,II, and III standpipes; wet-pipe, dry-pipe, pre-action, and deluge sprinklers.

13916 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS Wet- and dry-pipe sprinklers.

13920 FIRE PUMPS Evaluations only to support Sections 13921, 13922, 13926, and 13927.

13921 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS

Horizontally and vertically mounted, split case.

13956 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING FOAM PIPING Piping, fittings, nozzles, and equipment.

13967 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

Equipment, agent, piping, and controls.

13975 STANDPIPES AND HOSES Class I,II,&III, automatic wet and dry; semiautomatic wet; and manual wet and dry standpipes.

Responsibilities for Design: In accordance with requirements of the State Division of Facilities Management- Building Design and Construction Manual (BDCM) , the Designer is responsible for the complete fire suppression system design showing sprinkler head layout, risers, main line locations and water supply calculations on drawings. Refer to BDCM requirements at the following web site:

http://www.da.ks.gov/fp/manual.htm See chapter 7 and chapter 13

The Designer is responsible for the design, layout and hydraulic calculations of wet and dry sprinkler, pre-action and deluge systems. System components that are specifically identified in this manual as being the responsibility of the Designer for selection, sizing, location, and interfacing include but may not be limited too:

� Fire pumps and water storage tanks, if required.

� Chemical or gas extinguishing systems.

� Piping, valves, gauges, flow switches, bells, nozzles and heads.

� Activation methods, and building systems’ interconnects (such as fire alarm activation and fan shutdown.)

� Standpipes, hose connections, hose cabinets.



� Fire hydrants and test stations.

The Designer should prepare construction documents detailing all fire suppression system components as required by the referenced DFM Manual and as required for a code-compliant system.

Contractor Qualifications and Responsibilities. The fire protection contractor has responsibility for installation and testing of a fire suppression system that conforms to the design’s requirements.

� A professional engineer shall be required to design and seal the fire protection contractor’s shop drawing submittals.

System Performance Requirements. The University will provide the results of a hydrant flow test to the Designer during the programming phase of the building design.

� The Designer shall identify the specific hydrant(s) to be flow-tested for each project.

� The Designer shall specify densities, design fire pump installations, specify pipe schedule standpipe systems, coordinate the water supply, coordinate electrical requirements, and specify materials and methods which meet University and nationally recognized standards, as well as building and fire codes.

� When a project requires sprinkler designs based on fire modeling, the sprinkler piping and heads shall be laid out by either a registered engineer proficient in fire protection design, or a NICET Level 4 Designer.

Prohibited Piping Types And Systems: Due to the extended anticipated life span of University buildings, CPVC, PB and other plastic piping or thin-wall steel piping shall NOT be specified, or approved for use on KU projects.

Design Standards For Materials And Methods: The Designer shall edit pertinent specification sections to accommodate the following University requirements:

� All equipment shall be UL listed and FM approved.

� Flanged, threaded, welded or grooved piping connections are acceptable.

� Flanged connections are required around fire pumps.

� Threaded pipe shall be a minimum of Schedule 40 black iron.

� Mechanical rolled grooved pipe may be Schedule 40 black iron.

� Schedule 10 galvanized is NOT permitted.

� Use galvanized pipe for dry-pipe, deluge and pre-action systems, and the fire pump suction pipe.

� Copper pipe may be used in areas susceptible to magnetic fields.



� Firestopping shall be installed in accordance with Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

� Provide permanent signs to identify drains, test connections, control valves, risers supplying hydraulically designed sprinkler systems, and each alarm. Label valves normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).

� Adequate drainage should be provided to drain and test the sprinkler system. Typical floor drains usually do not have capacity to handle full flow main drain tests. All main drains and express drains shall discharge to the exterior of the building. The Designer should coordinate a location with the Architect to minimize damage to landscaping or building from the main drain discharge.

Testing and Commissioning Responsibility: Determination of the justification for a commissioning agent is project-specific. During the design phases, the University will advise the Designer if a commissioning agent will be retained for the project. In section’s 13915 or 13916, commissioning should be included only if an independent commissioning agent will NOT be retained.

Post-Construction Testing: The Designer shall specify that the acceptance of the fire protection system will be based upon completion of the necessary testing as outlined in the National Fire Codes. All testing must be documented on certificate forms. The fire protection contractor is responsible for maintaining the equipment in service after the acceptance test as well as minimizing impairments to the system for the remainder of the project.

� On projects involving installation of new hydrants, the Designer shall include specification requirements that the Contractor shall conduct a fire hydrant flow test of all new hydrants.

� Tests shall be jointly observed by the Designer and Owner's representatives, plus the local fire department's representatives shall be invited to observe these tests.

� The Contractor shall be required to submit the hydrant flow test information in the shop drawings.

Fire Pumps: The Designer should refer to the following supplemental guidelines and standards of practice for projects involving installation of a fire pump.

� Applicability. For all projects that involve the installation of new, or extension of existing, water-based fire suppression systems, the Designer shall determine the need for fire pump(s). The Designer shall determine when fire pumps are needed based on hydraulically calculated flow analysis using the highest system demand including standpipe demand. A fire hydrant flow test may be required to verify calculations.

� Energy Source. The University strongly prefers the use of electric-drive, rather than diesel-drive centrifugal fire pumps.

� Fire pumps shall be on the building's emergency power system.

� Design of Electrical Service. To insure that during a fire emergency the building electrical system may be de-energized without the loss of the fire pump service, the electrical feeders to the pump controller should originate at the building service transformer



secondary terminations. The fire pump controller should not be fed by any feeder that originates downstream of a building substation main disconnect. The Designer should refer to NEC® Article 695, NFPA 20, and NEMA Stds. Pub. ICS 14-1998 for guidance regarding design of transformers, transfer switches, conductors, and overload protection in fire pump service. Circumstances that require the invocation of Exception No. 1 of NFPA 20¶6-3.2.2 should be reviewed with the University during system design.

� Design of System Monitoring Service. Provision should be made to interface the fire pump and controller to the campus-wide fire alarm system network. The fire alarm system shall monitor essential supervisory fire pump conditions, including: pump running, loss of power, phase reversal and controller troubles.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_2009_Div-13-SpecialConst.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Fire Alarm Systems A13.1


Standard of Practice -

Fire Alarm Systems Section completely revised September 9, 2009

OBJECTIVE OF STANDARD

� To provide compliant “smart” addressable voice fire alarm systems, integrated into the campus wide monitoring network maintaining consistent design features to insure continuity between buildings and components.

� To provide a complete Campus EPAS (Emergency Public Address System) utilizing the fire alarm system network and components, integrated into all facilities and exterior public areas.

� Utilize detection features of these systems to provide the earliest warning of an emergency event.

BACKGROUND

The University of Kansas has invested in providing over 60 new addressable voice fire alarm systems over the past 15 years connected to a campus monitoring and emergency dispatch center. Connected to this system is a central Emergency Public Address System (EPAS) connecting an additional 15 buildings that have older fire alarm systems. The complete system is capable of providing early warning in specific areas, precise graphic reporting of the location of events and providing live voice or recorded messages throughout 75 buildings and surrounding exterior areas for emergency messages including weather alerts and threats.

A contract for procurement of these systems is in place with SimplexGrinnell who provide a turnkey installation for major projects. Continuity of design and installation is insured using a pre-approved qualified contractor list and a clearly defined review processes through the University Fire Marshal Authority at DCM. All installed systems are maintained and tested by in house facilities personnel.

BASIS FOR DESIGN

Any new fire alarm system should be designed as a “protected premises fire alarm system” in accordance with NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code), providing the following functions.

� Voice alarm utilizing NFPA international tones and voice messages.

� Campus fiber network connection to the campus monitoring and dispatch center.

� EPAS features for live voice throughout campus from the KU Public Safety Facility.

� Egress corridor and critical area detection to provide early warning of a fire event.

� Security points connected to Public Safety to monitor key campus resources.

� Single provider and qualified installers to maintain system integrity.

A13.1



DESIGN IMPLEMENTATION

The fire alarm Engineer shall be familiar with the Code Footprint for the building, specific occupancy characteristics and work closely with the Architect to apply all applicable code requirements to the design. The Engineer shall discuss these standards and how they apply to the project with the Architect and University Fire Marshal. They shall utilize the KU standard fire alarm specification for all designs. Additional requirements may result from one or more of the following considerations:

� Requirements of the AHJ – the designer should determine if the project area is subject to existing fire code violations that may be require to be addressed as part of each project.

� Code equivalencies:

� The University prefers NOT to use code equivalencies in new buildings.

� If an equivalency is proposed for a project to addressed fire citations or special conditions, it must be approved in writing by DCM, DFM and the KSFMO and documented on the Code Footprint.

� Special detection requirements - such as devices or configurations that are resistant to false alarms in areas like performance theaters and concession stands.

� Special signaling appliances - such as signs, strobes and speakers appropriately placed for protection of disabled individuals in practice rooms or listening labs.

DESIGN CRITERIA

The designer should review the KU standard specification, utilize the devices and connectivity required per those specification and consider the following specific items in completing a fire alarm system installation or upgrade design:

General

� Design shall be strictly per applicable codes including but not limited to, NFPA 72, the Kansas Fire Prevention Code and ADAAG.

� Design shall use addressable voice speaker based systems. Horns type zone systems can be used in very small buildings if approved by KU Fire Marshal. System designer must be experienced in designing voice systems and dependent on the type of project may be required to be a Fire Protection Engineer specialized in voice fire alarm systems.

� Provide raceways for fire alarm wiring; utilize red conduit if concealed, painted conduit to match wall if exposed in finished service areas and wire-mold if exposed in public areas. Junction box covers shall be painted red for identification.

� An electrical outlet shall be provided within 10 feet of the fire alarm control panel.

� Signaling line circuits shall NOT be loaded greater than 75 percent of capacity. The panel shall have one spare signaling line circuit or capacity for 50 additional initiating devices.

� Provide an 18”x12” red remote annunciator panel at building entrance with microphone. Refer to specification for details; mount centerline at 60” AFF. A remote annunciator is not needed if the main fire control panel is located at the primary fire department access entrance (preferred in small buildings).



� Use door hold-open circuits from fire alarm panel in lieu of auxiliary contacts in the detector base or a local device.

� System shall be connected to an emergency backup power source if available and have a red lockout type breaker in electrical service panel per applicable code requirements.

� Provide recessed KNOX Box at 5’ above floor line at the exterior of the main entrance. Verify location with KU Fire Marshal and city fire department.

Detection:

� Provide corridor smoke detection throughout. Provide spot detection for top of stairwells, storage rooms, communications closets, computer centers, air handler rooms and electrical closets.

� Provide heat detection in housekeeping dens (due to sink); top of elevator shafts (DFM requirement) and mechanical areas with steam or boilers (avoids false alarms).

� Provide beam detection for atriums, large areas if point detect can be reduce more than 6 point devices to 1 beam detector which makes it more economical.

� Detection devices can not be located in inaccessible or extremely high locations. They need to be serviced so the designer must coordinate location with Architect and KU.

� Concealed initiating devices (duct smoke detectors, plenum or under-floor detectors, etc.) shall have remote alarm indicators identifying the location of the device. Locate remote indicators adjacent to the device (at a finished ceiling or wall 60” AFF). Duct smoke detectors shall have remote indicators with test stations. They may be grouped only if they are within reasonable proximity to each other.

� Indicate on drawings all network connections and monitoring points for other systems.

� All addressable devices shall receive visible address labels with large lettering on base.

Visual Alarms

� Wall strobe devices need to be specified at 82” above finished floor. Ceiling strobes are NOT approved for use by the State at this time. Expected change- July 1, 2010.

� AV devices (Audible/visual) should NOT be located in the middle of feature walls due to conflicts with marker boards, furniture, equipment, displays and artwork. If possible, considering required strobe coverage, locate devices just above light switch adjacent to the primary access door.

� Provide a weatherproof exterior strobe with NO speaker mounted above the sprinkler system fire department's Siamese connection 8’ to 10’ above grade.

� Signaling line circuits shall NOT be loaded greater than 75 percent of capacity. The panel shall have one spare signaling line circuit or capacity for 50 additional initiating devices.

� Strobes shall be located and spaced in large public areas independently when ceiling speakers are utilized.

Audible Alarms

� Systems shall include exterior fire alarm speakers (red) at key entrances set at 2 watts and exterior EPAS speakers (gray) at 8 to 15 watts. EPAS speakers are connected independently, programmed to activate only when emergency enouncements are initiated from the main panel or PSO. Fire alarm messages do not use these speakers.



� Speakers located in corridors, usually suspended ceilings, shall be ceiling mounted “Atlas Soundolier” speakers with labels stating “FIRE” on the face of the speaker. Labels will be provided by KU. Design for 2 watts for most spaces, 5 watts for large lobbies.

� High noise mechanical rooms shall have Cooper Wheelock horn speakers set at 4 watts.

� Service areas, rest rooms, medium size rooms, conference rooms, classrooms and Labs shall have standard 4” wall mounted speaker/strobe units locate if possible above wall switch adjacent to entrance door. Provide second wall AV if coverage is required. Verify with Architectural layout of lab equipment and hoods to maintain strobe visibility.

� Note that speakers shall be tapped at 2 watts unless otherwise noted; indicate ½ or 1 watt at locations that do not require as much sound.

� Speakers shall be located and spaced in large public areas independently of strobes.

� In voice systems provide a microphone at fire alarm main panel and at the remote enunciator if utilized.

� DO NOT LOCATE SPEAKERS NEAR PANELS WITH MICROPHONES- (feed-back)

All fire alarm systems are monitored using (5) “IMS” graphic based computers located on West Campus at Public Safety, Housing and Facilities Operations. It is critical that the designer include current and correct building names and numbers, floor designations, and room, corridor, stairway and elevator numbering on all documents that illustrate the fire alarm system design so that the programming can be accurate. SimplexGrinnell shall submit graphic plans to PSO for approval of the graphics before installation of the system on the network.

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

The designer should include the following minimum information in project construction documents:

� Indicate fire alarm control panel and annunciator locations on code footprint and plans

� Utilize standard SimplexGrinnell graphic symbols throughout plans- see appendix A13.3

� Utilize and adapt the KU standard specifications for fire alarm systems- see appendix A13.2

� Only utilize types of device listed in the KU standard specifications. Additional devices can be used only upon permission of the University Fire Marshal. Submit requests at DD

� Locate all door holds, duct detectors, elevator interface points, hood suppression points, dry chemical interface, Sapphire Suppression and sprinkler monitoring devices

DESIGN AND PLAN REVIEWS

The designer should submit preliminary and final plans for review as follows:

� Submit preliminary layout to KU Fire Marshal through the DCM project manager at the completion of DD. Layout can be of the complete system or partial system to verify that the design methods follow the design standards herein.



� Submit a complete and final layout at the 50% CD submittal for detailed review to the KU Fire Marshal through the DCM project manager as above. It is important to pick up all comments accurately. Devices missing or wrong will result in costly changes later.

� Submit FINAL check set electronically one week before final submittal to the Architect for the final bid set. An electronic review will be processed to verify items were picked up.

� A final complete contract document review is required to be sent to DFM at time of printing and bidding. Their review of the fire alarm system is general at this stage.

� SHOP DRAWINGS submittal from the contractor during construction shall be reviewed by the Engineer of Record and if possible “approved as noted” to save a re-submittal delay. One shop drawing with the Engineers review stamp shall be sent to the University Fire Marshal for quick review and forwarding to DFM for the formal AHJ review and approval. VERY IMPORTANT-

� Work can not be done on the system until the DFM review is completed and approval is received so it is critical to complete the process in a timely manner.

� Submittal must include a REQUEST FOR REVIEW form available at the DFM website. DFM will respond with comments or approval only to the Engineer of Record and Agency Contact (Bob Rombach). The Engineer must monitor this process and respond to comments quickly. If comments are not received in 2 weeks the Engineer must request from both DFM and KU a status update to verify if they submittal is hung up. Copy Bob Rombach ([email protected]) and the DCM PM on all communications.

PRE-TESTING PROTOCOL

� Pre-testing: Upon completing installation pre-test all devices, device address, device labels and functional programming before acceptance tests are scheduled.

� Contractor shall NOT install smoke detector heads in spaces that are not clean. If they get dirty they will be replaced at the contractor expense.

� Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds.

� Voice system audibility and dB level shall be tested and documented. Provide results on 11x17 floor plan sheets for final acceptance test.

Final Test Notice: Provide an 8 day minimum notice to DCM, DFM and FO in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

FORMAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING

� Fire alarm system shall be ready for use, completely operational, and accepted by the KU Fire Marshal and DFM Inspector at least 10 days before the date of Substantial Completion of each part of the work, and before a certificate of occupancy can be issued by the AHJ.

� Final test and inspection shall be held in the presence of:

� Manufacturer's authorized technical representative.

� AHJ inspector (DFM)

� University Representative (usually KU Fire Marshal at [email protected])



� Contractor and/or fire alarm sub contractor

� Design Engineer

� Facility representative- FO Instrumentation or Housing Maintenance

Formal system acceptance shall be in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, the manufacturer's recommendations, and the University's direction. Refer to Fire Alarm testing form available at http://www.ufma.ku.edu/files/UFMA_FireAlarm_test.pdf for an outline of testing procedure. The formal system acceptance test shall include the following and be conducted in the order listed below:

Step 1. 24 hour backup power test- System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of 24 hours. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for 15 minutes (5 minutes for Horn systems). During the 15 minutes all sound and visual devices are checked for proper operation.

Step 2. Battery verification test- Before returning to normal power verify battery power.

Step 3. Sound and visual device test- Return to normal power and continue device verification throughout project; Verify strobe operation and synchronization; Verify sound level pre-testing and speaker operation; Verify that EPAS speakers are NOT operating under fire alarm conditions; Verify that labels are in place; Verify conduit is correct and document needed changes if any. Sound in all areas shall be 15 dB over ambient with ambient being approximately 50 db in normal office or classroom environments.

Step 4. Sprinkler device test- Check all device locations, proper access, visible labeling and proper operation. Verify activation of each tamper switch and test flow switch timing which should be between 25 and 45 seconds.

Step 5. Elevator recall and shaft devices test- With elevator service tech, test top of shaft heat detector, pit devices, each floor recall detection and primary and secondary floor operation.

Step 6. Duct detection operational test- Verify each duct detector operation; mechanical unit shutdown; sensing tube orientation; labeling and remote test switch installation.

Step 7. Device walk test- With system reset and in audible walk test, verify individual device operation, label and digital address. Utilize smoke for smoke detector test, magnets will not be allowed. If testing is done during building operational hours provide voice activated communication device at the main panel to here call outs.

Step 8. Ground fault, short and open circuit test- For each circuit or zone create a ground fault, short and open circuit by opening up a device and creating each condition. System should report problem in walk test.

Step 9. EPAS (Emergency Public Address System) test- Verify operation of all exterior EPAS speakers from main panel or remote enunciator. Call Public Safety dispatch and request message be sent from dispatch to verify network connectivity.

Step 10. Knox Box alarm test- Open and or close Knox box to verify supervisory alarm function. Do not do this test in walk test. Verify reset function.

Step 11. Network test- SimplexGrinnell shall verify and certify that all devices are graphically monitored at PSO through the IMS stations.



� In the event the system fails to perform as specified the AHJ Inspector, University Representative or the Design Engineer, can and should terminate the test. The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies and request a re-test.

� All approved project submittals, drawings, specifications, certifications, test results, and current as-built/record drawings shall be available at test location.

WRITTEN CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS

The following written certifications and/or test reports shall be submitted by the installation contractor before final and formal acceptance:

� Written certification and test results confirming the system is free of ground faults, short circuits, and the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground as per manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72.

� Written certification and test results of the complete system checkout procedure as per manufacturer's published installation recommendations and NFPA 72. This shall include:

� A complete list of equipment installation and wiring.

� Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functioning, and conforms with the Specifications.

� Technician’s name, certification number, and data.

As-Built Submittals: After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, the following submittals shall be processed:

Electrical Sub-contractor- shall submit to the Contractor, SimplexGrinnell and the Engineer.

� "As-built” record drawings showing all changes of system devices, end of line devices and conduit / wiring layouts on both the Contract documents and Shop Drawings.

� Sound reading in dB for every room updated from pre-test information.

� Detailed catalog data on all installed system components- Operating & Maintenance manual.

� Copy of the test report.

The Design Engineer - shall submit an As-Built of the Contract Documents to DCM-PM & DFM

SimplexGrinnell - shall submit to KU Fire Marshal “As-Built” record documents of the SHOP Drawings as follows:

� Paper copies- 2 sets of full size plans, 2 project manuals, 2 half size plans.

� Electronic plans in AutoCAD and PDF formats sent to the DCM FTP site.

End of Document : G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_2009_Div-13_A1_FA01.doc

STATE# A - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 281111- 1 PPMR # University of Kansas Master Specification KU Building #

SECTION 281111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and material as herein specified.

B. The University has entered into an agreement with SimplexGrinnell, Topeka, Kansas office to be the sole provider of all network-based fire alarm devices on campus. This agreement is in the form of a State of Kansas Division of Purchases Procurement Contract, No. 87082. SimplexGrinnell shall provide a turnkey fire alarm system including the installation electrical subcontractor work in their bid and is responsible for providing all proprietary fire alarm system components under the pricing terms referenced in that contract. The SimplexGrinnell electrical sub-contractor is responsible for providing non-proprietary components of the Fire Alarm System, such as conduit, cabling, raceways, and junction boxes in accordance with provisions of this specification section to SimplexGrinnell as the installing contractor. SimplexGrinnell shall include installation of this system in accordance with the provisions of this specification to the General Contractor, using a qualified electrical sub contractor competitively bid by SimplexGrinnell.

C. This section requires SimplexGrinnell to furnish all materials required to provide a first class operating fire alarm system. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing, testing, and start-up of a complete functioning fire alarm system, and each element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred, including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's function as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, supplies, equipment, transportation and utilities. Installation of devices shall be performed or supervised by a National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologies (NICET) Level 3 or higher Fire Alarm Technician. Submit copies of the certification for employees through shop drawing submittals.

D. All fire alarm system components shall include addressable field devices, and multiplexed, programmable, operator interface panels.

E. The scope of work in this section includes: 1. Fire alarm control panels. 2. Remote annunciator panels. 3. Miniplex transponder panels. 4. Manual fire alarm pull stations. 5. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. 6. Fire alarm notification appliances. 7. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. 8. Activation and powering of combination fire and smoke dampers. 9. Sprinkler system waterflow and valve tamper alarms. 10. Air handling unit shutdown. 11. Door holder release. 12. Elevator recall. 13. Battery stand-by power. 14. Area of Refuge communications 15. Knox Box key security system procurement and installation 16. EPAS – Emergency Public Address System; local system integration, dedicated speakers,

programming, fire alarm interface and off site connection to campus wide network.


17. Campus wide monitoring network; Local system integration, programming, updating graphics, and connection.

F. Where coordination and interfacing with other systems or equipment is required, it shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm system installer (contractor) to either provide the relays, contacts, power supplies and other necessary hardware or see to it that such hardware is provided with the other systems or equipment.

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The contractor shall coordinate work in this section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment provided in other sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Sprinkler waterflow and valve tamper switches shall be provided by the fire sprinkler

installer, but wired and connected by the fire alarm installer. 2. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected by the fire alarm system

installer. The HVAC installer shall furnish necessary duct opening to install the duct smoke detector’s housing.

3. Air handling fan control circuits and contacts to be furnished by the HVAC control equipment.

4. Conduit shall be by Division 26 “Common Work Results for Electrical”.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The fire alarm shall meet the codes and standards cited below and applicable local building and fire codes. All fire alarm equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) approved for the type and class of service performed. 1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, 2002 Edition 2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code, 2002 Edition 3. UL 864 – Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 4. ULOJZ – Control Unit Systems 5. UL 268 – Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 6. UL 268A – Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications 7. UL 521 – Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 8. UL 464 – Audible Signal Appliances 9. UL 38 – Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems 10. UL 346 – Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 11. UL 1971 – Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired 12. UL 1480 – Speakers for Fire Protection Signaling Systems 13. UL 1481 – Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 14. UL 1711 – Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 15. NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 1999 Edition 16. IBC 2006 Edition with State of Kansas amendments. 17. IFC 2006 Edition with State of Kansas amendments. 18. 28 CFR Part 36 – Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 1998 Edition 19. ASME A17.1 – Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, 2000 Edition

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This system shall be a continuation of the University of Kansas Life Safety Monitoring Network and Emergency Public Address System (EPAS). The contractor shall provide and install Corning wall mount cabinet WCH-02P within the telecommunications closet. The contractor shall provide


an install Corning module CCH-CP06-15T within the wall mount cabinet. The Contractor shall provide a 1” conduit from the telecommunications closet to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FCP) location for network fiber and copper cabling. KU I.T. shall provide and install multi-mode fiber jumpers between the fiber feeder and the Corning CCH-CP06-15T module(s). Contractor shall provide and install Corning 6-strand, riser rated, multi-mode fiber cable item Corning MIC (6MM/riser 006K88-33150-29 between the CCH-CP06-15T module to the FCP. Contractor shall provide and install Copper UTP item: Berk-Tek 10032058 LANmark-350 Plenum UTP Cable with yellow jacket from telecommunications closet to FCP location for Emergency Public Address System (EPAS) network connections. Contractor shall leave enough cable slack to enter both the fiber and copper wall mounted junction boxes. Within the FCP, contractor shall provide and install an Ortronics brand double-gang surface box item OR-40300186 and for securing this box within the FCP, the contractor shall provide and install and adhesive 2-gang magnet item: (Anixter # 152915). KU I.T. will provide and install the Series II faceplate/fiber and copper connectivity jacks and related jumpers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference specification section 260010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for

general shop drawing submittal requirements. Also comply with the submittal

requirements stated in this specification section. Submittals not complying fully with the

submittal requirements of section 260010 and this section will be rejected.

B. Submit a Description of Operation that explains in detail the specific methods the submitted fire alarm system functions. Pre-printed, generic material will not be accepted and will be rejected.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. The fire alarm system equipment vendor, SimplexGrinnell, shall provide shop drawings

showing fire alarm floor plans and a riser diagram showing all new and existing fire alarm devices. Fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall show fire alarm control panel, annunciator, all fire alarm initiating devices and notification appliances. Show typical wiring diagrams of control panel/s, annunciator and each device and wiring connections required. Show all interfaces to other systems, such as temperature control systems, and security systems.

2. The fire alarm floor plans shall be drawn at the same scale as the contract drawings or 1/8” = 1’-0”, whichever is larger and shall have room numbers and names indicated.

3. The fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall show wiring to all fire alarm devices/appliances, indicating wire sizes and quantities as well as conduit/raceway sizes and locations of end-of-line (EOL) resistors. The fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall clearly show the routing of all fire alarm system wiring, including all horizontal routing and vertical routing (in chases). Routing of all fire alarm wiring shall comply with the “Survivability” requirements of NFPA 72.

4. The fire alarm floor plans shall also contain a Bill of Materials and a Sequence of Operations Matrix that explains how the submitted fire alarm system functions.

D. Product Data: Provide product cutsheets showing material specifications, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

E. Record Drawings

1. The fire shop drawings and all information contained therein shall be utilized as the basis for the “As Built” Record Drawings.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing detailed as-built field changes

recorded on a set of drawings to the Architect / Engineer AND the fire alarm

equipment vendor for inclusion in each of their respective “AS BUILT” Record

Drawings.

3. The “AS BUILT” Record Drawings shall show actual locations of initiating devices,


notification appliances, and end-of-line devices. Show the approximate location, size and type of all wiring and routing of wiring. Drawings shall include one-line riser diagrams, typical wiring diagrams, internal panel wiring diagrams and sequence of operations. Labeling convention shall match field labeling. Drawings shall include sound level test results in dB in each room and or areas. Sound readings can be used from fire testing modified to include any final speaker changes made during acceptance testing.

4. Record shop drawings shall be CADD produced in AutoCAD 2000 or greater and provided to the owner (Design and Construction Management- Attention Bob Rombach) in dwg and PDF electronic form along with paper copies (2)11X17 and (2) full size.

5. Electronic data files shall be retrievable in AutoCad via "DWG" and "DXF" format as furnished by the contractor and proven retrievable.

F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals (Preliminary and Final)

1. The O&M Manuals shall be provided in labeled 3-ring binder with cover, binding label, tabbed fly sheets and plastic insert folders for the Record A/E Drawings and system program disks. Omit plastic insert folders for preliminary submittal. Include the following sections with the appropriate information for each section: a. Typewritten Index. b. Qualifications. Provide Manufacturer, Installer and Fire Alarm Technician qualification. c. Bill of Materials. Provide complete nomenclature, part number and vendor information

for all parts, including all modular components. d. Basic Operations Cheat Sheet. To be duplicated and posted under laminate glass

adjacent to Fire Alarm Control Panel. e. Operating Instructions. Complete instructions detailing operation and maintenance of

all equipment involved including installation, operating, maintenance and programming.

f. Product Data: Provide product cutsheets showing material specifications, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate within the submittal all applicable UL listings and all applicable approvals or certifications. Delete or otherwise clearly designate all manufacturers' data with which the installation is not concerned.

g. Guarantee. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. h. Battery and Voltage Drop Calculations: Provide calculations for battery capacity for

both alarm/supervisory modes and current drain/load consumption of all circuits while in alarm condition. Provide complete calculations for voltage drop on all notification appliance circuits and verify the system will provide the proper voltage to supply the notification appliances.

i. Testing Report/Address Description List: Provide in hardcopy and Excel Version 2000 format a complete spreadsheet indicating the proposed address labels and address descriptions for all proposed system addresses as they will be shown on the fire alarm control panel and the network annunciator(s). This shall include all addresses and device labels. The spreadsheet shall also include a pass/fail notation column and a notes column for each item to be tested as required by NFPA 72 and these specifications.

j. Testing Forms. Completed forms, including NFPA 72 "Record of Completion" form. Submit sample forms with preliminary submittal.

k. Program Hardcopy. Final System Programming Printout. l. Contact list with minimum three service representative phone and pager numbers.

G. NICET certification information referred to in Section 1.1.C of this section.

H. Indicate within the submittal all applicable UL listings and all applicable approvals or certifications.

I. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: SimplexGrinnell, Atlas/Soundolier, Wheelock

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with voice addressable fire alarm systems. Shall be bondable and licensed Contractor and employ full-time factory-trained and certified installers and technicians. Installers shall provide with the fire alarm submittal proof of factory training or experience for each installer. Contractor shall list their assigned Project Foreman with their bid. Pre-Approved Contractors: 1. Torgeson Electric 2. Davin Electric 3. Current Electric 4. DL Smith Electric 5. McElroy Electric 6. Oliver Electric 7. Lynn Electric 8. Wyre, Inc. Electric 9. Huxtable Electric 10. Ace Electric 11. Heartland Electric 12. Schmidtlein Electric 13. Shelley Electric 14. SKC Electric 15. Capital Electric 16. Bart’s Electric 17. Wachter Electric 18. Contractors not listed that meet the above listed qualifications may provide qualifications for

approval to the General Contractor. Approval must be processed and documented before final addenda is issued before project is bid.

C. Final checkout and verification: Shall be conducted by a technician certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) registered as level 3 or higher in the fire protection technology certification program. Provide certification information with fire alarm submittal.

D. The equipment manufacturer's service department shall be fully stocked in standard parts and components and engaged in the maintenance of fire alarm systems. On-the-premises service shall be available within 4 hours of notification, 7 days a week, 24 hours a day.

1.7 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system including wiring and raceways for one year from date of substantial completion.

B. All components, system software, parts and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for the one-year period stated above.

C. Labor (including travel expenses) to trouble-shoot, repair, reprogram, or replace components shall be furnished by this contractor at no charge during the warranty period.

D. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10% of the total or a minimum of three (3) manual pull stations.

B. Provide 10% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each type of automatic smoke detector.

C. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of one (1) of each type of automatic heat detector.

D. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each strobe type and candela rating.

E. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each speaker type. Combination speaker/strobe units matching the units installed are acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. All equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Listed for the type and class of service performed.

B. Accessory and ancillary components, as required, shall be certified or cataloged by the manufacturer and listed to operate with the system.

C. All similar equipment shall be of a single manufacturer. Products furnished shall be new. The manufacturer shall be able to refer to similar installations rendering satisfactory service.

D. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by SimplexGrinnell, Atlas/Soundolier and Wheelock as indicated on the Drawings.

2.3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

A. FACP - The Fire Alarm System Control panel shall be a SimplexGrinnell model 4100U.

B. FAAP - Remote Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator(s) where shown on the plans, including audible and visible indication of fire alarm by address, audible and visible indication of system trouble and supervisory. Install in flush mounted enclosure (6 gang rough in @ 60” centerline AFF).

C. FAAPM – Remote Enunciator with Microphone: provide supervised remote annunciator (FAAP) and remote microphone, hand held push to talk, noise cancelling mounted to right of FAAP with 5 feet coiled cable and L.E.D. to indicate the push to talk has been activated. Program 1

st soft key

on FAAP for all speaker activation and label as such. Provide all mounted in spaceage XL8 enclosure, 18x24, clear front panel, flush mounted or semi flush mounted with trim kit. Paint inside of cabinet red to match exterior. Provide Simplex “B” key to lock cabinet. Customize front clear panel with access hole to reach 1

st 3 fire alarm acknowledge keys. Height of cabinet shall

be 60” to the center line of cabinet above finished floor (AFF).


D. 4100U MINIPLEX Transponder. The System shall be shall be UL listed under Standards 864 (Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems). Modular construction with a surface mounted enclosure

E. Power supply: Provide two separate and reliable power supplies. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit of the building’s electrical system. Each shall have adequate capacity for the system. The fire alarm contractor shall submit battery calculations for review and approval. The calculations shall indicate each device and the load required in stand-by and alarm mode. The secondary power system shall be a battery-operated emergency power supply and charger with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 15 minutes.

F. System Supervision: Automatically detects and reports open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification appliance circuits. Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals shall via an existing fiber network to the Campus 911 Center.

G. Initiating Device Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Initiating device circuits shall be the same class and style as the existing fire alarm system.

H. Notification Appliance Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Notification appliance circuits shall be the same class and style as the existing fire alarm system.

I. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Signaling line circuits shall be the same class and style as the existing fire alarm system.

J. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts to provide accessory functions specified.

K. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE switch.

L. Control Panel: The control panel and remote annunciator panel shall have dedicated alarm, supervisory and trouble LED’s and dedicated alarm, supervisory and trouble acknowledge switches.

M. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes each LED to function at fire alarm control panel.

N. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode operation as described above.

O. Addressable systems shall have Silent Walk Test, History logging for a minimum of 400 events, 80 character LCD display.

P. Smoke Control System: (Remove this section if not applicable to this project. Customize

operating perimeters if needed).The smoke control system shall be by mechanical means. Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor and provide the necessary conduit and wiring. Automatic start shall occur upon alarm condition at fire alarm control panel.

Q. Voice Communication: The system shall incorporate one-way voice communication via specified speakers. Separate home run and circuit required for speakers dedicated for EPAS operation only. A central audible module shall provide for the necessary alarm message/tone generation,


main and remote microphone connections and mixers/pre-amplifier circuits. Continuous supervision shall be provided along with specific information as to the type of failure (main microphone trouble, tone trouble, etc.) The following functions shall be provided at the fire alarm control panel. 1. Hand held push to talk, noise canceling microphone in recessed protective panel mounted

enclosure; 5 feet coiled cable; and LED to indicate the microphone push to talk has been pressed.

2. Audible control switch module: Switches shall include “all circuits”, “aux tone 1”, “aux tone 2”, “tone stop switch”, “audible trouble reset”; and these switches shall be supervised.

3. Audible power amplifiers shall be self filtered; contain 24 volt power supply, transformer and amplifier monitor circuits; provide 25 volt RMS output with frequency response of 120 HZ to

12,000 HZ. Amplifier shall operate all system speakers plus thirty-five (35) percent

spare capacity. Additional amplifiers shall be added to existing notification lines to reach the required thirty-five (35) percent spare capacity.

4. Audible supervision for open, short, or ground fault shall be provided with a distinct and individual trouble indication for each fault.

5. Digitized voice messages are required to notify building occupants during alarm conditions. Message player shall not rely on tape or mechanical means of transmitting the voice message. A KU standard evacuation message shall be provided; however, the system shall be capable of transmitting a custom message of up to five (5) minutes long.

6. Alarm sequence shall consist of a temporal (3) alarm tone for a maximum of 15 seconds followed by an automatic pre-selected message. At the end of the message the tone shall resume. This sequence shall continue until the fire alarm control panel has been silenced. Manual voice paging shall be available via panel switches to page individual floors or groups of floors. Each floor shall be an individual audible zone and have a corresponding audible switch. EPAS speakers on exterior shall be on a dedicated zone for programming purposes. Exterior EPAS speakers shall not be on during a normal fire alarm.

2.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at new and existing remote annunciator panels. 3. Trouble signal transmitted via an existing fiber network to the Campus 911 Center. 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm;

visible alarm is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared.

B. Supervisory Sequence of Operation: The activation of any sprinkler valve tamper switch or duct-mounted smoke detector places system in supervisory mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at new and existing remote

annunciator panels. 3. Supervisory signal transmitted via an existing fiber network to the Campus 911 Center. 4. Duct-mounted smoke detectors shall shutdown their respective unit upon detection of

smoke and remain down until manually reset. They do not set off general alarm. 5. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator panel

silences audible supervisory alarm; visible alarm is displayed until device is returned to its normal position/supervisory condition is cleared.

C. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of an alarm initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations. 1. Audible notification appliances shall sound until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the

control panel.


2. All visible alarm notification appliances shall display a continuous synchronized pattern until reset by the Alarm Reset Switch.

3. Alarm signal transmitted via an existing fiber network to the Campus 911 Center. 4. All air-handling systems that are monitored shall shutdown and remain down until the fire

alarm control panel is reset. 5. The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and remote annunciator panel until the

alarm has been acknowledged at the control panel/remote annunciator panel. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on and the custom label for the address in alarm shall be displayed on the alphanumeric LCD readout. A subsequent alarm received from another address after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel showing the new alarm information.

6. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until acknowledged.

D. Activation of an Elevator Lobby or Elevator Machine Room smoke or heat detector shall place the system in alarm mode and shall initiate Phase I elevator recall per ASME A17.1. Provide output signals and logic as required by code and by the elevator system supplier and installer.

2.5 REMOTE POWER SUPPLY.

A. RPS shall be a 24 VDC power supply used to power Notification Appliances and field devices that require regulated 24VDC power. The power supply shall also include and charge backup batteries.

B. Each addressable RPS shall provide up to a minimum of 6.0 amps of 24 volt DC regulated power for Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power or 5 amps of 24 volt DC general power. The power supply shall have an additional .5 amp of 24 VDC auxiliary power for use within the same cabinet as the power supply. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 - 25.0 amp hour batteries.

C. The addressable power supply shall provide four individually addressable Notification Appliance Circuits that may be configured as two Class "A" and two Class "B" or four Class "B" only circuits. All circuits shall be power-limited per UL 864 requirements.

D. The addressable power supply shall provide built-in synchronization for certain Notification Appliances on each circuit without the need for additional synchronization modules. The power supply's output circuits shall be individually selected for synchronization. A single addressable power supply shall be capable of supporting both synchronized and non-synchronized Notification Appliances at the same time.

E. The RPS shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC power loss, power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground fault detection. In the event of a trouble condition, the addressable power supply shall report the incident and the applicable address to the FACP via the SLC.

F. RPS’s shall mount in a dedicated backbox.

G. Protected Equipment Smoke Detection: A system smoke detector shall be located in the area of the RPS. These smoke detectors are not shown on the plans and are a responsibility of the contractor.

H. The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other power supplies of the same type. The required wiring to interface multiple addressable power supplies shall be a single unshielded, twisted pair wire.


2.6 INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Station: UL 38 listed double-action, fully addressable manual pull station. Finished in red with molded, raised letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Break glass panel and concealed glass rod style shall not be provided. Reset shall be by key. Semi-flush mount on recessed outlet box. Device shall be labeled in ¼” letters with their address on the outside of the base of the device. Device shall be provided regardless if building is fully sprinklered.

B. Smoke Detector: UL 268 listed operating at 24 V dc nominal. Device shall of the plug-in type and shall be provided with an integral LED to indicate power-on status and if detector has activated. Detectors shall be self-restoring and shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Detectors shall be labeled in ¼” letters with their address on the outside of the base of the device. 1. Photoelectric detectors shall utilize LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell

receiver. Detector shall have sensitivity between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

C. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detector: UL 268A listed operating at 24 V dc nominal. Device shall of the plug-in type and shall be provided with an integral LED to indicate power-on status and if detector has activated. Detectors shall be self-restoring and shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Detectors shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard duct-mounted housing to protect the measuring chamber from damage, dust and insects. Label address of device on the outside of the housing. 1. Photoelectric detectors shall utilize LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell

receiver. Detector shall have sensitivity between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

2. Detectors shall be listed for use for variations in air duct velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per second.

3. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applicable.

4. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 5. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector. The

enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

D. Heat Detector: UL 521 listed operating at 24 V dc nominal. Device shall be of the plug-in type and shall be provided with an integral LED to indicate power-on status if detector has activated and labeled on base. 1. Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or rate-of-rise of

temperature that exceeds 15 deg F per minute, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired complete and ready for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer. Switch shall have an adjustable delay to minimize false alarms due to fluctuations in water pressure. Switches shall be accessible and labeled to be seen from an occupied space.

F. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired complete and ready for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer. Both valves and fire alarm components shall be accessible and labeled to be seen in a normally occupied location.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Alarm Speakers- wall application: Speaker shall be UL 1480 listed; high quality tone and voice reproduction; capacitor connected for connection to supervised notification appliance circuit;


semi-flush mounting; four inch cone; high impact, flame retardant PC/ABS thermoplastic; 25 or 70 VRMS; multi-tapped output power rated ¼ to 2 watts and produce 79 to 88 dB at 10 feet. Speakers shall be set at 2 watts unless otherwise noted on plans.

B. Alarm Audible/Visible Combination wall (speaker/Strobes): Combination units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm, audible and visible alarm appliances and be UL listed for its purpose. Capacitor connected for connection to supervised notification appliance circuit; semi-flush mounting; four inch cone; high impact, flame retardant PC/ABS thermoplastic; 25 or 70 VRMS; multi-tapped output power rated ¼ to 2 watts and produce 79 to 88 dB at 10 feet. TrueAlert model 4906 – 9151 Red set at 2 watts unless otherwise noted for color and wattage.

C. Atlas/Soundolier Speakers- exterior/interior (Wall Mount): Provide voice control loudspeaker,

model number VT-157UCR (Red for Fire Alarm function set at 2 watts) VT-157UCN (Gray for EPAS (Emergency Public Address System) function set at 8 watts unless otherwise indicated). Model shall be a double re-entrant type with 15 watts RMS audible power rating compression driver producing a UL-rated sound pressure level of 102 dB measured at 15 watts at 10 feet, within a frequency range of 400 Hz to 4 kHz. Unit shall be finished in red baked epoxy for fire alarm function and Gray epoxy for EPAS function. When noted, mounting can be in TWIN configuration with TVTA-R (RED) or TVTA-N (GRAY) housing two speakers 180 degrees apart.

D. Atlas/Soundolier Speakers (Ceiling Mounted)- public areas and corridors in finished ceilings: Atlas/Soundolier #UHT, UL listed to Standard 1480, 8-inch cone, multi-tapped design with output power of 1/2, 1, 2, 5 watt and 10 watt power rating with either 25 or 70.7 VRMS input. Semi-flush ceiling mounted; #U51-8 standard round grille with #U95-8 enclosure (required for UL listing). Speaker output shall exceed 80 dBa at 10 feet and not exceed 120 dBa at the minimum hearing distance from the device. The speakers shall have multiple taps and shall utilize the 2-watt tap unless otherwise indicated on plans. Loudspeaker assembly shall be provided with white cover and shall be labeled by the installer with Owner provided “FIRE” labels permanently applied to the speaker cover.

E. Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (Strobes): Strobes shall be xenon or equivalent, unfiltered or clear filtered white light, a minimum intensity of 15/75 candela and as indicated on drawings, flash rate range from 1 to 3 Hz, a maximum pulse duration of 0.2 sec with a maximum duty cycle of 40%. Strobe shall meet all requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (minimum 75 cd as tested per UL 1971). Ceiling strobes must be mounted 6” below ceiling per current state of Kansas Code interpretation.

F. Simplex Audible/Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (Speaker/Strobes): CEILING MOUNTED COMBINATION UNITS are NOT ALLOWED.

G. Audible/Visible Combination wall (speaker/Strobes): Combination units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm, audible and visible alarm appliances and be UL listed for its purpose. Capacitor connected for connection to supervised notification appliance circuit; semi-flush mounting; four inch cone; high impact, flame retardant PC/ABS thermoplastic; 25 or 70 VRMS; multi-tapped output power rated ¼ to 2 watts and produce 79 to 88 dB at 10 feet. TrueAlert model 4906 – 9151 Red set at 2 watts unless otherwise noted for color and wattage.

H. Weatherproof Exterior Strobes - above FDC (Fire Department Connection) application: Cooper Wheelock RSSWP-2475 W-FR Red, 24 VDC to be used with WPSBB-R back Box.

I. Weatherproof Horn Loudspeaker: Cooper Wheelock STH-15S- Gray for EPAS application (exterior) – set at 8 watts. STH-15SR- Red for Fire Alarm application set at 2 to 4 watts.

J. Weatherproof Strobe Speaker Assembly - Wall mount: Cooper Wheelock ET-70WP-24185W-FR. Not to be installed in same visible areas as SimplexGrinnell strobes due to inability to


synchronize. Application- wet areas, pools, shower rooms.

2.8 AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. Door Release: Magnetic door holders shall be suitable for wall or floor mounting. The electromagnet shall require no more than 3 watts to produce 25-lbf of holding force. The coil voltage shall be 120 VAC.

B. Remote Indicators: LED indicating lights. Light activates when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate.

C. Addressable Interface Device: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

D. Provide with integral relay capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

E. Control Relay Module: Provide intelligent control relay modules. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 VDC to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware.

F. Knox Box: Provide and install monitored Knox Box, 3200 Series, KD Bronze flush mount, hinged door with submaster cylinder and back box. Request order forms through DCM, attention Bob Rombach @ [email protected].

2.9 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 16 AWG or size as recommended by system manufacturer.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, colored insulation matching University approved color-code.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

D. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

E. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Division 26.

F. Signaling Line, Initiating Device and Notification Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire-protective signaling cable, solid copper conductor, 300 volts insulation, suitable for temperature, conditions and location installed. Minimum wire size for initiating device circuits, control circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be determined by calculations and manufacturer’s requirements or recommendations. Wire and cable shall be twisted and shielded if recommended by the system manufacturer. Initiating, notification, and control circuits shall be sized based on 20% additional power consuming devices. The conductors shall meet the requirements of NEC article 760.

G. The type of cable chosen should be based on fire alarm system requirements, specification requirements and applicable code requirements. Consideration should also be given to the


length of cable runs and potential interference.

H. All wiring provided on this project shall be UL listed for the intended use. All wiring including wiring to existing modified devices and appliances shall be new.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall install, program and test all new equipment identified in this contract and/or revise existing equipment as noted.

B. The installation supervisor shall be on the job site during the entire installation. The installation supervisor shall maintain marked up copies of the drawings at the job site showing as-built conditions. These drawings shall be updated daily and available for Owner review.

C. The Contractor shall provide all required conduit and all associated hardware, and shall install (pull), connect, and test all cable for a complete fire alarm system. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the guidelines of these specifications and documents as well as the NFPA codes and standards listed in these specifications.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONSULTANT TO CUSTOMIZE PER PROJECT)

A. The MINIPLEX transponder remote unit interface circuit (RUI), is required to be tied into any existing RUI circuit (consultant to customize per project).

B. The MINIPLEX transponder will require a direct connection to the fire alarm control panel for an audio riser. This circuit carries the pre-recorded voice evacuation message and live announcements being made at the fire alarm control panel.

C. Install manual station with operating handle 48 inches above floor unless noted otherwise on drawings.

D. Install ceiling mounted initiating devices in areas with exposed structure tight to underside of floor/roof deck.

E. Install ceiling mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances in areas with exposed structure to bottom of floor/roof structure or at 30 ft AFF, whichever is lower. Visual devices shall be not be closer than 6” to finished ceiling.

F. Install ceiling mounted visible and audible notification appliances in areas with finished ceilings flush with bottom of ceiling or at 30 ft AFF, whichever is lower.

G. Install wall mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances with visible element (strobe) at 82” above finished floor unless noted otherwise on drawings. Wall mounted visible devises shall not be any higher than 90” AFF or 6 inches below the ceiling whichever applies.

H. Install wall mounted audible devices with the top of the device no more than 90 inches above finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. If combination devices are installed, they shall be installed per the visible signal device requirements.

I. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. Mount


such that magnetic pad extensions are not required. If pad extension need to be used because of unusual conditions they must be fused so they do not go out of adjustment.

J. Locate smoke detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening and not directly in the air stream. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct and are supported per manufacturer’s instructions. Insure the sampling segment is correctly sized for the application per manufacturer’s instructions. Verify the sample tubes are correctly oriented in the air stream before final inspection. Leading tube with sample holes is first, exhaust tube (short tube) is last. Indicate with an arrow on duct direction of air flow.

K. Heat Detectors in Elevator Mechanical Rooms: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

L. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke and/or smoke duct detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from a normal viewing position. Locate in a public space adjacent to the device they monitor on the ceiling if the device is within the ceiling or a wall accessible from the ground without a ladder.

M. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor unless noted otherwise.

N. Remote Annunciator: Flush mount with center of display at 60 inches above the finished floor.

O. Make conduit and wiring connections to equipment provided by others.

P. Provide strobe synchronization as required per NFPA 72.

Q. Knox Box: Mount flush to exterior building wall at 60 inches AFF

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1. 2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Routing of all fire alarm wiring shall comply with the “Survivability” requirements of NFPA 72.

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."

1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

D. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

E. Minimum allowable conduit size shall be ½ inch for drops to individual devices and ¾ inch otherwise. Conduit shall be sized so that conduit fill does not exceed 75% of NFPA 70 maximum fill requirements. Cables in vertical risers shall not exceed 50% of NFPA 70 maximum fill requirements. Conduit installation shall be as required by the Contractor's layout and as described in these specifications. All conduit field routing shall be acceptable to the Owner. Routing not acceptable shall be rerouted and replaced without expense to the Owner.

F. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with


the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, and properly installed twisted wire in wire nuts or plug connectors.

G. All wire, cable, conduit and raceways shall be concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts or closets in finished areas except as specifically noted otherwise. Conduit and raceways may be exposed in unfinished areas or where specifically approved by the DFM or DCM. Exposed conduit required in finished non public areas shall be painted to match walls and finish. Exposed conduit in non-finished, non public areas shall be unfinished. Exposed raceways in public areas shall be in prefinished wire mold.

H. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, all conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to dominant surfaces with right angle turns made of symmetrical bends or fittings. Except where prevented by the location of other work, a single conduit or a conduit group shall be centered on structural members.

I. Conduit shall be located at least six inches from hot water or steam pipes, and from other hot surfaces. Conduit shall not block access to any existing equipment or fixtures.

J. All fire alarm conduits shall be prefinished red. Junction boxes covers shall be labeled and painted red as specified in Division 26. 1. Exposed conduit required in finished non public areas shall be painted to match walls and finish. 2. Exposed conduit in non-finished, non public areas shall be unfinished. 3. Exposed raceways in public areas shall be in prefinished wire mold.

K. All wiring shall be terminated at devices or panels using terminal connectors for screw type terminals. All terminal connectors for conductors shall be pre-insulated ring type or pre-insulated spade type. Pre-insulated terminal connectors shall include a vinyl sleeve, color coded to indicate conductor size. Pre-insulated terminal connectors shall include a metallic support sleeve bonded to the vinyl-insulating sleeve and designed to grip the conductor insulation. Fire alarm cabling shall be the type and color as listed below by circuit identification: 1. A- Zone Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Red 2. B- Visual/Signal Circuit; Anixter SG1202N10 / Red 3. C- Auxiliary Power Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Green 4. D- Door Holder Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Yellow 5. E- MAPNet / IDNet Power Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Green 6. K- Remote Test/LED Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Green 7. M- MAPNet / IDNet Circuit; Anixter SG1802S19 / Red 8. N- RUI/N2 Communication; Anixter SG1802S19 /Red 9. R- Relay Circuit; Anixter SG1402N10 / Yellow 10. S- Speaker Circuit; Anixter SG1802S19 / Blue 11. Au- Audio Riser Circuit; Anixter SG1802S19 / Red 12. MC- Microphone Control Circuit; Anixter SG1802S19 / Green

L. Do not load signaling line circuits greater than seventy five (75) percent capacity.

M. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit for conventional hardwired class B initiating and notification appliance circuits.

N. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads on metallic conduit shall project through the wall of the box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit. The locknuts both inside and outside shall then be tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely to the box. Conduit shall enter cabinets from the bottom and sides only. .

O. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated on the approved drawings.

C. Install identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

E. Power-supply disconnect switch shall be red, labeled "FIRE ALARM" and locking type.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FACP.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Systems shall be checked and tested in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer to insure that the system functions as required and is free of grounds, opens, and shorts. Each device shall be tested. Smoke detectors shall be tested with UL listed canned smoke aerosol. Smoke detectors shall not be installed in bases until areas are cleaned, and major construction is completed and free of dust. Orange shipping covers are NOT dust covers and will not protect smoke detectors from construction dust. Smoke detectors will need to be removed, sealed and protected or replaced if dirty.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the

form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.

Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct supervision of the Fire Alarm Technician.

3. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection before testing. Use Record Drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72. 5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of

sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.7 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Include services of factory trained and certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing as performed by the fire alarm contractor’s factory-trained technicians.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. The equipment supplier's factory trained technician shall train the Owner's personnel in the proper use and maintenance of the system. Training sessions shall be conducted as needed,


not to exceed a total of 2 sessions, with each session lasting a maximum of 4 hours each.

B. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.

3.9 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of the system installation, a factory-trained technician shall perform all necessary tests and adjustments in the presence of the Owner’s designated personnel, the contractor and the AHJ(Authority Having Jurisdiction) inspector. Test shall include the following and be conducted in the listed order.

1. 24 hour backup power test- System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of 24 hours. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for 15 minutes (5 minutes for Horn systems). During the 15 minutes all sound and visual devices are checked for proper operation.

2. Battery verification test- Before returning to normal power verify battery power.

3. Sound and visual device test- Return to normal power and continue device verification throughout project; Verify strobe operation and synchronization; Verify sound level pre-testing and speaker operation; Verify that EPAS speakers are NOT operating under fire alarm conditions; Verify that labels are in place; Verify conduit is correct and document needed changes if any. Sound in all areas shall be 15 dB over ambient with ambient being approximately 50 db in normal office or classroom environments.

4. Sprinkler device test- Check all device locations, proper access, visible labeling and proper operation. Verify activation of each tamper switch and test flow switch timing which should be between 25 and 45 seconds.

5. Elevator recall and shaft devices test- With elevator service tech, test top of shaft heat detector, pit devices, each floor recall detection and primary and secondary floor operation.

6. Duct detection operational test- Verify each duct detector operation; mechanical unit shutdown; sensing tube orientation; labeling and remote test switch installation.

7. Device walk test- With system reset and in audible walk test, verify individual device operation, label and digital address. Utilize smoke for smoke detector test, magnets will not be allowed. If testing is done during building operational hours provide voice activated communication device at the main panel to here call outs.

8. Ground fault, short and open circuit test- For each circuit or zone create a ground fault, short and open circuit by opening up a device and creating each condition. System should report problem in walk test.

9. EPAS (Emergency Public Address System) test- Verify operation of all exterior EPAS speakers from main panel or remote enunciator. Call Public Safety dispatch and request message be sent from dispatch to verify network connectivity.

10. Knox Box alarm test- Open and or close Knox box to verify supervisory alarm function. Do not do this test in walk test. Verify reset function.

11. Network test- SimplexGrinnell shall verify and certify that all devices are graphically monitored at PSO through the IMS stations.

END OF SECTION 281111

dcmbor

Text Box

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Fire Alarm Systems A A13.3 Fire Alarm Symbols Section added September 9, 2009

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Conveying Systems 14


Conveying Systems


RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section. Division 1 - General Requirements

ELEVATORS – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: Elevators will be furnished as called for in the Architectural Program and shall meet all the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

Elevator Lobbies: In situations where a full-sized, separate elevator lobby is infeasible, it has been acceptable to DOAS and the KSFMO to provide swing doors that are magnetically held-open and which close automatically upon fire alarm activation. UL-rated elevator door seals have been accepted under special circumstances, but

require the prior approval of DCM, DOAS and the KSFMO.

Existing Cabs: In buildings to be totally renovated or where elevators are to be upgraded to meet the ADAAG’s, existing elevator cabs shall be increased in size to meet the ADAAG’s, unless technically infeasible due to shaft size limitations. When technically infeasible to completely comply with the ADAAG’s for elevator cab size,

elevator cabs shall be increased in size to the largest possible size within the existing shaft limitations. The University has found that the minimum 48” x 48” interior cab size can be more

closely met when existing control panels are moved from the front wall to the side wall adjacent to the entry door, so the front wall can be moved out.

14



ELEVATORS – 14200 Elevator Warranty: The Elevator Contractor shall be required to furnish full maintenance and call-back service of the equipment for a period of twelve months, twenty-four hours a day, seven days per week, after the established Date of Substantial Completion of the elevator work. This service shall include monthly examinations of the installation by competent and

trained employees of the Contractor. It shall also include all necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning, supplies, and

parts to keep the equipment in good operation, except such parts made necessary by misuse, accidents, or negligence not caused by the Contractor. Service personnel must advise the Department of Facilities Operations of their presence

on campus prior to servicing equipment. Failure to do so is sufficient grounds for the University not to honor claims for compensation. The Elevator Contractor shall notify the Director of Facilities Operations in writing 30 days

prior to expiration of the maintenance warranty.

Submittals: The contractor shall provide a certified statement that the elevator manufacturer will provide all detailed electrical schematics for maintenance and service of equipment. Shop drawings are not to be approved until after this information is provided. All special tools normally required for programming and service shall be included. This

shall include all connection wiring diagrams as well as all circuit board diagrams including all normal voltages, component ratings, wave forms, and similar information required for full service/repair of all parts. If electronic devices are required to program the elevator’s operation, one of them shall

be provided for each project installing or renovating one or more elevators. The Director of Facilities Operations will provide a proprietary nondisclosure statement if

required by the manufacturer.

Finishes: Materials in public and freight elevators shall be designed for hard usage in terms of hours and wear-and-tear. Stainless steel cab enclosures, doors and hoistway frames are recommended for

maximum durability. Floor finishes are to be scheduled to be provided by the General Contractor, and shall

match those in adjacent lobbies. Cabs are to be scheduled to include the provision of wall studs for protective mats. Verify

with users if mats are to be provided by the elevator supplier as part of the construction work, or if they shall be a future item KU will provide as needed.

Controls: Key controls are required for access to floors or roofs of limited, non-public or restricted access. Braille shall be integrally cast into new number plates, and if retrofit to existing controls, shall be mechanically-attached or epoxied onto existing controls; double-stick tape attachments are not acceptable.



Ceilings: Removable ceilings are recommended for ease of maintenance.

Sump Pits: A sump pit shall be provided in the bottom of all passenger elevator shafts, but no lines shall drain out of it, whether onto grade or into a sewer. Instead, Designers shall indicate that a liquid limit switch shall be provided in the sump and shall be wired to alarm to a location designated by KU-FO, who will arrange to provide portable pumps to drain the sump.

Emergency Communication System: Provide hands-free audio and visual 2-way emergency communication between each car and the KU 24-hour monitoring service. System shall automatically dial pre-programmed number of KU's monitoring service and identify elevator location to monitoring service. System is to be contained in flush-mounted cabinet complete with identification and instructions for use. Elevator Emergency Phone: (Furnished and installed by Contractor) Model VRT-1000-

COP flush-mount, vandal-resistant unit with visual signal, as manufactured by Lincoln Land Enterprises, (708) 371-2477, Fax (708) 371-2449. Provide unit with voice box (VR-44) to communicate with monitoring service. No substitutions are acceptable. For new installations or when front panels are replaced, units shall be flush and integral with the elevator panel. Work by KU-NTS: NTS shall provide a data outlet in the elevator equipment room, using

the blank conduit and boxes provided by the GC. NTS will note on this outlet the telephone numbers of the elevator phone and of the monitoring service, to be used in programming the phone. NTS will provide a section of telephone cable for the Elevator Contractor to connect to the elevator control panel. Work by Contractor: Designers shall show on the construction documents a 1" conduit

with a single-gang box at one end, extending from the closest available NTS closet to the elevator equipment room adjacent to the elevator control panel, for provision by the General Contractor. The Elevator Contractor shall connect the NTS-furnished telephone cable to the elevator telephone via the elevator control panel and plug this cable into the NTS data outlet. The Elevator Contractor shall then program the elevator telephone and test it's operation, in the presence of KU-DCM reps, until it has been verified as operational. Refer to Appendix A14.1 - Elevator Telephones for a graphic explanation of these

requirements.

Elevator Controllers: Provide new, solid-state, variable-frequency controllers. Note: The elevator contractor must supply any and all proprietary diagnostic

programming and adjustment tools, along with complete adjusting and diagnostic information which may be necessary to adjust or correct any problem within the solid-state system. These diagnostic programming and adjustment tools and information must be non-expiring and upgrades for these diagnostic tools are to be included in Elevator Contractor's proposal.



Construction Use: Contractors desiring to use the elevator during the construction period shall make satisfactory arrangements with the Elevator Contractor, who shall remain responsible for its use and maintenance during the construction period. Use by contractors or suppliers shall not void or alter the warranty or guarantee

provisions for the elevator. Contractors shall arrange for extended warranties at their own expense, if necessary to reinstate the Owner’s specified warranty periods. The Office of Design and Construction Management representative on the project shall

be made aware of the details of any such arrangement. Field Tests: The Contractor shall provide a copy of the test report for weight loading as a part of the acceptance tests required by ANSI 17.1. Also include a copy of this report in the O & M manuals.

WHEELCHAIR LIFTS – 14420 General: Vertical lifts are strongly preferred in lieu of stair-glide lifts. Stair-glide lifts have been constant operating and maintenance problems for the University, rarely remained long in-service before portable batteries lost power and can be exiting problems when they reduce the required exit width.

Controls: Key Controls are recommended, with signs posted at each stop advising users where keys can be obtained for use, either at a departmental office reception area or other full-time location agreed upon by the user group during design.

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Elevator Telephones A14.1


Elevator Telephones

General: Designers shall include this diagram on the Contract Documents, to help clarify the responsible parties for various parts of these systems. Edit as necessary to identify specific room numbers and elevator numbers for the specific project.

(1) Elevator Contractor shall provide and install the telecommunications cable from the elevator cab to the elevator equipment room and modify or add a control panel that is capable of accepting this device. The Elevator Contractor shall install an NTS-provided telephone cable from the elevator control panel to the NTS-provided phone jack in the single gang box noted above.

(2) The Electrical Contractor shall install a ¾” conduit from the main NTS telecommunications panel to the elevator equipment room to near the elevator control panel. Pull boxes must be installed after every 180 degree change in direction. All bends must be sweeping bends. In the elevator equipment room, terminate conduit in a deep single gang box. At top of telecommunications panel, terminate conduit with bushing.

A14.1

NTS Telephone Panel

Elevator

Elevator Control Panel

¾” conduit to single gang box at the elevator panel by Contractor. KU-NTS shall provide all interior wiring and connections in this line. (ref. note #2)

KU-NTS will install Jack and line from telephone panel to J-box.

Elevator Contractor shall provide all communications connections to the KU-NTS demarcation at the single gang J-box. (ref. note #1)

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Electrical 16


Electrical

GENERAL



Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section. q Division 1 - General Requirements: Refer to sections regarding construction testing

and field quality control requirements.

q Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project.

q Division 2 –Sitework: Contains information about site utility systems.

q Division 15 - Mechanical: Review all sections of Division 15 for related work and systems that must be coordinated with provisions of Division 16.

q Appendix A15.3, SOP - Commissioning: For projects involving a commissioning agent as part of the project team, the Designer shall coordinate with the commissioning agent for function test procedures for equipment and systems of Division 16.

q Division 16 - Electrical Standards of Practice: The University has adopted specific electrical system construction practices that are referenced by the applicable AIA-Masterspec section and/or University Standards of Practice (SOP). The Des igner shall use the following supplemental guidelines and standards of practice in development of project construction documents, in addition to these Division 16 Standards.

q Appendix A16.1, SOP - Emergency Lighting Systems

q Appendix A16.2, SOP - Electrical Power Metering

q Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System

q Appendix A16.4, Outdoor Lighting Standards

METERING REQUIREMENTS

Electrical metering for projects that require new services to be fed from the University distribution system shall be in accordance with requirements of Appendix A16.2, Standard of Practice - Electrical Power Metering.

16



UTILITY SERVICE PROVIDER

Projects that require new services to be fed from the University distribution system shall be in accordance with requirements of Appendix A16.3, Standard of Practice - Campus Electrical Distribution System.

For projects that require the establishment of new electrical services, the Designer shall determine, by discussions with University personnel, whether the service would be from the campus distribution system or from a utility provider. The Designer will use this information to inform his editing of electrical specification sections references above.

BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS AND MATERIALS – 16050

Basic Minimum Raceway Requirements: In order to facilitate long-term cable management, wiring systems (including but not limited to DDC, fire alarm, telecommunications, security, and power) shall be installed in raceways.

Concealing new circuits: Electrical work in architecturally finished spaces shall be concealed. The Designer shall obtain University approval for design of new circuits that must be installed in surface raceway systems where concealment is not possible.

Firestopping: Identify and provide installation details for utilization of firestopping materials associated with the particular construction materials that will be encountered. Include details of firestop systems in plans and list specific UL or other approved test assembly numbers. Use removable pillows for cable tray penetration firestop.

Cathodic Protection: Cathodic protection is required for certain underground piping systems. The need for cathodic protection shall be reviewed with the university for each project.

Electrical Test Data: Specify the operational tests and test methods required for the following equipment and materials:

q Primary cable and equipment.

q Engine-generators and emergency power system.

q Auditorium sound systems

q Audio/Video systems

q Fire alarm systems

q Lightning protective systems

q Transformers



q Ground fault protective systems

q Secondary service conductors/bus duct

q Voice/Data systems

q Electrical grounding systems

GROUNDING AND BONDING – 16060

Grounding And Bonding: The building electrical ground shall be exothermically welded to the building steel in the grade beam, the piers, and the columns in at least two different sides of the building in addition to the water pipe ground and any driven rod/counterpoise systems. This applies to all new buildings and additions, and where possible, to renovated buildings. Renovated buildings are usually possible to make at least one steel connection in one location when planned in the design phases.

q Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the University campus electrical distribution system grounding grid and for details regarding required electrical design practices on the main Lawrence campus.

q Provide ground riser diagrams for power distribution and telecommunications systems in the contract documents.

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK – 16071

Prohibited Support: Lead, fiber, or wood anchors are prohibited for support of raceways or equipment.

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION – 16075

Identification: The Designer shall edit specification section 16075 to identify specific requirements for labeling and identifying electrical equipment and devices. All switching, protective devices, and metering on main distribution switchboards shall be identified with black-white-black laminated 1/8 inch thick plastic plates. Plastic plates shall be attached to the equipment with screws or rivets.

q Identification plates are required for all electrical distribution equipment from the service through branch circuit panelboards and motor control centers. Labels shall identify both the equipment designation and the source supplying the equipment.

q The Designer shall specify both numbering and wording of identification plates.

q Motor and associated equipment numbers shall be the same.

q Raceways shall be labeled where appropriate, i.e., red for fire alarm, red/green for emergency lighting, etc.



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES – 16120

Prohibited Wires and Cables: Aluminum wire is prohibited.

Prohibited Underground Conductors: To facilitate future replacement of conductors and increase conductor life, do not provide direct-buried conductor systems for underground wiring.

q Conductors shall be THHN for 8 AWG and smaller, THW or THHN for 6 AWG and larger.

q Color coding as follows; 208/120-Black, Red, Blue, White, & Green. 480/277-Brown, Orange, Yellow, Grey/White, & Green.

q MC cable is only allowed for fixture whips and must carry a grounding conductor.

UNDERCARPET CABLES – 16122

Prohibited.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES – 16124

Voltage Classifications: The Designer shall use this specification section to specify electrical cables carrying power at phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages of between 2001-volts and 35,000-volts. For projects on the main Lawrence campus, this would include any cables installed in the 12,470-volt circuits between the KPL substations and a building service entrance transformer.

q Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for additional discussion.

Appropriate Cable Assemblies: In general, medium voltage power cables will be installed on the Lawrence main campus, in either underground ductbank systems or in cable tray systems within tunnels and equipment rooms.

q Cable installed in underground ductbanks shall be specified as shielded single conductor.

q Cable installed in cable tray systems shall be specified as shielded and armored multiconductor cable. Armoring shall be specified as interlocking galvanized steel or aluminum with a PVC or PE jacket.

q The Designer shall evaluate the project-specific installation requirements and specify, and clearly designate on drawings, the use of single or multiconductor cable assemblies as appropriate for the project.

q Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for specification and installation details.



Submittals - Supplemental Text: Because of the expectations for an extended operating life for these power distribution cable systems, the University is concerned that prospective contractors possess, and be able to demonstrate, a high level of competency in the installation of the systems. The Designer shall include the following supplemental text in the specifications paragraphs related to Submittals:

Prior to scheduling any outage for purposes of completing cable splices or terminations, the contractor shall complete, in the owner’s presence, the preparation of a sample cable end suitable for installation of a splice or termination kit.

Quality Assurance - Supplemental Text: In addition to the above paragraph, the Designer shall include the following supplemental text in the specifications paragraphs related to Quality Assurance:

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. The installer shall submit, for the owner’s review, a certificate verifying factory training in the use of the specific splice and termination kits provided for the project. KU Facilities Operations personnel shall inspect and approve each installer's qualifications information before final termination work is done.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES – 16130

Limitations of Raceway Use: The Designer shall incorporate the following considerations in the construction documents.

q Nonmetallic raceways are prohibited for use inside of buildings, unless specifically permitted elsewhere in this standard. Non-metallic plugmold is allowed.

q Thinwall indenter, pressure cast, or slip-on metallic fittings are prohibited.

q Compression conduit connections shall be utilized. Set screws are not acceptable.

q Conduits shall not be considered grounding systems. All conduits shall include a separate grounding conductor.

q Use of flexible conduit shall be limited to recessed lighting fixtures, motors, and equipment. These connections shall be of minimum length and a maximum of 6’-0”.

q Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. Rigid non-metallic raceways may be used below grade, embedded in concrete, and for special service applications such as corrosive locations.

q Elbows in buried PVC conduit runs shall be PVC covered steel.

Bus Duct and Busway: Plug-in and feeder busses 225 amp and larger shall have built-in ground bus. Plug-in devices shall have an integral, built-in ground connection for attachment to bus ground.

Conduit Drainage: Where probability exists of moisture entering buried conduits, provide methods for drainage.



General Box Requirements:

q Due to possible safety hazards and maintenance problems, the use of flush mounted and surface mounted floor outlets shall be reviewed with DCM personnel.

q Surface boxes used on or in exterior building surfaces, or on the site, shall be cast type.

q Installation: Provide title rings over outlet boxes in glazed tile walls and wood paneling.

q To reduce sound transmission, wall outlet boxes shall not be installed back-to-back in partitions.

q Where boxes are installed in concrete block walls, the box mounting height shall be at the block joint.

Floor Penetration Details: Specify concrete curbs and fire barriers where duct runs pass through concrete floor slabs and fire rated walls.

WIRING DEVICES – 16140

Ratings of Convenience Receptacles and Lighting Switches: General use receptacles and light switches shall be heavy-duty, 20 amp, grounding type for general service applications. Install power receptacles with the ground pins up.

Surge Suppression Receptacles: One receptacle per office shall have surge protection and shall be equipped with both audible and light alarms. Additional requirements shall be reviewed with the Office of Design and Construction Management.

Cover Plates: All cover plates shall be stainless steel, type 302, brushed satin finish meeting Federal Specification W-P-445a, unless aesthetic requirements call for a different type of finish.

Floor Maintenance Equipment Receptacles: For corridors, large assembly areas, and other areas where floor maintenance equipment is used, locate receptacles so that a 45-foot cord will reach any part of the floor. Provide at least one duplex receptacle in each room where floor maintenance equipment is needed and receptacles are not otherwise available in accordance with the NEC.

Devices in Wet Areas: Receptacles, switches, and plates in damp or corrosive areas shall be specifically designed for use in that environment. Exterior power receptacles and interior receptacles at lavatories and service sinks shall be GFCI protected and corrosion resistant.



PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS – 16231

Provide as appropriate for each project. Review specific criteria with DCM personnel.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY – 16264


CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER – 16265

General: The Designer shall refer to Appendix A16.1, SOP - Emergency Lighting Systems for guidance regarding University preferences for design of emergency egress and exit lighting systems.

Loads Requiring Emergency Power Supplies: In general, the University provides backup electrical power supply capability for the following loads:

q Emergency egress and exit lighting

q Building sprinkler system fire pumps

q Security systems

q Selected ADA-compliant passenger elevators, where required by Code

q Communications systems equipment, computer workstations, or servers only if required to maintain operation of life safety equipment.

Emergency Power Systems: For projects involving emergency power requirements, an emergency generator shall be utilized. The preferred fuel is natural gas or dual fuel. When diesel generators are used, the fuel shall be # 2 diesel fuel and the storage quantity shall be as small as possible and still meet code and maintenance requirements. Fuel storage shall be aboveground, typically in generator base. Standby generator installations shall comply with NFPA 110.

Inverter-based Emergency Lighting Systems: Where an emergency generator installation is not cost-effective or desirable, a central battery inverter-based emergency lighting system shall be included in the projects affecting building egress pathways or assembly areas.



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – 16341

Sectionalizing Switches: Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the specification requirements for campus distribution system sectionalizing switches.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS – 16350

Building Service Entrance Transformers: Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the specification requirements for campus distribution system transformers.

Design for Non-Resistive Loads: The Designer shall specify transformers and all other components of the electrical distribution systems to be rated for the anticipated non-sinusoidal load currents of modern electrical/electronic equipment.

SWITCHGEAR – 16430 & SWITCHBOARDS – 16441

Overcurrent Protective Devices: The design engineer shall conduct short circuit and coordination studies to determine protective device ratings and requirements, and shall not assign the responsibility for this to the contractor.

Sizing of Secondary Service and Distribution (600 Volt and Below): The Designer shall specify new secondary service and distribution systems to be of adequate size to provide for load growth during the life of the building. The facility type and use shall be considered in determining capacity to be provided in excess of initial demand. Design criteria documents shall identify to the University the reserve capacity provided in the design.

Ground Fault System: A ground fault protection system, where required by Code, shall be designed to provide minimum possibility of power outage to critical building facilities. Designers, who are involved in switchgear or panelboard upgrades that serve existing feeders, shall consider a coordinated system on the feeders rather than a main service entrance type ground fault system to permit incremental settings thus providing reasonable continuity of electric service.

q Additional ground fault protection may be required at point-of-use receptacles to provide personnel protection. Exterior power outlets and interior uses at lavatories and service sinks shall be provided and shall be GFCI protected and corrosion resistant.

q Current pickup and time delay range shall be specified for all sensors. Construction documents shall state that ground fault sensors shall be set at "0" time delay and "minimum" ground current flow during construction period. When the project is turned over to the University the two settings shall be changed to values selected by the Designer.



q Specifications shall require that the Contractor test the system ground fault performance when first installed and submit a written record of the test to the University. A copy shall be included in final project data submittals. Tripping curves and characteristics shall be submitted to the University. Identify the method to be used to test ground fault protection in the field.

Power Factor Correction: The Designer shall review with the University whether any secondary voltage power factor correction is required. It may not be desired in most locations because medium voltage rated power factor correction is already in place at both main campus substations.

Design for Available Fault Current: The Designer is responsible for determining available fault current at the point of equipment installation and for specifying bracing to withstand the available short circuit current, asymmetrical, RMS at rated voltage. Values shall be specified.

Distribution Switchboards: The Designer shall include the following provisions in construction documents:

q Do not locate plumbing facilities above the vault and switchboard space.

q The phase arrangement on three-phase busses shall be "A-B-C," from left to right as viewed from the front of the switchboard.

q Specify provisions for future protective devices. Base provisions on need for possible future increases in electrical requirements. In order to increase flexibility provides spaces in lieu of spare devices.

q Include continuous ground bus, equipped with bolted pressure clamp type lugs, full length of switchboard.

q Busses shall be copper. Design shall include provisions for future extension of main bus.

PANELBOARDS – 16442

Panelboards and Cabinets: The Designer shall include the following provisions in construction documents:

q In order to accommodate future additional wiring; provide spare conduit stubs from flush panels into suspended ceiling spaces or other accessible spaces. The spare circuits and spaces available in panel shall determine the quantity.

q Each electrical panel shall be furnished with a clear, plastic covered, typed circuit schedule mounted in a metal cardholder. The schedule shall identify circuits by room number using final numbers furnished by the University. Verify room numbers with the University.

q Provide a number designation on each circuit protective device. Odd numbers shall be used in sequence down left side and even numbers in sequence down right side.



q Provide cross breaker connectors and bus for the spare circuit breakers indicated in panelboard schedules.

q Provide panelboards with a minimum of 25% additional spare single pole 20A circuit breakers for future use.

q Neutral bus shall be rated for 200%.

MOTOR CONTROLLERS – 16481


MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS – 16482

Motor Control: The Designer shall review the following for guidance regarding designs and specifications for electrical motor operation and control.

q Motor Control Centers - In areas where there are eight or more three-phase motors, a motor control center shall be provided. MCC bus work shall be braced to withstand the available short circuit current, asymmetrical, RMS at rated voltage. Values shall be specified.

q Motor Electrical Service - With the exception of portable maintenance equipment, motors over 1/3-h.p. shall be three-phase.

q Motor Starters - Starters shall be full voltage with fusible disconnect except as follows: For 20 h.p. and larger motors on 120/208 volt systems, and for 40 h.p. and larger motors on 277/480 volt systems, starters shall be autotransformer or part winding type with fusible disconnect.

q Coordinate starter type selection for use with specific motor as identified in Division 15 - Mechanical.

q Control circuit voltage shall be 120 volt. Where transformers are needed, fuses shall be employed in both primary and secondary sides.

q Where two pumps are provided, with one intended as a standby, an alternator shall be incorporated which allows the stopping and automatic switching for restart through one BACS stop/start point.

q Magnetic starters shall incorporate a minimum of two auxiliary contacts and a HAND-OFF-AUTO switch.

q A motor control center schedule shall be included on the electrical drawings.

q Electrical Interlocks: A schematic wiring diagram of circuits involved in an interlocked system shall be included in the Designer's drawings. Devices used shall be specified.

q Starters shall have fusible disconnects rather than circuit breakers or MCPs. Control circuit voltage shall be 120 volt or less. Specify push button start/stop control in lieu of hand/off/automatic control for fan motors controlled through BACS.



INTERIOR LIGHTING – 16511

Fixture Mounting Locations: Fixture locations requiring special equipment or scaffolding to aid in maintenance or relamping increase ongoing operating costs and thus require written approval from the University. Such special equipment and provisions for its storage and access must be provided as part of the project.

Lighting Criteria: The Designer shall coordinate with the University to establish and document design criteria for lighting levels during schematic design. Lighting design shall follow the recommended and accepted lighting standard levels consistent with energy conservation and visual performance.

q The number of foot-candles of illumination designed for particular functions of the building shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society Handbook in accordance with Kansas Lighting Standards.

q Furnish design calculations, either by hand or by computer output, to the Office of Design & Construction Management during the design review process to help evaluate compliance with the IES standard.

q Occupancy sensors shall be considered as a means of controlling lights and conserving energy in large rooms.

q It is presumed that fluorescent lighting will be satisfactory throughout, although there is some concern with the noise (audible & EMI) level created by such lighting. This can be reduced to a satisfactory minimum for most applications by proper electrical design. This matter shall be discussed with the Building Committee whenever the situation so dictates.

q Fluorescent lighting shall be with highest-efficiency electronic ballast’s available with a two-year or more good reliability record. Harmonics shall be less than 20% Total Harmonic Distortion.

Light Fixture Switching and Control: The Designer shall use the following guidelines in circuiting, switching, and controlling interior lighting systems.

q Three-way and four-way controls shall be provided in long corridors, gymnasiums, auditoriums, and other large spaces.

q Provide inboard/outboard switching or dimming of fluorescent fixtures in private offices, classrooms, laboratories, and conference rooms.

q Occupancy sensors shall be integrated in the control schemes of classrooms, restrooms, storerooms, and multiple occupant office areas. Use sensors with combined ultrasonic/infrared technology, provided with an integral manual over-ride switch and ambient light level sensor.

q The Designer shall review the feasibility of automatic light level control areas with prominent daylighting.

Dimming Systems Designs: For general use, provide IC dimming ballast’s with wall controller/switches.



q Where specialty systems have been stipulated in a project program, a comprehensive design will be considered to consist of the following, at a minimum:

q Circuiting of fixtures to be dimmed.

q Location of controller modules.

q Location of programmable controllers.

q Locations of dimmer panels.

q A detailed written sequence of operation and control modes for the dimming system.

Lamps: Linear florescent lamps shall be T8 with a correlated color temperature of 3500K.

Lens: Provide parabolic lens’ in ceiling fixtures in classrooms and offices to prevent reflected glare and provide enhanced appearance.

Ballasts and Accessories: Fluorescent ballasts shall be efficient solid-state electronic ballasts. Electronic ballasts shall have a "true" power factor of .90 or greater with 20 percent or less total harmonic distortion. Fluorescent ballasts for outside applications or in areas where ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F shall have a minimum starting temperature of -20 degrees F.

Removal and Disposal of PCB Ballasts: On remodeling projects, the Designer shall consult with the University Department of Environmental Health and Safety (DEHS) for requirements for handling and disposal of PCB ballasts. Removal and disposal of ballasts containing PCB material shall be accomplished per EPA requirements.

q The Designer shall note in the construction documents that the Contractor shall examine existing ballasts that are to be removed from service. If ballast is not clearly labeled to indicate that it does not contain PCB, it shall be assumed to contain PCB.

q The University's EHS department will provide a ballast collection container at or near the project site. PCB containing ballasts shall be placed in the ballast collection container as they are removed.

q The University will dispose of the container.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING – 16521

Design of Exterior Lighting: The Designer shall refer to Appendix A16.4, SOP - Outdoor Lighting Standards for University requirements for lighting of walkways, parking lots, drives, and building entrances.

Fixture Mounting Locations: Fixture locations requiring special equipment or scaffolding to aid in maintenance or relamping increase ongoing operating costs and thus require written



approval from the University. Such special equipment and provisions for its storage and access must be provided as part of the project.

PREMISES TELEPHONE WIRING – 16715

General: The Designer should be aware that the University organizational structure includes a Department of Networking and Telecommunications Services (NTS), which is responsible for installation and maintenance of all telecommunications and computer networking systems on campus.

q Refer to Division 17 - Telecommunication Systems for detailed requirements for all University telephone systems.

q At the earliest possible stages of programming or design, the Building Committee should review with DCM and NTS the options available for each project regarding the provision of telephones and other telecommunication systems, and verify how that project's telecommunication systems shall be designed and constructed.

For projects that involve the addition or relocation of telephone and/or computer communications outlets, the Designer shall review and verify outlet locations with the space occupants. This review shall identify outlets that are needed for immediate program needs, as well as future outlet locations.

q The Designer shall include installation of all conduit, boxes, and mounting devices in the project construction documents.

Design of Communications Terminal Room: Refer to Division 17 - Telecommunication Systems for specific requirements.

Provisions for Elevator Communications: The Designer shall review Appendix A14.1 - Elevator Telephones for specific requirements for specifications and design of passenger elevator telephone installation on campus.

INTERCOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT – 16722

Requirements for this will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Intercom service may be provided through the phone system.

SCHOOL INTERCOM AND PROGRAM EQUIPMENT – 16723

Requirements for this will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Do not provide master clock system unless directed by Building Committee.



PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC EQUIPMENT – 16726

Requirements for this will be determined on a project-by-project basis.

SOUND-MASKING EQUIPMENT – 16727


TELEVISON EQUIPMENT – 16850

Requirements for these systems will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Where applicable, reference the University Media Committee standards and/or specific Audio/Video consultant.

q Cable and/or satellite television systems require written approval from University Provost prior to installation. University Dean, Department Chair or Building Committee Chair shall submit this request in writing to the Provost.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision \Stds_pje_Div-16.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Emergency Lighting Systems A16.1


Standard of Practice - Emergency Lighting Systems

GENERAL



The University is concerned with its ability to protect building occupants from harm or injury upon loss of power to the lighting systems in egress pathways and assembly areas of campus buildings. Minimum requirements for emergency lighting systems that would allow safe exit from suddenly darkened building areas are given by the National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.

In order to satisfy these requirements, it is the University’s intent to provide each campus building with a centralized emergency lighting system utilizing an emergency generator. The emergency generator may also serve security systems, elevators, fire pumps, fire alarm systems, and similar equipment, as requested or approved by the University.

In general, egress lighting in accordance with NFPA 101, section 7.9.2.2 is required to be sensed at the branch circuit to activate the emergency lights. Therefore, if existing egress lighting circuits can not be isolated or organized by re-circuiting in a manner that is economical for sensing purposes, a normally "on" or “night light” system can be utilized. This night light system shall be designed to the minimum light levels possible for energy conservation and maintenance considerations.

It is the University’s long term objective to provide similar and compatible central emergency lighting systems in all major buildings on campus.

An additional objective is to so specify and install these units that they may be remotely monitored for operational status as well as for periodic, code-mandated reporting data. All newly installed central emergency lighting systems shall be compatible with, and shall be installed to report to, the University’s campus-wide BACS network.

BATTERY INVERTER SYSTEMS

Battery-based inverter systems have a history of being expensive and labor-intensive to maintain and are only allowed with specific direction from the University. The monitoring, testing, and maintenance demands that these systems place on facilities maintenance staff make it imperative that considerable forethought and planning precede system installation.

A16.1



DESIGN PROCESS

It is the Designer’s responsibility to prepare a code-compliant emergency lighting design. The Designer shall use the following guidelines in the completion of emergency lighting system designs on campus.

Limited Code Footprint: A limited code study and resulting graphic code footprint shall be completed by the consultant to determine egress paths within the building, if a pre-existing code footprint is not available. This should be developed per the applicable portions of the State Fire Marshall's code footprint criteria, and submitted for review and approval by the University and the State Fire Marshall's office. Assembly spaces with a calculated occupant load of over 50 occupants, all egress paths and the location of all required exits shall be identified. Existing construction type, allowable design criteria and other code information not specifically related to the establishment of egress paths will not be required to be included as part of this code study and footprint, on projects limited to the provision of a new emergency lighting system.

Performance: If existing lights are to be utilized for emergency lights, actual existing lighting levels shall be measured and existing footcandle levels shall be documented by the Designer to determine quantity and spacing of the emergency lights. At the conclusion of the project, egress lighting levels shall be checked during the commissioning and testing of the system to determine if lighting levels are within a reasonable range above minimum lighting levels as stated in the lighting criteria.

The University’s experience, from previous completed projects, is that this range shall be an average of between 1 and 3 foot-candles, with a minimum level of .01 foot-candles and a maximum level of 20 foot-candles. A level of 20 foot-candles below any fixture would allow for a .5 footcandle minimum between fixtures, which stays within the 40 to 1 ratio as required by NFPA 101.

Design Criteria: The Designer shall use the following criteria as guidelines in evaluating and selecting a system with the appropriate functional performance for the specific project circumstances.

q Switched lighting system with normally-off capabilities: This system would utilize existing lights that can be switched off at either a corridor wall switch or centrally timed controller. This would require control relays at each switch.

q Separate lighting system (centrally powered lighting packs): This system would utilize bug eye lights or other decorative lights positioned correctly to yield light levels desired. This is normally-off lighting and would required control relays.



q Always-on lighting system (night light system): This system would re-circuit existing lights to a separate, (always-on) circuit connected to the inverter or emergency generator. In this system, it is imperative that the lighting levels be at the minimum design criteria since they will be on 24 hours a day. This is generally the most economical system since existing lighting circuits are not easily re-grouped for control purposes. This also keeps control relays to a minimum. They would only be needed in normally-off areas such as classrooms and lecture rooms.

q Smart, self-diagnosing battery packs could be utilized in these situations if approved by the University on a case by case basis.

General lighting criteria:

q Emergency light fixtures shall be located in exit paths, assembly areas which may contain more than 100 occupants, or over 2,000 SF, and all other areas required by code.

q Emergency lights shall also be provided in electrical and mechanical equipment rooms.

q Emergency light fixtures shall be located in restrooms and all classrooms with occupancy of over 50, or over 1000 SF in area, if devoid of exterior windows. Normal classrooms and labs with exterior windows shall not receive emergency lights.

q Emergency lights in restrooms, if provided, shall be the minimum allowed by Code. If existing circuits cannot be isolated to switch a single fixture to the emergency lights, then a separate fluorescent fixture may be added.

q Emergency light fixtures shall be located at the exit doors and at intervals that are designed to maintain an average light intensity of 1 footcandle and a minimum light intensity of 0.1 footcandle at floor level in the exit path. In a normal 8-foot wide corridor it has been found that a 35 to 45 foot spacing for a typical 2 light T-8 fluorescent fixture is acceptable. This yields approximately 1 to 3 foot-candles minimum, which is 10 times code minimum.

q Emergency lights within stairwells shall be located at the mid-landing for most conditions. A simple test shall be done during design to determine if this yields the required lighting levels. New fixtures shall be installed where incandescent lights are existing.

q Control relays shall be fused.

Exit Sign Criteria: New exit signs shall be placed in all locations required by the Uniform Building Code.

q New exit signs shall be LED type, without flashing function.

q Areas of refuge, if any, shall be identified by exit signs connected to the emergency lighting system in compliance with applicable codes and the ADA. Text on the sign shall read "AREA OF REFUGE", and shall display the universal accessibility symbol.



SPECIFICATION DETAILS

The Designer shall use the following as guidance in the preparation of specification documents for installation of emergency lighting system equipment on campus.

General: An Integrated Life Safety System shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of power and shall operate during a utility line deficiency without interruptions of power to the load.

q The Integrated Life Safety (ILS) System shall be UL listed.

q Applicable codes and standards include UL924 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; UL1778 Standard Uninterruptable Power Supplies; and ANSI C62.41.

Emergency Generator: Natural gas is the preferred fuel source. When diesel generators are used, the fuel shall be # 2 diesel and the storage quantity shall be as small as possible and still meet code and maintenance requirements. Consult NFPA 110 for specific fuel requirements.

q Environmental air permitting is required for emergency generators. No construction work can begin on the project until the required permits are obtained. Permitting process is a minimum of six months.

q Provide University with required data on the generator so that permit application can be submitted.

q Generator sets shall be located to disperse exhaust fumes and noise without affecting the normal functions of the building and surrounding site.

q Specify a method of damping vibrations to acceptable levels.

q The Designer shall specify that the manufacturer provides contacts for remote indication of generator status, alarm and shutdown, and battery charger alarm to the campus BACS network. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote indication of transfer switch position.

Centralized Inverter: Centralized inverter-based systems are ONLY allowed with specific direction or approval from the University. The transfer from utility power to battery power shall utilize a true no-break; sine wave output system to maintain a zero transfer time. The system shall be capable of powering any combination of electronic ballast; power factor corrected ballast, and self-ballasted fluorescent, incandescent or HID lighting, building management systems, and any other critical emergency or frequency-sensitive electronic loads. The systems shall operate loads at 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading from 0 to 100% loading and shall be rated to deliver its full kW rating at unity power factor.

The system shall be completely microprocessor-controlled. Upon return of the normal AC utility line power, the system shall recharge the batteries within 24-hours without any interruptions of power supplied to the load. Upon an inverter failure, the load shall automatically connect to the AC utility line. Line power shall constantly pass through the ferroresonant transformer to provide continuous, on-line conditioned power.

The Designer shall include the following considerations in preparation of a central battery inverter specification:



q Unit on-line operation: Full load rectification and inverting.

q Provide integral bypass/isolation circuit breakers for all stationary hard-wired UPS equipment to permit servicing the unit without interrupting the load.

q Batteries: The batteries will provide sufficient power to maintain the output voltage of the inverter for a period of 1.5-hours, maintaining 87.5% on nominal battery voltage. The batteries shall be enclosed in a cabinet that permits easy maintenance without requiring removal from it and shall be sealed Lead Calcium, VRLA (S) type. The batteries shall require no addition of water over the life of the battery. The case and cover shall be constructed of polypropylene, contain low-pressure safety release vents, and be non-gassing in normal use with 10-year, minimum design life expectancy.

q Specify startup and acceptance testing including battery testing and full load test.

q The design shall address the effect of input current harmonics on the distribution system and on standby generation equipment serving UPS units. In general, designs shall comply with the IEEE 519-1992 requirements for a "general system" at the point of common coupling between the UPS and the building distribution by the Designer.

q Clearly specify sealed batteries with a minimum 10-year life expectancy. Require a straight pro-rated replacement agreement or better from the battery manufacturer.

q Design shall address the environmental requirements for batteries. Provide ventilation and cooling of battery rooms and battery cabinets adequate to provide full life expectancy.

q Batteries shall be arranged on racks or in cabinets to permit access to individual cell or unit terminals for testing and torque verifications. Each cell or unit shall be numbered to facilitate maintenance records.

q Acceptable Manufacturers: The Designer shall edit ¶2.1 of specification section 16265 to reflect the following list of acceptable manufacturers:

q Best-Lites; Best Power Technology, Inc.

q Dual-Lite.

q Hubbell Lighting Corp.

q Lithonia Lighting, Emergency Lighting Systems.

q Local and Remote Monitoring: The system shall incorporate both manual test function and automatic test modes. The user should be able to perform a system test at any time. The system shall also perform a programmable, weekly, self-diagnostic test of its subsystems to insure the system will operation in the emergency condition, a monthly test of a University-determined programmable discharge time (5-minute default), and an annual test for a University-determined programmable discharge time (90-minute default). Automatic recording in memory of recent inverter events, including all automatic weekly and user programmed tests, shall be logged.

q The Designer shall delete standard Masterspec® references to Instrumentation and Controls and Remote Alarm panel. In lieu of this standard specification, the Designer



shall specify that the installed Inverter be capable of integrating into the University’s Building Automated Controls System (BACS) network. This integration requires connection to a Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys® N2 bus, and may require a translation device known as a Metasys® Integrator.

q Additional guidance regarding the University’s BACS is available in Appendix A15.1, Standard of Practice - Building Automation Control System. The following table shows points that should be mapped by this system:

NPT Description NPT Description

AI AC Volts In BO System Mode – On/Off

AI AC Volts Out BO Audible Alarm– Disable/Enable

AI AC Line Current In BO Invoke Inverter Test

AI AC Line Current Out

BO Invoke Battery Test

AI Output Load BO

AI Battery DC Amps

AI Battery DC Volts

AI Frequency

AI Runtime Remaining

AI Ambient Temperature

BI Any Alarm

BI Inverter – On/Off

BI Charger – On/Off

BI Line Conditioning – On/Off

q Factory Startup: The factory shall provide Field Service Technicians to inspect, energize, and thoroughly test the operation of the ILS system following installation and provide hardcopy reports of satisfactory performance. Following initial startup, the field service technician shall instruct Owner personnel in procedures necessary for proper operation, monitoring, programming, and maintenance.

q Warranty: The ILS system shall be guaranteed, under normal and proper use, against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two years from the date of shipment.

q Batteries supplied, as part of the ILS systems, shall be covered under a separate pro-rated warranty as described elsewhere herein.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Stds\2001_August Revision \Stds_pje_Div-16_A1.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Electrical Power Metering A16.2


Standard of Practice - Electrical Power Metering

GENERAL



q To acquaint Designers and other interested parties with the University’s provisions for metering electrical power usage at individual buildings on the main campus.

q To insure consistent specifications for, and installation of, electrical metering hardware and software within campus buildings and for the campus-wide BACS network interface between building systems.

q To extend the University’s capabilities for remotely monitoring the energy usage of all campus buildings.

BACKGROUND

The University electrical service provider is Kansas Power and Light (KPL) (corporate headquarters at Western Resources, Inc.). The utility delivers 12,470-Volt power to the Lawrence main campus at two distribution substations. Electrical metering for billing purposes is accomplished at these two master meter locations. All campus distribution conductors and building service entrance equipment on the load side of these substations are owned and maintained by the University. It is the University’s policy to meter individual building switchgear loads for administrative and management purposes.

A campus-wide network of building automated controls equipment, commonly known as the campus BACS system, provides the capability of remotely monitoring and controlling mechanical/electrical utility functions on campus. To facilitate campus-wide electrical usage metering, a panel-mounted electronic digital power meter should be installed at all new switchgear installations.

SPECIFICATIONS

To insure that the installed metering device is compatible with the existing Johnson Controls Inc. network operating system protocol, and that it monitors and logs data of value to

A16.2

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Electrical Power Metering A16.2


University Facilities Operations personnel, the Designer should use the following information in developing the electrical metering specifications. The Designer should clearly indicate in the construction documents that Johnson Controls Inc. should furnish and install the meter device through the existing State procurement contract.

q Manufacturer and model to be determined

q Input Primary Voltage - 208 to 480 VAC rms.

q Maximum Primary Current - 2400 amps cont. per phase

q Accuracy - +/- 1.0% (ANSI C12.1)

q Data for Output.

q BI-1 - kWh, Consumption (Accumulator)

q AI-12 - kW, Demand phase B

q AI-13 - kW, Demand phase C

q AI-14 - Power Factor, phase A

q AI-15 - Power Factor, phase B

q AI-16 - Power Factor, phase C

q AI-17 - Voltage, phase A to phase B

q AI-18 - Voltage, phase B to phase C

q AI-19 - Voltage, phase A to phase C

q AI-20 - Voltage, phase A to Neutral

q AI-21 - Voltage, phase B to Neutral

q AI-22 - Voltage, phase C to Neutral

q AI-23 - Amps, Current phase A

q AI-24 - Amps, Current phase B

q AI-25 - Amps, Current phase C


The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Campus Elec. Distribution System A16.3


Standard of Practice - Campus Electrical Distribution System

GENERAL



q To acquaint Designer s and other interested parties with the University’s main campus primary electrical distribution system.

q To insure consistent specifications for, and installation of cabling, switching, and grounding equipment on the main campus.

BACKGROUND

The University Lawrence Campus electrical service provider is Kansas Power and Light (KPL)(corporate headquarters are Western Resources, Inc). The utility delivers 12,470-Volt power to the Lawrence main campus at two distribution substations. From these two substations, 12,470-Volt electrical power is distributed across the main campus through a combination of looped and radially-fed circuits. The University has developed a masterplan for circuit development, which over time is expected to eliminate all existing radially-fed circuits in favor of four dual-fed looped circuits whose opposite ends will connect at each of the two KPL substations. This plan has assigned all existing and probable future loads to one of these four circuits. For projects that involve modifying an existing building electrical service, or creating a new building electrical service feed from the main campus distribution system, the Designer should refer to the University’s plan for system development to determine the extent of system modifications required.

Individual building services fed by these distribution circuits are transformed to under 600-Volt secondary voltages and are metered separately for University management and accounting purposes only. Designers should take special note that all current carrying circuit conductors from the campus distribution substations to the terminations at building service transformers are 350-kcmil conductors. Building service feeders and transformer terminations should be specified and detailed accordingly.

A16.3



Other University property, including the area located west of Iowa Street known as West Campus, individual buildings located off-campus in Lawrence and in Overland Park, Kansas, is typically fed directly from commercial utility distribution systems.

KPL has provided the following data for use by Designers in completing electrical system design projects on the main Lawrence campus:

Substation Location Feed Available Fault Current

(Amps) Impedance (Ohms)

19th Street Sub. Circuit 16 (East of Iowa on 19th St.)

East KU 4120 (PH-GRD)

4300 (PH-PH)

4990 (3-PH)

0.2 + j1.44

WREN Sub., Circuit 22 (15th & Kasold)

West KU 3400 (PH-GRD)

3770 (PH-PH)

4380 (3-PH)

0.28 + j1.63

The main campus distribution system is a 3-phase, 3-wire, solidly grounded system. Routing of the conductors includes both cable tray installation in utility tunnels and duct bank buried installations. While some existing building services feed off of the distribution circuit at in-tunnel oil-filled link boxes or disconnect switches, all new service feeds should be from a pad-mounted switchgear.

CURRENT-CARRYING CONDUCTORS

Existing current carrying conductors and all newly specified conductors should be as follows:

q Description: 15-kV, 133 percent insulation level shielded power cable. Specify single conductor cable for installation in conduit and ductbank. Specify three-conductor cable in an armor assembly with PVC jacket for installation in cable tray in tunnels.

q Conductor: Class B concentric stranded annealed copper (ICEA S-68-516 Part 2).

q Strand Shield: Extruded EPR-based semi-conducting shield (ICEA S-68-516 Part 2).

q Insulation: Ethylene propylene rubber “EPR” (ICEA S-68-516 Part 3). Insulation level shall be 133 percent; thickness: 220 mils (ICEA S-68-516 table 3-1). Crystalline EPR compounds with cross-linked polyethylene are NOT acceptable.

q Insulation Shield: Semi-conducting EPR-based extrusion applied over the insulation plus a 5-mil overlapping copper tape shield (ICEA S-68-516 Part 4).

q Three Conductor Assemblies: Cabled with fillers in the interstices, and overall binder tape. Enclosed in Aluminum-interlocked tape armor per UL 1072 and ICEA S-68-516.

q Single Conductor Jacket: Chlorosulfanated polyethylene, heavy duty “CSPE or Hypalon” (ICEA S-68-516 Part 4, Paragraph 4.4.10), thickness: 80 mils (ICEA S-68-516 Table 4-3).

q Three Conductor Jacket: Sunlight resistant red PVC jacket in accordance with UL 1072.



q Identification: Surface printing shall show the manufacturer’s name, insulation level, insulation type, jacket type, conductor size, conductor type, voltage rating, and numbered footage markers.

q Temperature: Cable shall be suitable for operation under the following maximum conductor temperatures (ICEA S-68-516 Part 3, Paragraph 3.1):

q 105 Degrees C: Continuous, wet or dry locations

q 140 Degrees C: Emergency

q 250 Degrees C: Short circuit.

q Testing: All cables shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of ICEA S-68-516 and IEEE 383.

q Certification: All cables shall be certified to be in conformance with all applicable requirements of ICEA S-68-516 and IEEE 383.

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

The main campus electrical distribution system includes a comprehensive grounding grid. The purpose of this grid is to provide a low impedance return path for ground-fault current necessary for the timely operation of the overcurrent protection system, particularly at the campus service entrance substations.

q A separate and parallel bare, stranded No. 4/0 copper grounded conductor is to be provided for all electrical distribution circuits.

Construction Documents: The continuity and integrity of this ground grid is critical to the safe operation of the University’s electrical distribution system. For projects involving the extension or modification of the campus electrical distribution system, the Designer shall develop design documents that insure the integrity of the grounded conductor grid. The Designer is responsible for developing a system that is compliant with Article 250 of the NEC, and other relevant articles of the NEC. In particular, the construction documents should detail the following ground connections:

q Ground all electrical equipment enclosures, electrical equipment ground busses, and exposed noncurrent-carrying parts of electrical equipment to the grid.

q Ground all terminal points of metallic conduits. q When a circuit continues between conduit and cable tray routing, bond the conduit to the

cable tray with a grounding bushing connected to the ground conductor in the cable tray. q Where extending into floor-mounted equipment from below, connect to the equipment

ground bus or frame.

q Where extending into a manhole, handhole, cable trench, or nonmetallic box, connect to the ground conductor at the location using grounding bushings.

q Ground cable trays with a continuous No. 4/0 AWG ground conductor clamped to each tray section at one point in each tray section, at intervals not to exceed 20-feet.



q Connect manhole ground rods to the underground duct system ground conductors. Ground manhole hardware to the ground rod extensions, duct bank counterpoise, or ground grid in the manholes with a No. 6 AWG ground conductor.

SECTIONALIZING SWITCHES

For projects that require modifications to an existing campus distribution circuit, the Designer shall determine, by discussions with University personnel, and by review of the existing University masterplan for electrical distribution, whether existing pad-mount switchgear is available for load connections or if new switchgear must be specified and installed. For projects that require new switchgear, the Designer shall use the following guidelines for creating specifications and detailing installation.

q General: All new switchgear for campus distribution switching should be outdoor parmount style, with copper bus, switch configuration for two (2) loop switches and two (2) load taps, similar to S&C Model PMH-10. All switch taps should be untapped.

q Nominal Voltage: 14.4-kV rms, three-phase, three-way.

q Rated Maximum Voltage: 7.0-kV rms.

q Rated Frequency: 60-Hz.

q Impulse Withstand Voltage: 95-kV.

q Main Bus Ampacity: 600 amperes, continuous.

q Switch Assembly

q All switch assemblies should be non-fused.

q Three-pole, spring-charged stored energy.

q Capable of withstanding without damages the mechanical and thermal stresses of the circuit breaker momentary and short-time current ratings.

q 600 amps rated continuous current and loadbreak current at rated maximum voltage.

q 14-kA rms one-second asymmetrical short-circuit current and 22.4-kA rms momentary asymmetrical short-circuit current at rated maximum voltage.

q Mount a fault indicator in each switch compartment. Provide a fault indicator viewing window in each switch tap access door.

q Cable Terminations: Offset spade type suitable for termination of the University standard 350-kcmil circuit conductor cables.

q Switch Cabinet Construction: The switch cabinet should be as low in profile as possible (preferably 48-inches, maximum), with the following considerations.

q The Designer shall make provisions in the specification to insure that the switch housing construction allows for initial termination of each conductor cable of the three-phase circuit.

q In addition, the Designer shall insure that any subsequent re-termination (such as may be required to accomplish phase matching at the switch) can be accomplished in the available cabinet space.



TERMINATIONS

The Designer shall specify termination kits that are certified in writing by the cable manufacturer to be compatible with and suitable for the cable materials. All equipment termination kits should be specified as IEEE 48, class 1.

Equipment Terminations: The Designer shall determine if special equipment termination lugs are required to accommodate the University standard conductor sizes identified in this Standard of Practice and edit specifications sections accordingly.


The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Outdoor Lighting Standards A16.4


Outdoor Lighting Standards

GENERAL



q To acquaint Designers and other interested parties with the University’s outdoor lighting standards.

q To insure consistent design, drawings, specifications and installation of outdoor lighting systems on the main campus.

BACKGROUND

The University has an ongoing program to upgrade the campus site lighting, which has been funded in large part by student fees. This program was established to improve the overall safety of the campus for students and other pedestrians after-dark.

Early in the year 2000, the University learned that the outdoor lighting fixture that up to then had been the KU standard was to be discontinued in production. University personnel investigated all of the known fixtures that were potentially equivalent replacements for this fixture, examining their construction and testing their lighting performance. It was concluded that only the Kim Lighting, Inc. fixture, as noted elsewhere herein, meets the University's needs.

GENERAL

Outdoor lighting systems shall be designed to provide the illumination levels indicated in the chart at the end of this section, using the following University-standard poles and luminaires.

Pedestrian Walkways, Bicycle Paths & Bike Rack Areas: 20’ poles with 175-watt metal halide luminaries.

Roadways & Parking Lots: 30’ poles with 400-watt metal halide luminaries.

A16.4



Light Pole Bases: Provide cast-in-place concrete light pole bases, per KU's standard details in Appendix A16.5, Light Pole Base Detail. Designers shall include these details in the construction documents for all projects that include outdoor lighting.

q Note that pole bases are NOT to be less than 30" diameter, nor less than 6' embedded depth for 20' high poles, nor less than 8' embedded depth for 30' light poles. Exceptions will only be allowed if structural engineering calculations are provided that confirm that lesser dimensions will meet all required wind, snow and ice loading conditions for the applicable soil conditions.

Wall-Mounted Site Lighting: Designers are NOT to use "wall packs" or wall-mounted luminaires for general site lighting, as they are a source of glare and uneven lighting.

Lighting Bollards: Designers are discouraged from using lighting bollards, which have proven to be more difficult to maintain, unless site conditions would make them more effective than pole lighting and their use has been specifically approved by DCM.

SPECIFICATIONS

All exterior site lighting fixtures shall use metal halide lighting source, with dark bronze finish on light poles, support arms and luminaires.

Light Poles: Round tapered aluminum poles with cast aluminum tenons, as manufactured by Lexington Standard Corporation.

Luminaires: Arm-mount, square body luminaries with optional round slip-fitter and double fusing; “Matrix” series, as manufactured by Kim Lighting, Inc.



ILLUMINATION LEVELS

Location Min. Footcandle Level Ave. Footcandle Level

Pedestrian Walkways 1.0 --

Bicycle Paths 1.0 --

Bike Racks 1.0 --

Roadways 0.25 1.0 to 1.5

Parking Lots 0.40 1.5 to 2.0

Building Entrances 5.0 1.5 times floodlighting design levels if the building

has floodlighting

End of Document: D:\Steve \KU DCM\Design Stds\2000-October Revisions\Stds_pje_Div-16_A4.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Light Pole Base Detail A16.5


Light Pole Base Detail

GENERAL


*** INCLUDE LIGHT POLE BASE DETAILS HERE; INCLUDE LINK TO WEB-BASED CAD FILE ***

End of Document: D:\Steve \KU DCM\Design Stds\2000-October Revisions\Stds_pje_Div-16_A4.doc

A16.5

KU Design & Construction Standards Plumbing 22

Revision Date: March 1, 2010 Page 1 of 6

Plumbing

GENERAL Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Request for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form. RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section. Division 1 - General Requirements: Refer to sections regarding construction testing

and field quality control requirements. Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control

testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project. Division 23 - Standards of Practice: The University has adopted specific mechanical

system construction practices that are referenced by the applicable AIA – Masterspec section and/or University Standards of Practice (SOP). The Designer shall use the following supplemental guidelines and standards of practice in development of project construction documents.

Division 26 - Electrical: Review all sections of Division 26 for related work and systems that must be coordinated with provisions of Division 22.

COMMON WORK RESULTS - 220500 General Project Description: The Designer shall include as one section of the specifications, a lay description

The Designer shall update this lay description at later stages of design and construction, if the systems' operation changes, and shall provide copies of updates to the building's commissioning agent, as well as to the DCM and DFM engineering project managers.

of the design, operating function, loads, capacities, tolerances, sequence(s) of operation, etc., of the mechanical systems designed for this project. The intention of this document is to give all parties including the Contractor's installation personnel and the University's maintenance personnel a reference document for each particular system design. Samples of such documentation can be obtained from the University.

Building Aesthetics: The Designer is responsible for ensuring that mechanical equipment or systems are not located outside the building, or at a minimum, are designed to blend in with the building structure. The University reserves the right to determine the location of all equipment located outside the building. The Designer shall ensure that fresh air intakes, exhaust grilles and any other component of the ventilation system match or blend in with the building architecture. Pipe Penetrations and Sleeves: This work shall be coordinated with Division 7. Floor

22



sleeves shall extend above the finished floor a minimum of 2-inches and shall be sealed watertight. New penetrations shall be fire-stopped. Sleeve material would be specified to suit the wall or floor type being penetrated. Prohibited Pipe Fitting Materials and Methods: Due to University requirements for long system life and the need for uniformity and consistency of piping system installations, field fabricated pipe and tubing fittings of the type commonly referred to as “drilled” or “pulled” tees are not allowed. Equipment Bases: Concrete bases, 3-1/2 inch minimum height, shall be provided under all floor mounted mechanical equipment. Base size and location shall be coordinated with the equipment specified and shall be shown on the architectural and structural drawings. Designing in Existing Facilities: The Designer is expected to field-verify existing conditions so that construction conflicts are minimized. For remodeling projects, the University will provide openings in walls and ceilings where required and requested by the Designer to permit verification of existing piping, ductwork, and equipment. Lack of ready access to hidden conditions during design is not considered to be an acceptable justification for unidentified and unresolved construction conflicts in construction documents. Equipment and System Cleaning: The specifications shall include the requirement of system cleaning. After hydrostatic tests and prior to the operating tests, equipment including and not necessarily limited to the chiller, cooling tower, boilers, heat exchangers and all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned. The initial system cleaning shall be with a solution of caustic soda, trisodium, or a University approved equal. After the solution has cleaned the system, the solution shall be drained and thoroughly flushed out with fresh water. After initial cleaning, the Owner's representative, or designee, shall sign and certify that the system has been thoroughly cleaned. Jobsite Fire Safety Precautions: The Designer shall include in the specifications the following or a similar statement with regard to protective measures to be observed by the Contractor during brazing, sweating, or welding operations: All cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations carried on in the vicinity of, or

accessible to, combustible material, shall be adequately protected to make certain that a spark or hot slag does not reach the combustible material and start a fire.

When it is necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating close to wood construction, in pipe shafts, or other locations where combustible materials can not be removed or adequately protected, employ fireproof blankets and proper fire extinguishers. A helper shall be stationed nearby to guard against sparks and fire.

Whenever combustible material has been exposed to molten metal or hot slag from welding or cutting operations, or spatter from electric arc, a guard shall be kept at the place of the work for at least one hour after completion to make sure that smoldering fires have not been started.

Whenever welding or cutting operations are carried on in a vertical pipe shaft or where floor openings exist, a fire guard shall be employed to examine all floors below point of welding or cutting operation. The fire guard shall be kept on duty for at least one hour



after completion of work to guard against fires. Before any work involving cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations is started,

consult with the Designer as to particular safety precautions to be employed on the work.” Building Service Interruptions: The Designer shall include in the specifications the following or similar statement with regard to interruptions of any campus utilities: The contractor shall contact the KU Facilities Operations project manager (currently Mike

Miller, 864-4770) at least one week prior any utility shutdown for relocation or tie-in. Underground Service Surveys: Coordinate this work with Division 2. The Designer shall include in the specifications the following or similar statement with regard to surveys of any new or relocated campus underground utilities: The Contractor shall contact the Facilities Operations survey coordinator (Engineering

Shop, 864-5620) with 48-hour minimum notice and allow KU to survey locations and elevations of all new and relocated utility lines prior to backfilling.

Verifying Existing Conditions: On remodeling projects, the Designer is responsible for the verification of the actual operating conditions of HVAC systems requiring changes due to the proposed remodeling. The Owner shall not provide any equipment or labor for this purpose. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION - 220553 Identifying Devices and Labels: Piping system markers shall be pressure-sensitive, adhesive vinyl complying with ASME 13.1. Ducting systems and access door markers shall be specified to be stenciled in a manner complying with ASME 13.1. The Masterspec requirements for color-coding and nomenclature shall be included in the text of this section. EQUIPMENT INSULATION – 220716 Applicability: Shall be included in construction specifications for projects involving field-applied insulation of mechanical equipment. Pieces of equipment with a surface temperature over 130 degrees F or with temperatures

causing condensation at ambient relative humidity of 90 percent shall be insulated. Equipment condensate drain pans shall be insulated. Type and thickness of insulation

shall be as specified for piping. Steam traps, hot water and condensate return pumps, and hot water expansion tanks

shall not be insulated. Specify factory insulation of autoclaves and sterilizers. Insulating Valve Bodies and Piping Specialties: Specify preformed, removable insulation, blankets, sections and jackets for valves and specialties on insulated piping systems. Types of fittings included are valves, slip joints and steam and condensate meters. Each removable cover shall have a close contour fit for appearance and proper thermal performance. Abatement of Asbestos Materials: Use of asbestos insulating materials is prohibited. Campus-wide abatement of existing asbestos-containing insulation materials is being



undertaken on a project-specific basis. Therefore, to document the extent of abatement and replacement accomplished during each project, new insulation shall be stenciled, per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101, to identify it as non-asbestos containing. PIPE INSULATION – 220719 Insulating Drainage Piping Systems: Where appropriate to the project, this section shall include the specification of insulation for roof drain bodies and rainwater conductors. Similarly, coil condensate drain piping routed through finished spaces shall be insulated. Pipe Insulation in Wet Areas: Insulation in potentially wet and unburied installations shall be covered with 30 mil PVC Jacket. Jacket shall be sealed at all joints per manufacturer's recommendation. VALVES – 220523 Equipment Isolation: The specifications shall include isolation valves. All equipment must be installed with isolation valves for shutoff service. All systems such as potable water, heating systems, chilled water systems, etc. must have a minimum of one isolation valve per building level or as required by the University representative. Reference to Controls System Specifications for Valves with Control Operators: The Designer shall identify that valves equipped with electric, electronic, and pneumatic operators for automatic throttling control are specified and scheduled in Section 230900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls within the specification documents. METERS AND GAUGES – 220518 Utilities Systems Ownership: The distribution systems for all major campus utilities, except natural gas, are owned and maintained by the University. The Designer shall edit this specification section to delete references to Utility-furnished products. For billing purposes, each utility distribution system originates at a central campus entry point where master metering is provided. Individual metering described in this specification section is intended for University maintenance and administrative purposes only. Utility meters with demand pulse or similar system connected for remote computer

monitoring shall be supplied for each of the following: domestic water, cooling tower water, chilled water, steam or condensate return, and natural gas. Each major piece of equipment such as chillers, air handling units, cooling towers, boilers and compressors shall have run-time clocks installed and shall be connected for remote monitoring by computer to accomplish this function on a cumulative monthly log. Ammeters shall be supplied on chillers and similar equipment.

Remote Data Gathering Capability.

All utility meters shall be directly connected to the campus BACS network. Refer to Appendix A23.2, SOP – Building Automation Control Systems for interface requirements.

LABORATORY AIR, GAS, AND VACUUM PIPING – 226313 The specifications for plumbing work shall include providing all piping, sleeves, valves,

stops, sink trim, laboratory bench and fume hood trim, sinks, and piping insulation



required for the complete installation of mechanical services to laboratory benches, sinks, and fume hoods.

The Designer will be responsible for coordinating the plumbing installation design with the laboratory furniture shop drawings. Provision shall be made in the drawings or in the specifications for minor location adjustments to meet the equipment requirements. These adjustments shall be made before the installation of the plumbing piping systems.

Services such as hot or cold water, vacuum, and gas shall have a valve specified and shown on the drawings which will be easily accessible after installation of the equipment so that service to the unit may be shut off for maintenance or repair.

LABORATORY WASTE PIPING – 226653 The Designer shall consult with the University in each case where corrosive wastes are

to be disposed of to determine the extent of corrosion resistant waste and vent stacks, horizontal runs, and ground runs required.

Corrosive waste drain and vent systems shall be specified for all laboratories where use of acids or other corrosives is probable. In general, the design and specifications shall be based on borosilicate glass drain line piping with approved couplings. Glass drain lines may be installed underground providing such piping is completely encased in approved foam plastic envelopes prior to backfilling.

Approved polypropylene or polyethylene waste and vent systems may be used in lieu of glass for horizontal runouts not exceeding 60 feet in developed length, subject to the following conditions: All material furnished shall be fire retardant and self-extinguishing. Plastic materials shall penetrate fire rated floors, walls, or partitions using U.L. listed

penetrations and fire stop materials. Requests for such system substitutions will be approved by the Designer upon receipt

of certification by the Contractor and the system manufacturer that design conditions will not adversely affect the system when installed.

All corrosive waste drain and vent systems shall be clearly shown by riser diagrams or equivalent means of identification, indicating by suitable symbols the exact extent of the acid resistant piping. Diagrams shall be complete enough to show exact terminal fittings.

Where long runs of horizontal acid resistant waste piping are required for high temperature wastes, install expansion joints to relieve stress on joints caused by expansion and contraction. Indicate where expansion joints are to be located in the system.

Where traps are installed, corrosion resistant tailpieces shall be used. Adequate space shall be provided for servicing traps.

Provide a waste water sampling port at the lowest common collection point. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING – 221113 The domestic hot water piping system can be either designed as a recirculating loop or

with point of use water heaters. The Designer shall provide Life Cycle Cost Analysis for systems with total design deliveries of greater than 500-gph. Water heaters serving non-looped systems must be within 25 feet of point of use.

All exposed piping in toilet rooms shall be chrome plated.



Backflow Prevention: Comply with the University backflow prevention program. Copies are available from the Department of Facilities Operations. "Watts" is preferred as the base manufacturer for all backflow preventers. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall be piped to "dump" into a floor

drain of adequate size to handle full flow. Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping: The specifications shall include the requirement that all water main systems are to be purged and disinfected by the Contractor, in accordance with AWWA C651 or 652. Special Laboratory Plumbing Requirements: Where applicable, the Designer shall coordinate specification sections 123553 for Laboratory Casework, and section 224500 – Emergency Plumbing Fixtures for special laboratory requirements. Laboratory sinks shall be epoxy resin, or University approved equal, to match laboratory

counter tops. Laboratory sinks shall be complete with borosillicate glass or polypropylene tail pieces

and traps. Emergency Eye Wash and Safety Shower Installation. Special Kitchen Plumbing Requirements: Where applicable, the Designer shall coordinate specification sections 114000 Foodservice Equipment. The specifications for plumbing work shall include providing all piping, sleeves, shutoff

valves, and pipe insulation to kitchen equipment locations. Specifications shall require the piping to terminate at exact equipment locations in

accordance with a shop drawing to be furnished by the kitchen Equipment Contractor. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING – 221316 Chloraloy or approved equal membrane flashing to extend 12-inches from the clamping

ring on all floor drains located in slabs not on grade. The lowest floor in the building, whether basement or grade level, must have adequate

floor drains to the sewer. There should be more than one floor drain on this lowest level. Every restroom must have a floor drain. Floor drains in machine rooms must be accessible and must not be located under

equipment. Floor drains shall not

Drain, waste and vent piping below grade shall be service weight cast iron with bell and spigot Tyseal fittings.

be located in air handling units unless the drains go to an indirect waste outside the unit.

Drain, waste and vent piping above grade shall be service weight cast iron with stainless steel no-hub couplings.

End of Document: G:\DESIGN\DCMPJE\STANDARDS\Stds_pje_Div-22.doc

KU Design & Construction Standards HVAC 23


HVAC

GENERAL Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Request for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form. RELATED DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS Refer to the following for requirements that also apply to work of this section. Division 1 - General Requirements: Refer to sections regarding construction testing

and field quality control requirements. Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control

testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project. Division 22 - Standards of Practice: The University has adopted specific mechanical

system construction practices that are referenced by the applicable AIA – Masterspec section and/or University Standards of Practice (SOP). The Designer shall use the following supplemental guidelines and standards of practice in development of project construction documents.

Division 26 - Electrical: Review all sections of Division 26 for related work and systems that must be coordinated with provisions of Division 23.

DUCT INSULATION – 230713 Duct Insulation Designs: Thickness of supply air duct and plenum insulation shall be selected to prevent condensation on the surface of insulation when the ambient relative humidity is 90 percent at the maximum difference between the ambient air temperature and the supply air temperature. The Designer is responsible for determining the lowest potential supply air temperature whether the ducting is associated with a new or existing air system. Fresh air intake ducts shall be insulated with fiberglass board insulation or duct wrap two

inches thick, mechanically fastened, and shall have finish suitable to the location and surrounding conditions. Fastenings shall not penetrate to the inside of ducts. Insulation pins shall be fastened to ductwork by welding.

Insulated ducts in exposed areas shall be insulated with fiberglass board or duct wrap one inch thick with glass cloth or canvas jacket with vapor barrier. In concealed areas ducts shall be insulated with 2 inch thick fiberglass blanket, 3/4 pound density.

Insulation shall be suitably framed at all access panels. Duct liner is generally prohibited, but may be used for sound absorption in critical areas

only after consultation with University Design Manager. Installation shall meet latest edition of SMACNA.

23



HYDRONIC PIPING – 232113 Heating Water Piping Systems: The Designer shall include the following considerations in preparation of designs that include heating water piping systems. Standard weight black steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A120 continuous weld and Type K

copper up to two inches. Piping systems up to and including two inches in size shall be screwed construction with

standard weight cast iron fittings or brazed copper. Larger systems shall be welded, 150# class weld neck, or slip-on flanges. Chilled and Condenser Water Piping Systems: The Designer shall include the following considerations in preparation of designs that include chilled and condenser water piping systems. Chilled and condenser water piping systems shall be standard weight black steel pipe,

ASTM A53 or A120 continuous weld. Condenser water piping may be schedule 40 PVC with solvent weld joints, where allowed by Plumbing Code.

Victaulic couplings are preferred for chilled water piping. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell elastomeric. Thickness per ASHRAE 90.1-2007. Specialties: The Designer shall include the following considerations in preparation of designs that include hydronic piping systems specialties: Provide details showing valves, unions, and controls on all converter and expansion tank

systems. Properly size relief valves for the system designed. Provide piping connection detail showing valves, unions, control valves, flow metering

devices and gauges for all types of coils. Expansion tank and makeup: Specify expansion tanks with butyl rubber bladders, Taco

Series CA or University approved equal. Connect the make-water line at the location of the expansion tank.

Make up water line: with code approved backflow preventer to protect the domestic water supply.

Heating coils shall be provided with an approved vacuum breaker and air vent. Service Valves: Provide supply and return mains and risers with isolation valves for

service and valved and capped drains at low points to facilitate complete drainage of the hydronic system.

Vent all high points of the system with air vents that will not permit air to enter the system under vacuum conditions.

In order to minimize water hammering, make up water lines to steam generators shall have slow close solenoid valves.

WATER TREATMENT – 231513 All HVAC closed-loop water systems shall have a chemical corrosion protection system, using a mixture of Dowtherm SR-1 and water. All recirculating water systems shall be chemically treated. The Designer shall specify the necessary equipment for treatment and the initial cleaning and treatment of the system. Do not specify supply of chemicals for the first year. The University will take over treatment of the system at substantial completion.



Consult University for current vendor(s) and specify same. STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING – 232208 Steam Supply and Return Piping Systems: The Designer shall include the following considerations in preparation of designs that include steam and condensate piping systems. Steam distribution piping shall be black steel pipe; ASTM A120 welded through four

inches; A53 welded for larger pipe. Condensate return piping shall be extra heavy steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A120, continuous

welded. Steam and condensate piping shall be of welded construction, except at valves, traps,

and similar devices. Exception: Low pressure (0-15 psig) steam and low pressure condensate return piping two inches and under may be screwed using extra heavy weight malleable or cast iron fittings.

Piping larger than two inches in size shall be fabricated using butt or socket weld fittings. Flanges may be welded neck or slip-on type 150# class (through 75 psig) or 300# class (above 75 psig).

Drip piping shall be welded except for connection to screwed strainers and traps. Screwed unions shall be 300# AAR, or black steel.

Drip and trap assemblies for steam mains and headers shall be fabricated using two inch extra heavy steel nipples with screwed caps for mains over two inches line size, and line size for lines under two inches, with full size gate valve (N.O.) between the main and the take-off to the trap.

Steam and return piping, valves fittings and accessories shall be accessible for maintenance.

Traps shall not be bypassed. Traps shall be designed to have a test valve discharging to atmosphere located between the trap and the discharge shut off valve.

Branch steam mains shall be valved at the main. Flanges or unions shall be provided, and valving arranged so removable equipment may

be easily dismantled for maintenance without disruption of service. Flash Tank: High pressure condensate shall be discharged to a flash tank before draining

to a low pressure condensate return line. The flash tank shall be vented to the outside. The Designer shall include a detail of the flash tank installation including piping

arrangement. The design of the flash tank installation and its sizing shall comply with all the

requirements in the Minnesota High Pressure Steam Code. Utilize the flash steam to the greatest extent that is economically possible.

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SOUND CONTROL – DESIGN GUIDELINES General: The University as experienced numerous problems with excessively loud or annoying sounds and noise levels generated by mechanical equipment, such as chillers and cooling towers, which disrupt the activities of persons within university buildings or living in residential areas adjoining the University. Designers shall specify equipment and design the project so that generated sound levels

do not exceed those established as acceptable for each project.



Refer to Division 1 – General Requirements section re: Acoustical Design Services Noise Levels: The University will establish acceptable noise generation and sound level criteria for each project, as appropriate for it’s intended use and location. Unless established otherwise, the standard sound levels that may be generated by mechanical equipment and other equipment installed as part of any KU project shall not exceed the following levels, when measured on the receiving property. 7am to 11pm: 55 dBA maximum 11pm to 7am: 50 dBA maximum For any source of sound which emits a pure tone or impulsive sound, the maximum

sound level limits indicated above shall be reduced by 5 dBA. Point of Measurement: For exterior equipment, those sound levels shall me measured either along the property line adjacent privately-owned property, or at the face of adjacent University buildings. For interior equipment, it shall be measured within the adjacent occupied rooms. Future Building Sites: Sound shall also be controlled and measured along the assumed

perimeter of future buildings. Future building sites shall include those indicated on the Campus Master Plan and those identified by University personnel during the preliminary design phases.

Equipment: The Designer shall specify acceptable noise levels to be met by the manufacturer of each type of equipment. Confirm with Owner’s Representative the need for factory testing for verification of performance. Documentation: The Designer shall provide calculations and other documentation as necessary to verify to the University’s satisfaction that proposed design meets these criteria. The Designer shall document the following minimum considerations: Manufacturer’s data that identifies unattenuated sound pressure levels for prospective

equipment at known directions and distances from the equipment. Designers are to verify that this data represents sound levels resulting from both

compressor and condenser fan operation, and that this data is based upon a compressor type that matches the compressor type in the proposed specifications.

Designers are to verify if the proposed machine has different sound pressure characteristics for the sides and opposite ends of the unit.

Calculations to convert the manufacturer’s data from the sound levels at the distance from the machine indicated in their data, to the estimate sound pressure level at the adjacent buildings or property lines surrounding the project.

Sound Attenuation Options: If calculations and documentation indicate that proposed quipment will apparently exceed the allowable noise levels, Designers shall do one or more of the following, provided tey are documented as providing effective sound control within the acceptable levels. Modify the specified equipment type, such as a different type of chiller Limit the manufacturers to those who can meet the acceptable criteria



Specify sound control accessories to be provided with the equipment Provide architectural barriers or screen walls ABSORPTION CHILLERS – 236413 Prohibited Use: Absorption Chillers shall not be specified. CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS – 236416 Approved Refrigerants: The University is phasing out its use of CFC-based refrigerants. Designers shall specify machines built for operation with HCFC-123, HFC-134A

refrigerants, or HCFC-410A. Noise Levels: The Designer shall specify acceptable noise levels to be met by the manufacturer of the equipment. Confirm with Owner's Representative the need for factory testing for verification of performance. Special Warranties: The Designer shall specify minimum five-year factory warranties for all water chiller compressors. Shall include all parts, labor, and diagnostic labor. Shall include annual inspection for first five years. Selection Criteria: The Designer shall use the following a general guidance in selection of chilled water system components. For systems smaller than 100 tons, the recommended system is a screw or scroll

compressor chiller with an air-cooled condensing unit. For replacement chillers where an existing cooling tower is suitable for reuse, the new chiller may be designed as water-cooled.

For cooling loads over 100 tons but less than 250 tons, water cooled screw compressor chiller or centrifugal compressor chiller shall be used.

Over 250 tons, the Designer shall specify the use of water cooled centrifugal chillers. Heat rejection equipment shall be rated at 105 degrees ambient. Chilled water systems shall be selected with a minimum 12 degree delta T. Air-cooled chillers may use a remote ebaporator for freeze-protection. Alternately,

provide a glycol/water mixture with and circulating pumps for freeze protection. Heat tracing is not recommended.

Year-Round Cooling: Special year-round cooling and dehumidifying systems shall be stand-alone air conditioning units capable of operating at outside temperature of as low as minus-20 degrees F and shall be separated from the general comfort cooling system in the building. These special systems shall be equipped with an economizer cycle. Examples of these special cooling systems are research spaces, telecommunication

rooms, computer rooms, dry rooms, and instrumentation rooms. When required by application, condensing equipment shall be capable of starting and

operating at -10 degree F ambient temperature.



Refrigerant Emissions Safety Systems: Equipment rooms with refrigeration equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 15, with exception of self-contained breathing apparatus which will be provided by Owner. Chillers shall be equipped with high-efficiency refrigerant recovery/purge systems. Remote Monitoring: The Designer shall specify that newly installed water chillers be capable of communicating with the University’s Building Automated Controls System (BACS) network with integration. Refer to Appendix A23.2, Standard of Practice - Building Automation Control System for

additional discussion of the University’s campus-wide BACS network. RECIPROCATING WATER CHILLERS – 236419 Prohibited Use: Air-cooled reciprocating chillers shall not be specified. PACKAGED COOLING TOWERS – 236513 Cooling Tower Specifications: If it is determined that a cooling tower is necessary for the air conditioning system and other heat rejection systems, careful consideration shall be given to its location in relationship to: noise and appearance, prevention of fresh air intake contamination, disease spread, and similar aesthetic or environmental issues, as well as function. It is intended that landscape arrangements and appearance will be included in the discussions of other site considerations. All wetted, non-media surfaces of cooling towers and evaporative condensers shall be

stainless steel. All cooling tower support beams (steel) shall be hot-dip galvanized to ASTM specifications.

Cooling tower fans shall be gear-driven and supplied with synthetic oil for five year maintenance-free operation. If capacity control is required, use variable frequency drives on fan motors. Tower controls shall include flow bypass and fan speed reduction based upon measured return water temperature.

Cooling towers shall not be located at lower elevation than chiller. ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS – 236426 Selection Criteria: The Designer shall use the following as general guidance in selection of chilled water system components. For systems smaller than 100 tons, the recommended system is a screw or scroll

compressor chiller with an air-cooled condensing unit. Condensing unit shall be rated at 105 degrees F. ambient.

For replacement chillers where an existing cooling tower is suitable for reuse, the new chiller may be designed as water-cooled. For cooling loads over 100 tons but less than 250 tons, water cooled screw compressor chiller or centrifugal compressor chiller shall be used. Heat rejection equipment shall be rated at 105 degrees ambient.

AIR TERMINALS – 233600 Preferred source of reheat is hot water. Provide access panel upstream for cleaning. Steam reheat coils where required, shall be steam distribution type with sufficient pitch to



completely clear the coil in the event of trap failure. No copper tubes. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS – 237280 Exhaust Air Energy Recovery: Each 100-percent exhaust makeup air system that operates 24 hours per day and has a total outdoor air requirements exceeding 5,000 cfm shall include energy recovery hardware. This hardware shall be capable of recovering at least 50 percent of the potential cooling or heating effect of the exhaust air whenever the temperature difference between the exhaust and outside air exceeds 10 degrees F. Run-around coils shall be used in all instances except high latent loads, where desiccant

wheels may be used. Heat recovery systems shall be controlled to prevent overheating. If other opportunities

exist for heat recovery the Designer shall provide an energy cost analysis for the proposed system.

FANS – 233400 Fan Identification: All fan units shall be permanently marked to clearly identify the area served. Provide ventilation for battery chargers in housekeeping closets. CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS – 237300 Key Air Handling Unit Specifications: Air handling units over 2000 cfm and all 100 percent outside air ventilating units shall have the following features: Double wall galvanized construction with perforated inner wall. Two inch wall thickness--typical Four inch wall thickness in sections where the air temperature is less than 0 degrees F Less than one percent leakage per section at operating conditions. All coils supported on stainless steel racks to allow individual removal of coils Stainless steel drain pan below each coil. The coil drain pans drainage system shall be designed to handle the maximum static

pressure of the system. The water shall flow out of the pan at the specified maximum static pressure, without overflowing the pan.

Air handling units shall have door access to filters, heating and cooling coils, dampers, humidifiers, and fan. The Designer shall include in the plans the manufacturer recommended clearances for maintenance and repair work. The contract documents shall show the service space around all equipment. Panels shall be gasketed and air tight.

Fans shall not require shaft removal for bearing replacement. Vane axial fans above five inch static pressure shall have thrust restraints. Air handling units over 15000-cfm units shall be provided with interior service and

inspection lighting at each access door. Provide air handlers with a 35-percent efficient pre-filter and an 80-percent efficient final

filter. Provide cartridge style filters. Efficiencies shall be based on ASHRE standard 52. The Designer shall specify a set of filters upstream from heat recovery coils.



To maintain coil cleanliness, conserve energy and extend filter life, the selection of the filter area shall be based on a maximum face velocity in constant volume units of 350 FPM. In variable volume units the maximum design velocity at the filters shall be 500 fpm.

Steam preheat coils are required for entering air temperature below 35 degrees F. Preheat coils shall be integral face and bypass coils, 150# W.S.P. construction; Wing, Flo-con, or University approved equal. No copper tubes.

All heating coils shall be provided with an approved vacuum breaker and air vent. Chilled water coils shall be completely drainable through individual headers; Trane Type

D or University approved equal. Specify EWT and LWT to the cooling coil to provide minimum 12 degree F. delta T. Chilled water coils shall be a maximum of eight rows and shall be selected for maximum 500 FPM face velocity.

Hot water coils shall be completely drainable through individual headers. Specify EWT to the heating coil of 180 degrees F.

Provide piping connection detail showing valves, unions, control valves, flow metering devices and gauges.

Air handling units shall be of blow-thru configuration wherever possible. Where hot water heating coils are draw-thru, mixing vanes are required to prevent stratification.

Specify factory service level off-site training for two Facilities Operations technicians. All new air handling units shall be directly connected to the campus BACS network.

Refer to Appendix A23.2, SOP – Building Automation Control Systems for interface requirements.

Rooftop Air Conditioners: When other viable options are not available, rooftop equipment may be considered. The Designer shall locate the unit to minimize the adverse effects to the building

aesthetics. The Designer shall select unit and location to minimize noise impact on occupied spaces. FIBROUS-GLASS DUCTS – 233116.13 Prohibited Use: Fibrous-glass duct material shall not be specified. METAL DUCTS – 233113 Duct Drainage: Outside air intake chambers shall be furnished with water tight drain pans two inches minimum depth. An indirect drain line shall be designed to carry rain or melting snow to a nearby floor drain. At duct humidifiers, solder ductwork water tight five feet upstream and 25 feet

downstream of the ductwork. Pitch ductwork to a drain located at the humidifier. No duct or terminal box liner in section with humidifier.

All ducts exposed to weather shall be watertight. Duct System Classifications and Testing: The Designer shall determine static pressure ranges for each duct section in a system. Any sections expected to operate above 3.0-inches H2O of static pressure shall be identified as such on construction documents. The



Designer shall specify and witness duct leakage tests on supply and exhaust systems expected to operate above 3.0-inches H2

O of static pressure. The frequency and extent of testing to be determined by design engineer, and University.

Building Penetrations for Air Intake and Exhaust: The DESIGNER shall coordinate size and type of louvers, roof intake and relief hoods. Each intake shall be sized based on manufacturers criteria for no rain and snow penetration or carry-over into the air handling system. Ductwork Construction Criteria: No pipe or any other type of obstruction shall pass through a duct. Contract documents shall indicate duct transitions. Duct transitions at fan discharges

shall have a maximum slope of one in seven. Supply duct connections shall be made with a 30 degree to 45 degree take-offs in the direction of air flow. Tee connections shall be used only where necessary.

Flexible duct length shall not exceed six feet. Limit total sag to less than 1/2 inch per foot. Minimize bends in flexible duct, limit total bends on one branch to 90 degrees.

Firestopping sealants shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 07270. Refer also to Division One of the KU Design Standards.

The Designer shall coordinate the sealing of floor and wall penetrations. All ventilation ducts and related piping shall be independently supported from the building

structure. All horizontal ducts 48 inches or wider shall be rigidly and securely supported with trapeze hangers formed of rods and angle iron under duct, according to SMACNA standards.

All vertical ductwork shall be supported by structural members at each floor. Preferred insulation system is duct wrap or duct board. Criteria for Placement of Building Air Intakes: It is the responsibility of the Designer to locate the outside air intake away from sources of exhaust fumes such as loading docks, parking areas, heavily trafficked areas, cooling towers, incinerator stacks, fume hood stacks, and other stacks exhausting toxic or radioactive materials, nuisance odors, plumbing vents, emergency generator exhausts, and engine driven fire pumps exhausts. It is the responsibility of the Designer to locate building exhausts away from air intakes on

adjacent existing buildings. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – 230900 Responsibilities for Design: The Designer should be aware that the University has a contractual agreement with Johnson Controls, Inc. to provide all systems and equipment for installations of building automated controls systems campus-wide. The project Designer is responsible for development of an HVAC controls system design

that meets the specific needs of the site and/or building location of the project. Johnson Controls, Inc., the University’s controls system provider, has responsibility for

provision and startup of a system that conforms to the Designer’s requirements.



Minimum Requirements for Design Documents: The Designer is expected to provide the following documents as part of any HVAC design that includes DDC controls: Control Diagrams Description Of Operation and Sequence of Controls DDC Points Schedules Valve Schedules Damper Schedules Control Air Compressor and Dryer: The Designer shall use the following guidelines in completing projects with control air compressor and/or dryer requirements: For remodeling projects, the Designer shall have the air source tested for oil

contamination and dew point and determine the condition and capacity of the existing pneumatic temperature control system before connecting new controls to the system. At the point of connection, specify an air filter/regulating station that will include a coalescing oil/dirt filter, activated carbon filter, relief valve, isolation ball valves, and inlet and outlet pressure gauges.

If a new air source is required, specify a refrigerated dryer, adequately sized duplex compressor, oil-dirt filter, activated carbon filter, automatic tank drain, and automatic alternator.

Compressors (alternating, duplex) shall be sized to run a maximum of one-third of the time and shall have no more than 10 cycles per hour. The air dryer shall be sized for 100 percent compressor run time. Compressor sizing will be tested as a part of building commissioning.

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION – 230993 The Designer shall supplement specifications with necessary mechanical equipment control diagrams to clearly define sequences of operation required and responsibilities of mechanical and electrical subcontractors. Energy Considerations: The Designer shall use the following guidelines in completing projects with opportunities for energy conservation: Run Equipment Only When Needed: Schedule HVAC unit operation for occupied

periods. Run heating at night only to maintain internal temperature between 60 and 65 degrees F to prevent freezing. Start morning warm-up as late as possible to achieve design internal temperature by

occupancy time (optimal start control) taking into account residual temperature in space, outdoor temperature, and equipment capacity.

Do not use outdoor air for ventilation until the building is occupied, and then use psychometrically proper outdoor air quantities.

When on minimum outdoor air, do not use more than that recommended by applicable standards and codes.

Sequence Heating and Cooling: Do not supply both at the same time. Central fan systems shall use cool outdoor air in sequence between heating and cooling. The zoning and system selection should eliminate or at least minimize simultaneous

heating and cooling. The only exception to this would be for areas that require



dehumidification. Provide Only the Heating or Cooling Actually Needed. In general, the supply

temperature of hot and cold air (or water) should be reset according to actual need. This is especially important on systems or zones that allow simultaneous heating and cooling.

Supply Heating and Cooling from the Most Efficient Source: Use free or low cost energy sources first, then use higher cost sources if necessary.

All energy consuming systems shall have controls on them to optimize energy consumption.

Electric heat or reheat is prohibited. Space setpoints shall be 76˚F (summer), and 69˚F (winter). Fume Hood Control: Laboratory airflow control components shall be specified to be supplied by Johnson Controls, the Universities temperature control systems provider, using Phoenix Controls equipment. The temperature control contractor shall be responsible for all of the temperature controls

and the laboratory airflow controls, thus creating a single source for responsibility. The energy management system shall be required to be furnished with interface panels,

software and programming necessary to communicate with the laboratory airflow control DDC panels and also communicate this information back to the BACS System campus backbone for remote monitoring. The interface would be required to accomplish the following: Receive all critical alarms. Monitor current conditions of all points Change set points. Trend critical data. Modifying point data (alarm limits, etc.) Override output points in emergency situations. The laboratory airflow control system shall be required to be a completely

engineered, cataloged and factory coordinated by a single manufacturer; with the system installed by and set up by an authorized factory representative.

Utilities Metering and Controls Interfaces: The Designer shall review Appendix A23.2, for a discussion of the University’s use of BACS for remote monitoring and metering. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION - 230800 General Requirements: The Designer should be aware that the University may elect to retain the services of an independent commissioning agent for projects that involve the installation of utilities systems. As early in the design phase of a project as is possible, the Designer shall determine,

through discussion with the University, if the project team will include a commissioning agent.

The Designer shall specify detailed testing, balancing, and adjusting procedures by an independent agency only if independent commissioning is not planned for the project.

Refer to the Appendix A15.2, Standard of Practice - Commissioning for a discussion of



the project commissioning means, methods, and objectives. Systems Testing – Non-Commissioned Projects Piping Systems Tests: Detailed requirements for pipe system cleaning, flushing,

disinfecting, and pressure and vacuum leakage testing should be included in the applicable specification sections.

Ductwork Systems Testing: Detailed requirements for duct system leakage testing shall be included in the applicable specifications sections for those duct systems whose pressure class warrants testing.

Automatic Sprinkler System Testing: Current NFPA test procedures shall be used for testing automatic sprinkler systems.

Tests shall be required upon completion of controls installation to certify adequate compressor sizing and integrity of control air system.

The temperature control contractor will be responsible to provide needed assistance to the balancing contractor during the balancing of the HVAC systems.

The balancing contractor shall be subcontracted through the general contractor, not the mechanical contractor.

The balancing contractor shall be pre-qualified through the Division of Architectural Services.

Specify 10 percent tolerances on air and water systems. Provide air balance table, room air changes per hour, design temperatures and humidity

percentages, and air flows on contract documents. End of Document: G:\DESIGN\DCMPJE\STANDARDS\Stds_pje_Div-23.doc `-

SECTION 230900-1 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

University of Kansas 230900-1 Project Title A-xxxxxx

1. Part 1 – General

Table of Contents

Part 1 – General 1.1 Related Documents 1.2 Definitions 1.3 BMS System Description 1.4 References 1.5 Work By Others 1.6 Submittals 1.7 Record Documentation 1.8 Warranty Part 2 – Products 2.1 System Architecture 2.2 Operator Workstation 2.3 Operator Interface 2.4 Application Nodes 2.5 Application Software 2.6 Field Devices 2.7 Specialty Items Part 3 – Execution 3.1 Installation Practices 3.2 Training 3.3 Commissioning Requirements 3.4 Coordination 3.5 Sequences 3.6 Point Lists

1.1 Related Documents

A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Building Management System (BMS) Contractor, Johnson Controls, Inc. (JCI). Pricing shall be based on the current State of Kansas contract. Owner may contract directly with JCI, or Owner may request that JCI subcontract to the General Contractor.

B. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades.

C. The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules and Drawings.

D. If the BMS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design team.

1.2 Definitions

A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.



B. Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.

C. Building Management System (BMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Division BMS Contractor and to be interfaced to the associated work of other related trades.

D. BMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the BMS work.

E. Control Sequence: An BMS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.

F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the BMS software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.

G. BMS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BMS digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.

H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BMS network.

I. BMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BMS as required by this Division.

J. Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the associated required services ready for operation.

K. PC: IBM-compatible Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer

L. Furnish: The term “Furnish” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean supply at the BMS Contractor’s cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BMS Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BMS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and document.

M. Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the BMS wiring and terminations.

N. Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite and mount.

O. Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BMS network nodes.

P. Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project



specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BMS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BMS configurations.

Q. The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being referenced.

R. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents.

S. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division: ADC - Analog to Digital Converter AI - Analog Input AN - Application Node ANSI - American National Standards Institute AO - Analog Output ASCII - American Standard Code for Information

Interchange ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air

Conditioning Engineers AWG - American Wire Gauge CPU - Central Processing Unit CRT - Cathode Ray Tube DAC - Digital to Analog Converter DDC - Direct Digital Control DI - Digital Input DO - Digital Output EEPROM - Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMI - Electromagnetic Interference FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System GUI - Graphical User Interface HOA - Hand-Off-Auto ID - Identification IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers I/O - Input/Output LAN - Local Area Network LCD - Liquid Crystal Display LED - Light Emitting Diode MCC - Motor Control Center NC - Normally Closed NIC - Not In Contract NO - Normally Open OWS - Operator Workstation OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature PC - Personal Computer RAM - Random Access Memory RF - Radio Frequency RFI - Radio Frequency Interference RH - Relative Humidity



ROM - Read Only Memory RTD - Resistance Temperature Device SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw SPST - Single Pole Single Throw XVGA - Extended Video Graphics Adapter TBA - To Be Advised TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TTD - Thermistor Temperature Device UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAC - Volts, Alternating Current VAV - Variable Air Volume VDC - Volts, Direct Current WAN - Wide Area Network

1.3 BMS Description

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BMS will perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.

B. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The primary point of interface on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser.

C. All work on this project shall be loaded onto the existing Johnson Controls server located in the Computer Services Facility. Database will be updated to reflect all new systems resulting from the execution of this project for consistent user interface and data archiving across the JCI BACS network.

D. The work of the single BMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.

E. The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned BMS.

F. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software, standards and configurations to be provided for this Project.

G. Manage and coordinate the BMS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or delay the work of associated trades.



H. The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services: 1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions. 2. Enterprise-level information and control access. 3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval,

and reporting functions. 4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS functions. 5. Offsite monitoring and management access.

6. Energy management 7. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems.

1.4 Work By Others

A) The demarcation of work and responsibilities between the BMS Contractor and other related trades shall be as outlined in the BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX WORK

FURNISH INSTALL Low Volt.

WIRING/TUBE LINE

POWER BMS low voltage and communication wiring

BMS BMS BMS N/A

VAV box nodes BMS 23 BMS 26 BMS conduits and raceway BMS BMS BMS BMS Automatic dampers BMS 23 N/A N/A Manual valves 23 23 N/A N/A Automatic valves BMS 23 BMS N/A VAV boxes 23 23 N/A N/A Pipe insertion devices and taps including thermowells, flow and pressure stations.

BMS 23 BMS BMS

BMS Current Switches. BMS BMS BMS N/A BMS Control Relays BMS BMS BMS N/A Power distribution system monitoring interfaces

26 26 BMS 26

BMS interface with Chiller controls BMS BMS BMS BMS Chiller controls interface with BMS 23 23 BMS 26 BMS interface with Classroom unit controls

BMS BMS BMS 26

Classroom unit controls interface with BMS

23 23 BMS 26

ADD OTHER THIRD PARTY EQUIPMENT HERE

N/A N/A N/A N/A

All BMS Nodes, equipment, housings, enclosures and panels.

BMS BMS BMS BMS

Smoke Detectors 26 26 26 26 Fire/Smoke Dampers 23 23 BMS 26 Fire Dampers 23 23 N/A N/A Chiller Flow Switches 23 23 BMS N/A Boiler wiring 23 23 23 23 Water treatment system 23 23 23 26



VFDs 23 26 BMS 26 Refrigerant monitors 23 BMS BMS 26 Computer Room A/C Unit field-mounted controls

23* 23 BMS 26

Fire Alarm shutdown relay interlock wiring

26 26 26 26

Fire Alarm smoke control relay interlock wiring

26 26 BMS 26

Fireman’s Smoke Control Override Panel 26 26 26 26 Fan Coil Unit controls BMS BMS BMS 26 Unit Heater controls BMS BMS BMS 26 Packaged RTU space mounted controls 23* BMS BMS 26 Packaged RTU factory-mounted controls 23* 23 BMS 26 Packaged RTU field-mounted controls BMS BMS BMS 26 Cooling Tower Vibration Switches 23 23 26 26 Cooling Tower Level Control Devices 23 23 26 26 Cooling Tower makeup water control devices

23 23 26 26

Pool Dehumidification Unit Controls 23* 23 BMS 26 Starters, HOA switches 26 26 N/A 26 Control damper actuators BMS BMS BMS 26

1.5 Submittals

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 1. The BMS contractor shall submit a list of all shop drawings with submittals dates

within 30 days of contract award. 2. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall

only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved by the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance.

3. Allow 23 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and Engineer in the scheduling of the total BMS work.

4. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BMS Contractor where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.

5. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item description.

6. The BMS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review. 7. At a minimum, submit the following:

a. BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.

b. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.



c. Points schedule for each point in the BMS, including: Point Type, Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.

d. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus. e. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying

quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features. f. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper

provided under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type.

g. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.

h. Room Schedule including a separate line for each VAV box and/or terminal unit indicating location and address

i. Details of all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. j. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo

and description for all products including software.

1.7 Record Documentation

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to

the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the following for the BMS provided: a. Table of contents. b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record

drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal.

Provide “first draft” of as-built system record drawings to project commissioning agent no later than project completion date.

c. Manufacturers product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software.

d. System Operator’s manuals. e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences. f. BMS network diagrams. g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.

2. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.

1.8 Warranty

A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:



1. Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS. 2. If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written

notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS Contractor at the cost of the BMS Contractor.

3. Warranty work shall be done during BMS Contractor’s normal business hours.

2. Part 2 – Products

2.1 General Description

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BMS shall support open communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided networks.

B. The Building Management System shall consist of the following: 1. Standalone Network Automation Engine(s) 2. Field Equipment Controller(s) 3. Input/Output Module(s) 4. Local Display Device(s) 5. Portable Operator's Terminal(s) 6. Distributed User Interface(s) 7. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment 7. Other components required for a complete and working BMS

C. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while re-using existing controls equipment.

D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. 1. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the

execution of control strategies at other operational devices. 2. The System shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot.

E. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution.

F. The System shall comply with (UL) 864 (UUKL) Ninth Edition Smoke Control Listing including the UL 864 Ninth Edition Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems. 1. The System shall comply with the following NFPA Codes and Standards as

applicable: a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code b. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code



c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code d. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and

Ventilation Systems e. NFPA 92B Guide for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and

Large Areas 2. The System shall comply with the following International Code Council (ICC)

Codes: a. Building Officials and code Administrators International (BOMA) model

code b. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) model code c. Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) regulations

G. Acceptable Manufacturers 1) Johnson Controls Metasys.

2.2 BMS Architecture

A. Automation Network 1. The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet

TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products available through normal PC vendor channels.

2. The BMS shall network multiple user interface clients, automation engines, system controllers and application-specific controllers. Provide application and data server(s) as required for systems operation.

3. The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network communication.

4. Network Automation Engines (NAE) shall reside on the automation network. 5. The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks.

Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices.

B. Control Network 1. Network Automation Engines (NAE) shall provide supervisory control over the

control network and shall support all three (3) of the following communication protocols, as necessary for the specific project: a. BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9

The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.

The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).

b. LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-10a).

c. The Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus. 2. Control networks shall provide either “Peer-to-Peer,” Master-Slave, or Supervised

Token Passing communications, and shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 9600 baud.

3. DDC Controllers shall reside on the control network.



4. Control network communication protocol shall be BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135.

C. Integration 1. Hardwired

a. Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another via hardwired connections.

b. There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to be integrated between the systems.

2. Direct Protocol (Integrator Panel) a. The BMS system shall include appropriate hardware equipment and

software to allow bi-directional data communications between the BMS system and 3rd party manufacturers’ control panels. The BMS shall receive, react to, and return information from multiple building systems, including but not limited to the chillers, boilers, variable frequency drives, power monitoring system, and medical gas.

b. All data required by the application shall be mapped into the Automation Engine’s database, and shall be transparent to the operator.

c. Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time interoperability with BMS software features such as: Control Software, Energy Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Local Area Network Communications.

3. BACnet Protocol Integration - BACnet a. The neutral protocol used between systems will be BACnet over Ethernet

and comply with the ASHRAE BACnet standard 135-2003. b. A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall

be provided for all BACnet system devices. c. The ability to command, share point object data, change of state (COS) data

and schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.

2.3 User Interface

a. Existing.

2.4 Network Automation Engines (NAE)

A. Network Automation Engine (NAE 55XX)

1. The standard NAE provided at the University of Kansas shall be an NAE 55XX unless the application requires that a different model be utilized. Confirm with KU DCM and FO representatives on each specific project. The Network Automation Engine (NAE) shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory controller. The NAE shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Automation Engines.

2. Automation network – The NAE shall reside on the automation network and shall support a subnet of system controllers.



3. User Interface – Each NAE shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI. a. The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NAE. Systems that

require a local copy of the system database on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.

b. The NAE shall support up a minimum of four (4) concurrent users. c. The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data

through one NAE. d. Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service

Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up shall also have total system access through one NAE.

e. Systems that require the user to address more than one NAE to access all system information are not acceptable.

f. The NAE shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The graphics capability shall be imbedded in the NAE.

g. Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.

h. The web based UI shall support the following functions using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer: Configuration Commissioning Data Archiving Monitoring Commanding System Diagnostics

i. Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable.

j. The NAE shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems.

4. Processor – The NAE shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The NAE shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. NAE size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.

5. Memory – Each NAE shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level devices.

6. Hardware Real Time Clock – The NAE shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-time clock.

7. The NAE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power - On/Off b. Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet Traffic c. Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100 Mbps d. FC Bus A – Normal Communications/No Field Communications e. FC Bus B – Normal Communications/No Field Communications f. Peer Communication – Data Traffic between NAE Devices



g. Run – NAE Running/NAE in Startup/NAE Shutting Down/Software Not Running

h. Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery Not Installed i. 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC j. Fault – General Fault k. Modem RX – NAE Modem Receiving Data l. Modem TX – NAE Modem Transmitting Data

8. Communications Ports – The NAE shall provide the following ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable operator’s terminals. a. Two (2) USB port b. Two (2) URS-232 serial data communication port c. Two (2) RS-485 port d. One (1) Ethernet port

9. Diagnostics – The NAE shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network Automation Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.

10. Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The NAE shall continue to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. a. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal

system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash memory.

b. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence.

11. Certification – The NAE shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 12. Controller network – The NAE shall support the following communication

protocols on the controller network: a. The NAE shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE

SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network. The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the

BTL Label. The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building

Controller (B-BC). A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for the NAE. The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to

bidding. The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 control devices.

b. The NAE shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10. All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified.



The NAE shall support a minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control devices.

c. The NAE shall support the Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus. The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 N2 control devices. The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) Standard

RS-485. The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the NAE is the

master. The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for polling

frequency. The Bus shall be optically isolated from the NAE. The Bus shall support the Metasys Integrator System.

2.5 DDC System Controllers

A. Field Equipment Controller (FEC X610) 1. The Field Equipment Controller (FEC) shall be a fully user-programmable, digital

controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol. a. The FEC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE

SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network. The FEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the

BTL Label. The FEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application

Specific Controller (B-ASC). A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for the FEC. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to

bidding. 2. The FEC shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary

conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational sequences. Suppliers using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals.

3. Controllers shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only shall not be acceptable.

4. The FEC shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.

5. The FEC shall include a removable base to allow pre-wiring without the controller.

6. The FEC shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power On b. Power Off c. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation d. No Faults



e. Device Fault f. Field Controller Bus - Normal Data Transmission g. Field Controller Bus - No Data Transmission h. Field Controller Bus - No Communication i. Sensor-Actuator Bus - Normal Data Transmission j. Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Data Transmission k. Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Communication

7. The FEC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points.

8. The FEC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:

Analog Input, Voltage Mode Analog Input, Current Mode Analog Input, Resistive Mode Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode

b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following: Dry Contact Maintained Mode Pulse Counter Mode

c. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following Analog Output, Voltage Mode Analog Output, current Mode

d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following: 24 VAC Triac

e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following: Analog Output, Voltage Mode Binary Output Mode

9. The FEC shall have the ability to reside on a Field Controller Bus (FC Bus). a. The FC Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus

supporting BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. b. The FC Bus shall support communications between the FECs and the NAE. c. The FC Bus shall also support Input/Output Module (IOM)

communications with the FEC and with the NAE. d. The FC Bus shall support a minimum of 100 IOMs and FECs in any

combination. e. The FC Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 23,000 Ft. between the

FEC and the furthest connected device. 10. The FEC shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and

actuators over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus). a. The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus

supporting BACnet Standard Protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. b. The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices per trunk. c. The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the

FEC and the furthest connected device. 11. The FEC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving

direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the FC Bus or the SA Bus.



12. The FEC shall support, but not be limited to, the following: a. Hot water, chilled water/central plant applications b. Built-up air handling units for special applications C. Terminal units c. Special programs as required for systems control

2.6 Field Devices/Controllers

A. Input/Output Module (IOM X710)

1. The Input/Output Module (IOM) provides additional inputs and outputs for use in the FEC.

2. The IOM shall communicate with the FEC over the FC Bus or the SA Bus. 3. The IOM shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-

135, Clause 9 on the controller network. a. The IOM shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL

Label. b. The IOM shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific

Controller (B-ASC). c. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for the FEC. d. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

4. The IOM shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.

5. The IOM shall have a minimum of 4 points to a maximum of 17 points. 6. The IOM shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:

a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following: Analog Input, Voltage Mode Analog Input, Current Mode Analog Input, Resistive Mode Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode

b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following: Dry Contact Maintained Mode Pulse Counter Mode

c. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following Analog Output, Voltage Mode Analog Output, current Mode

d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following: 24 VAC Triac

e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following: Analog Output, Voltage Mode Binary Output Mode

7. The IOM shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power On



b. Power Off c. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation d. No Faults e. Device Fault f. Normal Data Transmission g. No Data Transmission h. No Communication

B. Networked Thermostat (TEC 26X6) 1. Networked thermostat shall be capable of controlling a variety of terminal HVAC

systems or similar equipment. Exact model of TEC shall be determined by project. 2. The TEC shall communicate over the Field Controller Bus using BACnet Standard

MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9. 3. The TEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.

a. The TEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).

b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the TEC.

c. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. 4. The Networked Thermostat shall support remote read/write and parameter

adjustment from the web based User Interfaceable through a Network Automation Engine.

5. The Networked Thermostat shall include an intuitive User Interface providing plain text messages. a. Two line, 8 character backlit display b. LED indicators for Fan, Heat, and Cool status c. Five (5) User Interface Keys

Mode Fan Override Degrees C/F Up/Down

d. The display shall continuously scroll through the following parameters: Room Temperature System Mode Schedule Status – Occupied/Unoccupied/Override Applicable Alarms

6. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to support any one of the following inputs: a. Integral Indoor Air Temperature Sensor b. Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor c. Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED

Indicator d. Two configurable binary inputs

7. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to support any one of the following outputs: a. Three Speed Fan Control



b. Two On/Off c. Two Floating d. Two Proportional (0 to 10V)

8. The Networked Thermostat shall provide a minimum of six (6) levels of keypad lockout.

9. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to adjust the following parameters: a. Adjustable Temporary Occupancy from 0 to 24 hours b. Adjustable heating/cooling deadband from 2º F to 5º F c. Adjustable heating/cooling cycles per hour from 4 to 8

10. The Networked Thermostat shall employ nonvolatile electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) for all adjustable parameters.

C. VAV Modular Assembly (VMA 26X0)

1. The VAV Modular Assembly shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressure-independent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct applications.

2. The VMA shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. a. The VMA shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific

Controller (B-ASC). b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for the VMA. c. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

3. The VAV Modular Assembly shall communicate over the FC Bus using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

4. The VAV Modular Assembly shall have internal electrical isolation for AC power, DC inputs, and MS/TP communications. An externally mounted isolation transformer shall not be acceptable.

5. The VAV Modular Assembly shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure transducer and damper actuator. All components shall be connected and mounted as a single assembly that can be removed as one piece.

6. The VAV Modular Assembly shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.

7. The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of stroking 90 degrees in 30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed commissioning and troubleshooting tasks.

8. The controller shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral dead-ended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance-free and shall not require air filters.

9. Each controller shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects.

10. The controller shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space temperature control loops.



11. Each controller shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve control and controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning reduces commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-tuning loops to compensate for seasonal or other load changes.

12. The controller shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA configuration files, both locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller parameters.

13. Control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA non-volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent operation in the event of communication failure.

14. The controller firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus to minimize costs of feature enhancements.

15. The controller shall provide fail-soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by automatically reverting to a pressure-dependent control mode.

16. The controller shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic recalculation of box flow pickup gain (“K” factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to the box minimum and maximum airflow setpoints.

17. Controller performance shall be self-documenting via on-board diagnostics. These diagnostics shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each control loop’s sample interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and document system performance. The VMA shall calculate exponentially weighted moving averages (EWMA) for each of the following. These metrics shall be available to the end user for efficient management of the VAV terminals.

Absolute temperature loop error Signed temperature loop error Absolute airflow loop error Signed airflow loop error Average damper actuator duty cycle

18. The controller shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones. The error conditions shall consist of:

Unreliable space temperature sensor Unreliable differential pressure sensor Starved box Actuator stall Insufficient cooling Insufficient heating

The controller shall provide a flow test function to view damper position vs. flow in a graphical format. The information would alert the user to check damper position. The VMA would also provide a method to calculate actuator duty cycle as an indicator of damper actuator runtime.

19. The controller shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow Based on the percent of outdoor air in the primary air stream.



20. The controller shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the airflow in the heating sequence.

21. Inputs: a. Analog inputs with user defined ranges shall monitor the following analog

signals, without the addition of equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet: 0-10 VDC Sensors 1000ohm RTDs NTC Thermistors

b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate false signals resulting from input “bouncing.”

c. For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and output circuits.

d. Provide side loop application for humidity control. 22. Outputs

a. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs: 0-10 VDC

b. Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC.

c. For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and other output circuits.

23. Application Configuration a. The VAV Modular Assembly shall be configured with a software tool that

provides a simple Question/Answer format for developing applications and downloading.

24. Sensor Support a. The VAV Modular Assembly shall communicate over the Sensor-Actuator

Bus (SA Bus) with a Network Sensor. b. The VMA shall support an LCD display room sensor. c. The VMA shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog

input requirements. d. The VMA shall support humidity sensors defined by the AI side loop.

D. Network Sensors (NS-XXX700X)

1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as required by the systems sequence of operations: a. Zone Temperature b. Zone Humidity c. Zone Setpoint d. Discharge Air Temperature

2. The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

3. The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. a. The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors (B-SS).



b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NS.

c. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. 4. The Network Zone Sensors shall include the following items:

a. A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity and Setpoint

b. An LED to indicate the status of the Override feature c. A button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit and Celsius d. A button to initiate a timed override command e. Available in either surface mount or wall mount f. Available with either screw terminals or phone jack

5. The Network Discharge Air Sensors shall include the following: a. 4 inch or 8 inch duct insertion probe b. 10 foot pigtail lead c. Dip Switches for programmable address selection d. Ability to provide an averaging temperature from multiple locations e. Ability to provide a selectable temperature from multiple locations

2.7 System Tools

A. System Configuration Tool (SCT)

1. The Configuration Tool software is existing and shall be utilized for the development of software on this project.

2.8 Input Devices

A. General Requirements 1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input

devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements.

B. Temperature Sensors 1. General Requirements:

a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations.

b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.

c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion:

Point Type Accuracy

Chilled Water + .5F.

Room Temp + .5F.

Duct Temperature + .5F.

All Others + .75F.



2. Room Temperature Sensors a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:

Setpoint reset slide switch providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range. Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches. A momentary override request push button for activation of after-

hours operation. Analog thermometer.

3. Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and four button keypad

with the following capabilities: Display room and outside air temperatures. Display and adjust room comfort setpoint. Display and adjust fan operation status. Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of

after-hours operation. Display controller mode. Password selectable adjustment of setpoint and override modes.

4. Thermo wells a. When thermo wells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a

complete assembly, including wellhead and Greenfield fitting. b. Thermo wells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the

system working pressure. c. Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2” NFT

saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. d. Thermo wells shall be constructed of 326 stainless steel.

5. Outside Air Sensors a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental

conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.

b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element.

c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.

6. Duct Mount Sensors a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the

duct, and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly, including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used.

7. Averaging Sensors a. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air

temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used.



b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing points per 12-foot long segment.

c. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing string.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Setra.

C. Humidity Sensors 1. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer

Design. The sensor element shall resist service contamination. 2. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero

adjustments, a 2-wire isolated loop powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output.

3. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead loss and Analog to Digital conversion. 3% between 20% and 80% RH @ 77 Deg F unless specified elsewhere.

4. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel bushings.

5. A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated.

6. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Veris Industries, and Mamac.

D. Differential Pressure Transmitters 1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:

a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input.

b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal.

c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection.

d. A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

2. Low Differential Water Pressure Applications (0” - 20” w.c.) a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and

transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water pressure sensing points.

b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications:



.01-20” w.c. input differential pressure range. 4-20 mA output. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra and Mamac. 3. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.)

a. The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications with the following exceptions: Differential pressure range 10” w.c. to 300 PSI. Reference Accuracy: +1% of full span (includes non-linearity,

hysteresis, and repeatability). b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve

assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra and Mamac. 4. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” w.c.)

a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points.

b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: -1.00 to +1.00 w.c. input differential pressure ranges. (Select range

appropriate for system application) 4-20 mA output. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls and Setra. 5. Low Differential Air Pressure Applications (0” to 5” w.c.)

a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points.

b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: (0.00 - 1.00” to 5.00”) w.c. input differential pressure ranges. (Select

range appropriate for system application.) 4-20 mA output. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls and Setra. 6. Medium Differential Air Pressure Applications (5” to 21” w.c.)

a. The pressure transmitter shall be similar to the Low Air Pressure Transmitter, except that the performance specifications are not as severe.



Differential pressure transmitters shall be provided that meet the following performance requirements: Zero & span: (c/o F.S./Deg. F): .04% including linearity, hysteresis

and repeatability. Accuracy: 1% F.S. (best straight line) Static Pressure Effect: 0.5%

F.S. (to 100 PSIG. Thermal Effects: <+.033 F.S./Deg. F. over 40F. to 100F. (calibrated

at 70F.). b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve

assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided.

c. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls and Setra. E. Flow Monitoring

1. Air Flow Monitoring a. Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Stations

At the inlet of each fan and near the exit of the inlet sound trap, airflow traverse probes shall be provided that shall continuously monitor the fan air volumes and system velocity pressure.

Each traverse probe shall be of a dual manifolded, cylindrical, type 3003 extruded aluminum configuration, having an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction. The multiple total pressure manifold shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching airflow. The manifold should not have forward projecting sensors into the air stream. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tops on the opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as + 20 in the approaching air stream.

The airflow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presence in the air stream. Each airflow-measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing.

Airflow measuring stations shall be manufactured by Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air Systems, Inc., Ebtron, or Dietrich Standard.

b. Single Probe Air Flow Measuring Sensor The single probe airflow-measuring sensor shall be duct mounted

with an adjustable sensor insertion length of up to eight inches. The transmitter shall produce a 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal linear to air velocity. The sensor shall be a hot wire anemometer and utilize two temperature sensors and a heater element temperature. The other sensor shall measure the downstream air temperature. The temperature differential shall be directly related to airflow velocity.

c. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations



Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results in accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the ASHRAE Handbook of fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation Handbook.

Airflow measuring stations shall be fabricated of 14-gauge galvanized steel welded casing with 90 Deg. connecting flanges in configuration and size equal to that of the duct into which it is mounted. Each station shall be complete with an air directionalizer and parallel cell profile suppressor (3/4” maximum cell) across the entering air stream and mechanically fastened to the casing in such a way to withstand velocities up to 6000 feet per minute. This air directionalizer and parallel cell honeycomb suppressor shall provide 98% free area, equalize the velocity profile, and eliminate turbulent and rotational flow from the air stream prior to the measuring point.

The total pressure measurement side (high side) will be designed and spaced to the Industrial Ventilation Manual 26th Edition, Page 9-5. The self-averaging manifolding will be manufactured of brass and copper components.

The static pressure sensing probes (low side) shall be bullet-nosed shaped, per detailed radius, as illustrated in Industrial Ventilation Manual 26th Edition, Page 9-5.

The main take-off point from both the total pressure and the static pressure manifolds must be symmetrical.

Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for connection to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each unit casing, listing model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity.

Installation Considerations

(i) The maximum allowable pressure loss through the Flow and Static Pressure elements shall not exceed .065” w.c. at 1000 feet per minute, or .23” w.c. at 2000 feet per minute. Each unit shall measure the airflow rate within an accuracy of plus 2% as determined by U.S. – GSA certification tests, and shall contain a minimum of one total pressure sensor per 36 square inches of unit measuring area.

(ii) The units shall have a self-generated sound rating of less than NC40, and the sound level within the duct shall not be amplified nor shall additional sound be generated.

(iii) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.

(iv) Where control dampers are shown as part of the airflow measuring station, opposed blade precision controlled volume dampers integral to the station and complete with actuator, pilot positioner, and linkage shall be provided.



(v) Stations shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published requirements, and in accordance with ASME Guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.

Acceptable manufacturers: Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air, Ebtron, and Johnson Controls.

d. Static Pressure Traverse Probe Duct static traverse probes shall be provided where required to

monitor duct static pressure. The probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along exterior surface of the cylindrical probe.

Acceptable manufacturers: Cleveland Controls e. Shielded Static Air Probe

A shielded static pressure probe shall be provided at each end of the building. The probe shall have multiple sensing ports, an impulse suppression chamber, and airflow shielding. A suitable probe for indoor and outdoor locations shall be provided.

2. Water Flow Monitoring Water flow meters shall be electromagnetic type with integral

microprocessor-Based electronics. The meter shall have an accuracy of 0.25%.

Acceptable manufacturers: Onicon F. Power Monitoring Devices

1. Current Measurement (Amps) a. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a

current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System.

b. Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps. Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz. Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL. UL recognized. Five amp secondary. Select current ration as appropriate for application. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

c. Current Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include: 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps. Manufactured to UL 1244. Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%. Minimum load resistance 30kOhm. Input 0-20 Amps. Output 4-20 mA. Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24

VDC +5%). Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries



G. Smoke Detectors

1. Ionization type air duct detectors shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in Division 26 for installation under Division 23. All wiring for air duct detectors shall be provided under Division 26, Fire Alarm System.

H. Status and Safety Switches 1. General Requirements

a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the BMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment.

2. Current Sensing Switches a. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry

and a dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range.

b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads.

c. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status.

d. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries 3. Air Filter Status Switches

a. Differential pressure switches used to monitor air filter status shall be of the automatic reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120VAC.

b. A complete installation kit shall be provided, including: static pressure tops, tubing, fittings, and air filters.

c. Provide appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.

d. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Cleveland Controls

4. Air Flow Switches a. Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated mercury

switches or snap acting micro-switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.

b. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Cleveland Controls 5. Air Pressure Safety Switches

a. Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120VAC.

b. Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.

c. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Cleveland Controls 6. Water Flow Switches

a. Water flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74.



7. Low Temperature Limit Switches a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with

Double Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 26 amps at 120VAC.

b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 23 feet in length and shall react to the coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures.

c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the air stream.

d. The low temperature limit switch shall be equal to Johnson Controls A70.

2.9 Output Devices

A. Actuators 1. General Requirements

a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the System Description section.

2. Electronic Damper Actuators a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount. b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the

sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator manufacturer’s recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to allow manual positioning.

c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than 23 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

d. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two-position actuators, as specified in sequences of operations as “quick acting,” shall move full stroke within 20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick acting.

e. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Mamac. 3. Electronic Valve Actuators

a. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer.



b. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator.

c. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve close-off against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be sized Based on valve manufacturer’s recommendations for flow and pressure differential. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless specified with mechanical spring return in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction.

d. Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator (except terminal valves) shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

e. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop the associated pump or chiller.

f. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls B. Control Dampers

1. The BMS Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers. All automatic dampers shall be sized for the application by the BMS Contractor or as specifically indicated on the Drawings.

2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.

3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required.

4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60”. Damper blades shall be 26-gauge minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be 26-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be made of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomer seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48”x48” size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per square foot when closed against 4” w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500.

5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 2300 FPM or



system pressure exceeds 2.5” w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6” w.g. Acceptable manufacturers are Johnson Controls D-7250 D-1250 or D-1300, Ruskin CD50, and Vent Products 5650.

6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face velocities of 2300 FPM or below. Acceptable manufacturers are: Johnson Controls D-2600, Ruskin CD36, and Vent Products 5800.

7. Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive at least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist.

C. Control Relays 1. Control Pilot Relays

a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips.

b. Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount. c. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for

application. d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC. e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button. f. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Lectro

2. Lighting Control Relays a. Lighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts. b. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC. c. The coil shall be a split low-voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact

armature to the ON or OFF latched position. d. Lighting control relays shall be controlled by:

Pulsed Tri-state Output – Preferred method. Pulsed Paired Binary Outputs. A Binary Input to the Facility Management System shall monitor

integral status contacts on the lighting control relay. Relay status contacts shall be of the “dry-contact” type.

e. The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change-of-state, and so that multiple same state commands will simply maintain the commanded state. Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF position.

D. Control Valves 1. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear

heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification.

2. Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per



manufacturer’s recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 PSI. Valves (3-way) serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 5 PSI. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 2 PSIG pressure drop, but no more than a 5 PSI drop.

3. Ball valves shall be used for hot and chilled water applications, water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units except those described hereinafter.

4. Modulating plug water valves of the single-seat type with equal percentage flow characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated on the valve schedule. Valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.

5. Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than modulating plug valves, and for all two-position, open/close applications. In-line and/or three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble-tight.

6. Pressure independent delta-p valves may be used for hydronic heating applications.

E. External Manual Override Stations 1. External manual override stations shall provide the following:

a. An integral HAND/OFF/AUTO switch shall override the controlled device pilot relay.

b. A status input to the Facility Management System shall indicate whenever the switch is not in the automatic position.

c. A Status LED shall illuminate whenever the output is ON. d. An Override LED shall illuminate whenever the HOA switch is in either the

HAND or OFF position. e. Contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VAC.

F. Electronic/Pneumatic Transducers 1. Electronic to Pneumatic transducers shall provide:

a. Output: 3-23 PSIG. b. Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC. c. Manual output adjustment. d. Pressure gauge. e. External replaceable supply air filter. f. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Mamac

2.10 Miscellaneous Devices

A. Variable Frequency Motor Speed Control Drives



1. Variable frequency drives shall be Danfoss, supplied by Johnson Controls. Provide 3-contactor bypass with integral disconnect.

B. Local Control Panels 1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS

manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.

2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted.

3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals.

4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped. 6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure,

fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.

C. Power Supplies 1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load

shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply. 2. Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz. 3. Output: 24 VDC. 4. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change. 5. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change. 6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak. 7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to

the power supply. 8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply. 9. When the application is life safety or mission critical, provide an uninterruptible

power supply of capacity and duration sufficient to maintain operation of system.

D. Thermostats 1. Electric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided for unit heaters,

cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All these items shall be provided with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all room-type instruments shall match and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be manufacturer’s standard finish.

3. Part 3 – Performance / Execution



3.1 BMS Specific Requirements

A. Graphic Displays 1. Graphics will be developed for the project will be representative of the systems

controlled by the BMS. Floor plans will be provided by the project Architect/Engineer and will be used to develop floor-level graphics to speed recognition and response for operation of BMS. Level of graphics capability will be based on the type of system controlled.

a. Provide floor plan(s) defining spaces (with University approved numbering) that are served by each air handling unit. b. Provide schematic drawing showing the unit configuration and control devices for each air handling unit.

B. Custom Reports: 1. As required.

C. Actuation / Control Type 1. Primary Equipment

a. Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein. b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

2. Air Handling Equipment a. All air handers shall be controlled with a HVAC-DDC Controller b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

3. Terminal Equipment: a. Terminal Units (VAV, UV, etc.) shall have electric damper and valve

actuation. b. All Terminal Units shall be controlled with HVAC-DDC Controller)

3.2 Installation Practices

A. BMS Wiring 1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation

of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.

2. All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer recommendations.

3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.

4. Class 2 Wiring a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless

otherwise specified.



b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.

5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

B. BMS Line Voltage Power Source 1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken

from panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26. 2. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for

any other purposes. 3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.

C. BMS Raceway 1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in

this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”. 2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect. 3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the

building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

D. Penetrations 1. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS conduits and

raceways. 2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved fire resistive sealant. 3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or

enclosed raceway. 4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be

plumb, true, and square.

E. BMS Identification Standards 1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to

the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting.

F. BMS Panel Installation



1. The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.

G. Input Devices 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever

possible.

H. HVAC Input Devices – Genera1 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever

possible. 3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature

wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc. 4. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME

guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions. 5. Outside Air Sensors

a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.

b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. 6. Water Differential Pressure Sensors

a. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow-sensing device.

b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines.

c. The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.

7. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.): a. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.

8. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” w.c.): a. Transmitters exterior sensing tip shall be installed with a shielded static air

probe to reduce pressure fluctuations caused by wind. b. The interior tip shall be inconspicuous and located as shown on the

drawings. 9. Air Flow Measuring Stations:

a. Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct.

b. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.

10. Duct Temperature Sensors:



a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.

d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element holders.

11. Space Sensors: a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements, or as stated on project drawings. b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where

indicated on the plans. 12. Low Temperature Limit Switches:

a. Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream. b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring

each square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor. c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full

coverage of the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream.

13. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.

14. Water Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with shut off valves for isolation.

I. HVAC Output Devices 1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation. The

mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.

2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

4. Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.

5. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Building Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems

3.3 Training



A. The BMS contractor shall provide the following training services: 1. One day ( 8 hours or as determined by project requirements) of on-site orientation

by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as-built drawings, the BMS software layout and naming conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.

a. System technician shall demonstrate the operation of each air handling unit device and conformance to the project sequence of operation. b. Demonstration shall be coordinated with project commissioning agent.

3.4 Commissioning

A. Fully commission all aspects of the Building Management System work.

B. Acceptance Check Sheet 1. Prepare a check sheet that includes all points for all functions of the BMS as

indicated on the point list included in this specification. 2. Submit the check sheet to the Engineer for approval 3. The Engineer will use the check sheet as the basis for acceptance with the BMS

Contractor.

C. VAV box performance verification and documentation: 1. The BMS Contractor shall test each VAV box for operation and correct flow. At

each step, after a settling time, box air flows and damper positions will be sampled. Following the tests, a pass/fail report indicating results shall be produced. Possible results are Pass, No change in flow between full open and full close, Reverse operation or Maximum flow not achieved. The report shall be submitted as documentation of the installation.

2. The BMS Contractor shall issue a report based on a sampling of the VAV calculated loop performance metrics. The report shall indicate performance criteria, include the count of conforming and non-conforming boxes, list the non-conforming boxes along with their performance data, and shall also include graphical representations of performance.

D. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done. E. Coordination with project commissioning (Cx) agent: 1. Provide allowance for assistance with project Cx agent. 2. Provide copies of all acceptance check sheets and VAV box verification. 3. Complete graphics in timely fashion to expedite project Cx work. 4. Provide “first draft” of as-built submittals to the Cx agent no later than project completion date. Final comprehensive as-built submittals shall be routed per the usual project process.

3.5 Sequences of operation and points lists

A. Per construction documents.



B. Zone setpoints shall be 69 degrees (winter) and 76 degrees (summer)(adjustable). Winter and Summer zone setpoints shall be created for all systems. Consult with University to determine the desired control strategy.

END OF SECTION 230900

KU Design & Construction Standards SOP – Bldg. Automation Control System A23.2


Standard of Practice – Building Automation Control System

OBJECTIVE OF STANDARD To acquaint designers and other interested parties with the University’s provisions for

building automation control systems (BACS) within individual buildings and for centralized (BACS) on the main campus.

To insure consistent specifications for, and installation of, building automation control system hardware and software within campus buildings and campus-wide network interface between building systems.

To extend the University’s capabilities for remotely monitoring the environmental status of all campus buildings.

METHODS OF DELIVERY OF BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS Contract with Johnson Controls (JCI) for the BACS separately from the general

construction contract, utilizing the State Contract. This has the benefit of saving contractor’s markup, while the General Contractor (G/C) is still responsible for integrating the contract (like any other Owner requested contract) into the project.

Include the BACS contract into the general construction contract. This has the disadvantage of adding the G/C’s markup, but with the benefit of “single source” responsibility for the project.

Specifications should reflect that JCI is the sole provider of BACS. BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURE Assume that existing campus buildings have the NAE (JCI Metasys front end) and N2 buss and require no further infrastructure. Extensive building renovations may require upgrading the NAE, please consult with University Project Manager (PM) and JCI. If the building is new, it will require provision of infrastructure for connection to the campus BACS. This includes, at minimum, a dedicated 120V, 20A branch circuit for the NAE. A double-gang box with single-gang plaster ring and a 1” conduit from the NAE to an NTS closet for the N2 buss. EQUIPMENT Provide H-O-A switches on all motor starters, even those that are controlled by BACS. Variable speed drives (VSD) shall be Danfoss brand and can be supplied by JCI. Provide manual bypass on all VSDs. EQUIPMENT CONTROL POINTS This is a list of the control points, strategies, and equipment that the University will require, where applicable, on future building construction projects. The DESIGNER shall provide a point list and sequence of operation for all listed equipment. The DESIGNER shall review

A23.2



Johnson Controls shop drawings for compliance with the design intent. Except when noted as local, these points will be on the BACS. Status Chiller

Condenser water temperature (EWT/LWT)

Chilled water temperature (EWT/LWT)

Current Fault/alarm contact(s)

Alarm Refrigerant Monitor

PM (local) PPM (Metasys)

Phase module failure Surge Suppression

Status Pumps (All)

Alarm Boiler (Steam or Hot Water)

Status Call for heat

Steam pressure Steam flow Firing rate

Supply water temp. Hot Water Systems (Reheat or Domestic)

Return water temp. Alarm Sump Level (Elevator and Other) / Water Detection

Alarm Emergency Generator

Generator status Transfer switch status

Alarm Battery/Inverter Systems

Status Lamp out

Others as required for NFPA 101 compliance



Status Variable Speed Drive (VSD)

Speed Speed command

Safety circuit Current

Status / Alarm Cold Room / Freezer Monitoring

Temp RA CO2 Air Handling Units

RA damper (%) OA damper (%) Filter status MA temp. MA low limit PH temp CC (or cold deck) temp Hot deck temp DA temp OA temp OA RH %

RA temp RA RH% VSD (as above) RH% Humidifier status Humidifier alarm Chilled water valve (%) Steam valve (%) Heating hot water valve (%) Discharge static pressure Occupied/Unoccupied Enthalpy

Natural gas usage Utility Metering

Steam usage Water usage Electricity demand / usage

CONTROL STRATEGIES Occupied / Unoccupied Control HVAC Terminal Boxes

Occupied / Unoccupied Control Air Handling Units

Sash position monitor Chemical Fume Hoods

Status Master control Lawn Irrigation

Flow monitor Street Lighting Master Photocell



Current monitor End of Document: G:\DESIGN\DCMPJE\STANDARDS\Stds_pje_App-23.2.doc `-

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards SOP - Building Commissioning A23.3


Standard of Practice - Building Commissioning

GENERAL Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form. OBJECTIVE OF STANDARD The University of Kansas, Lawrence Campus, is pursuing a building commissioning program to support both remodeling and new construction on campus. The program has been developed with the specific intent of testing, verifying, and documenting building utility system performance to ensure that the finished facility operates as intended. As envisioned by the University, commissioning is essentially a quality control and quality assurance process for insuring that building utility systems are designed, installed, tuned, and maintained to provide the appropriate environment for the use of the building space. DEFINITIONS Acceptable Performance: A component or system being able to meet specified design parameters under actual load. Commissioning Authority: The qualified person, company, or agency that will plan and carry out the overall commissioning process. There are many options as to which party to the commissioning process will be the “authority”. The design professional, contract, or owner may be the commissioning authority. Commissioning Plan: The overall document, usually prepared by the commissioning authority, which outlines the organization, scheduling, allocation of resources, documentation, etc., pertaining to the overall commissioning process. Design Professional: The architect, architect-engineer, or engineer responsible for the design and preparation of contract documents for the mechanical and electrical systems. Functional Performance Testing: That full range of checks and tests carried out to determine if all components, subsystems, systems, and interfaces between systems function in accordance with the contract documents. In this context, “function” includes all modes and sequences of control operation, all interlocks and conditional control responses to abnormal emergency conditions. REFERENCES ASHRAE Guideline 1-1989 – Guideline for Commissioning of HVAC Systems (or current

edition)

A23.3



NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems, Current Edition

AABC National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, Current Edition

SCOPE OF SERVICES FORMAT This document includes two principle sections. Section One – Commissioning Purpose and Scope - General is a discussion of the University’s overall commissioning program and its objectives. Section Two – Commissioning Purpose and Scope – Project Specific summarizes commissioning requirements for a specific project. Considered alone, Section One forms the University standard of practice for providing building utilities systems commissioning services. Section One should be reviewed by persons involved in the preparation of fee proposals to gauge the general level of effort expected of commissioning agents proposing to be involved in campus projects. In addition, all project deliverables that the commissioning agent will be expected to generate during completion of the commissioning processes are listed in Section One of this document. Each request for proposal will also be accompanied by Section Two – Commissioning Purpose and Scope – Project Specific. It identifies commissioning requirements of a specific project. The level of detail to which the various building systems are described in Section Two will depend upon the phase of the project at which the commissioning agent is asked to become involved. Regardless of the stage of the project when the commissioning agent first becomes involved, the agent’s primary objectives shall be to: Prepare an overall plan for the commissioning process. Establish appropriate criteria for determining acceptable performance for building utility

systems. Complete all functional testing verifying acceptable systems performance. Train the building users in the operation and maintenance of the building utility systems. TYPICAL PROJECT TEAM University capital improvements projects typically include the following project team members: DCM Project Manager DCM Construction Manager DCM Engineering Support Manager DOAS Project Manager Architect/Engineer's Project Manager General Contractor's Project Manager Project Manager, University Contract Provider of Building Automated Control Systems Project Manager, University Contract Provider of Campus-wide Fire Alarm Systems Associate Director, University Facilities Operations, or his representative



SECTION ONE - GENERAL COMMISSIONING PURPOSE AND SCOPE General In general, it is the University’s intent to involve the project's commissioning agent as early in the design process as is feasible. Because of the diversity of project sizes, complexities, and budgets, no single Scope of Services is applicable to all projects. The commissioning process for major capital improvement projects is expected to extend through all phases of a project, from concept through occupancy. On smaller projects the commissioning agent may be requested to assist only during the construction and occupancy phases. Project phases that may involve the services of a commissioning agent include pre-design phase, design phase, and construction phase. The intent is to have the same firm involved with all phases. Individuals who have been requested to prepare a proposal for providing commissioning services to the University should refer to Section Two – Commissioning Purpose and Scope – Project Specific for detailed requirements for each project phase. Approved Commissioning Agents: Doyle Field Services Toombs and Associates PRE-DESIGN PHASE Commissioning agents who are retained for the pre-design phase will have the following responsibilities: Define the roles of the design and construction team during all phases of commissioning. Review the University program for the project. Review the designer’s conceptual design, design assumptions, design criteria, and the

performance standards of proposed building utility systems. The commissioning agent will be expected to attend schematic design review and design

development review meetings. During pre-design phase, the commissioning agent shall identify any commissioning

activities that must be scheduled based on seasonal operation or loading of a building system. These special requirements shall be included in the subsequent report.

The commissioning agent will be required to submit a design development report that includes, at a minimum: A listing of all utility systems that will be included in the project, and thus will require

commissioning. A critical path evaluation, omitting schedule dates, of the commissioning steps required

for each identified system, designating the responsible design and construction team party for each step.

A summary identifying any required system for which funding was not specifically identified in the University program.

A summary of any inappropriate or missing assumptions or criteria in the designer’s preliminary calculations.



DESIGN PHASE Commissioning Agents who are retained for design phase commissioning activities will be required to review each preliminary construction document submittal and prepare a commissioning plan that addresses commissioning requirements for all systems that are a part of the project design. Prior to the scheduled final submittal date for construction documents, the commissioning agent will be required to submit a project-specific commissioning plan that will include the following information, at a minimum: A listing of the detailed procedures for the tests to be performed by each party in the

commissioning process. A functional performance test procedure for each building system being commissioned. Calibration data for test equipment that will be used during the system testing. Sample report forms that will be used to submit test data and results. Functional test plan submittals must be complete and project-specific. Plans that fail to

address any of the following will be returned for revision: The plan must identify all building systems that require commissioning. The plan must be organized so as to describe procedures for documenting acceptable

system performance in a sequence starting with components and progressing to complete systems, as follows: Individual Components Sub-systems Systems Interfaces between systems

The plan’s functional test procedures must address methods of testing the systems under all modes of operation and sequences of control, including emergency and alarm conditions.

Testing shall include an infrared survey on all main electrical switchgear (both new with the project and existing), distribution panels, and all mechanical equipment.

CONSTRUCTION PHASE Following issuance of the Notice To Proceed, the commissioning agent shall work with the project's General Contractor to develop a project-specific commissioning schedule. The schedule shall be based upon the General Contractor’s schedule for construction completion and shall include the following pre-test activities, at a minimum: Completion of any required code authority inspections. Flushing, cleaning, disinfecting, and hydrostatic testing of piping systems. Energizing, start-up and activation of equipment and systems. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air and water systems. Calibration and testing of automatic controls.



It should be understood that during the project construction and systems commissioning activities, no step on the critical path of building commissioning will be commenced until the commissioning agent has documented that acceptable performance has been demonstrated for the previous step. Commissioning agents who are retained for construction phase commissioning activities will be responsible for: Attending routine progress meetings. Observing building systems’ start-ups. Completing and documenting all testing, adjusting and balancing of building systems. Completing and documenting all functional performance testing. Preparing and issuing final acceptance documentation upon successful completion of

functional performance testing for all building utility systems in the project. OCCUPANCY PHASE AND OPERATOR TRAINING The commissioning agent shall use the designer-furnished system conceptual design, design assumption, and design criteria information, as well as manufacturer-furnished shop drawing and equipment manual information, to prepare a comprehensive building operations manual. The commissioning agent shall provide training for University personnel on appropriate operation and maintenance of the building utility systems. This training shall include: Instructions on the use of the building operations manual. Demonstration of the system operational procedures for all modes of operation. Acceptable tolerances for system adjustments Procedures for dealing with abnormal and emergency situations. SECTION TWO – PROJECT-SPECIFIC COMMISSIONING PURPOSE AND SCOPE General This section of the commissioning scope of service document is to be edited by the University to identify the specific commissioning requirements of each specific project, which may be in addition to or in lieu of those indicated below. Electrical Commissioning Commissioning of electrical systems shall follow the HVAC commissioning plan when the systems are interconnected and related. All electrical systems shall be specified in detail to follow a commissioning plan which shall be similar in format to the HVAC Commissioning Plan when they are not interconnected with the HVAC systems and thus not covered by that Plan. This Electrical Systems Commissioning Plan shall require the following as a minimum: Testing required by the NEC Review resistance tests of the grounding systems



Trip testing of all ground fault systems/equipment Point-by-Point demonstration and test of all special electrical systems Point-by-Point readout and calibration testing of all electrical monitoring systems Demonstration test of all aspects of all fire alarm systems in accordance with NFPA. Test light levels and all special features of emergency lighting system Complete performance testing in all aspects all emergency power systems Review hi-pot testing of medium-voltage conductors End of Document: D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\Oct., 2000 Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-07.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Design Standards for Energy Efficiency A23.4


Design Standards for Energy Efficiency

GENERAL Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form. INTRODUCTION In order to address rising utility costs and expenditures as well as Executive Directive No. 07-373 from the Office of the Governor and the Board of Regents Policy on Enhanced Priority & Accountability Guidelines For University Buildings, University design standards need to be modified to emphasize the long-term costs of owning and operating a building. To achieve a goal of reduced operating expenses and increased resource conservation, the University must adopt energy efficiency design standards that establish energy performance requirements and includes measuring and verifying building performance during the first eighteen months of operation, develop and implement a comprehensive operation and maintenance program, and maintain a program for monitoring building performance for the life of the equipment/systems. Finally, staff resources in both Design and Construction Management and Facilities Operations are critical to a successful building energy efficiency program. DCM will require adequate architectural and engineering staff to ensure that energy design standards are met during design and construction phases of a project, and Facilities Operations will require adequate staff with appropriate skills and training to ensure equipment and systems are operated and maintained to achieve peak efficiency throughout the life of the building. It should be noted that good maintenance programs can generate substantial energy savings, and should be considered as an equally important component to the energy efficiency design standards in reducing operating expenses. In addition to mandated energy conservation, a widely-recognized societal shift to become better stewards of the environment is occurring that translates to “green building design” and “sustainable building strategies” in the construction industry. The term “High Performance Building” defines the practices and proven strategies to improve the learning environment while saving resources, specifically, energy conservation. The perception that building more energy efficient or “green” buildings equates to increased project costs is largely due to early projects that were developed with unfamiliar practices and procedures. Recent cost studies have demonstrated that by using today’s proven strategies, most energy efficient buildings cost no more to build than traditional projects, sometimes less due to downsizing electrical, mechanical and structural systems. Several codes and guidelines address building energy efficiency, most notably, ASHRAE 90.1, the International Energy Conservation Code, the U.S. Green Building Council LEED program, and Energy Star. However, codes that are required by State law only set minimum standards that do not necessarily result in energy efficient buildings. An article in Building

A23.4



Operating Management emphasized this point, in a quote stating, “A school designed just to code is the worst building you can legally build.” More efficient building design requires clear performance requirements for energy efficiency and monitoring of building performance to ensure that the design goals are achieved once the building is constructed. Additionally efficient building design must begin at the earliest design stages with consideration of site and building orientation, building form, fenestrations, optimizing the building envelope, arrangement of spaces, and use of natural lighting, receiving equal consideration to efficient mechanical and electrical systems, rather than attempting to place a disproportionate share of the efficiency burden on MEP systems and components. Adding efficient systems at the end of the design process will also be less effective and more costly. Thus, the key to successfully achieving more energy efficient buildings without a significant increase in project costs begins with an integrated and collaborative design process that establishes the energy performance requirements, an understanding of the lifetime value of a high performance building, a focus on energy efficiency through construction and commissioning, then measure and verify performance. REVIEW OF CODES AND GUIDELINES Recommendations for improved energy efficiency were developed after reviewing other university design standards, along with LEED, DOE COMCheck, and other guidelines. One comprehensive standard reviewed was the Princeton University Design Standards, Section 3.3 Energy Guidelines. The Princeton guideline utilizes ASHRAE 90.1, which consultants should be most familiar with, and requires that designs for new construction and major renovations exceed ASHRAE 90.1 standards by a minimum of 30% as the established energy performance target. Other universities utilize this method of targeting energy performance, with the range for exceeding the standard being 20-30%. To better define this target for energy performance, a 28% improvement over ASHRAE 90.1 equates to 6 of 10 extra points in the LEED systems and a 31.5% improvement equates to 7 of 10 extra points in the LEED system. A percentage method also provides consultants a greater degree of flexibility and opportunity for innovation in designing a building to meet the energy performance requirements. In addition to the Princeton guideline, several other guidelines are excellent resources for designing high performance buildings. For instance, Energy Star recommendations resemble the Princeton guideline, only in less specific detail. Also, the LEED program offers a “whole-building” approach to sustainability that includes performance in five key areas: sustainable site development, water savings, energy efficiency, materials selection and indoor environmental quality. Labs21 is an excellent design resource for energy conservation in buildings with lab space. Rather than recommending one of these specific resources, these guidelines should be referenced as supplemental resources to be considered during the design process to determine strategies that achieve the energy performance target. It is important to note that the 30% target for exceeding ASHRAE 90.1 in energy efficiency in new construction and major renovations is achievable as a standard, if enforced, and if design elements beyond more efficient mechanical and electrical systems are considered. Many universities choose the LEED program certification because it provides the enforcement and third-party verification necessary to achieve energy efficiency targets, as well as providing recognition for energy performance. All projects start with good intentions,



but without a structured system like the LEED program, many projects fall short of energy efficiency goals. The budget impact of more energy efficient buildings was also considered in the development of an energy efficiency design standard. More energy efficient buildings can be expected to cost more, but to put that cost into perspective, the average premium for LEED certified buildings is documented as less than 2% of construction costs and this is paid back several times over the life of the building. Since LEED certification is not being recommended at this time, the additional project cost should be assumed to be less than 2%, since the certification cost is roughly the half the expense of building a LEED certified building. Investments made during design and construction should minimize the life cycle costs (including capital, energy, water and maintenance costs) of the building. Project budgets are often tight and “value engineering” is often the method of reducing project costs, however the cost reductions nearly always adversely impact energy efficiency and long-term operating costs. Energy efficiency design standards should include the requirement to perform a Life-Cycle Comparative Study (LCCS) for any substitutions that would impact the energy performance target to better understand the energy and long-term operating cost impact. While energy efficiency begins in the early design stages of a project, a critical stage in achieving energy performance is during construction and includes building system commissioning to ensure that the building systems are operating as intended. In order for the commissioning agent to achieve the goal of a building operating as designed, the agent should be involved in these early design stages. Finally, monitoring and verification of performance during the initial 18 months of occupancy should be adopted as a part of the campus design standards to ensure that performance targets are being met, including a review of maintenance and operational procedures to ensure that all systems are being operated and maintained to achieve peak efficiency for the life of the equipment/systems. DESIGN STANDARD RECOMMENDATIONS Programming Phase State a definitive and measurable energy performance target to exceed ASHRAE 90.1 by 30% for new construction and major renovations and 10-15% for other projects where energy savings can be achieved, and budget 2% in additional project costs. Building programs should clearly state the connection to central steam and the connection to the central Chiller Building for chilled water or the development of district cooling systems where possible to serve multiple buildings on the Main Campus, and the connection to central steam and chilled water in the research area of West Campus. At the program phase the desire to have water-cooled vs. air-cooled air conditioning systems should be stated, even if year-around cooling is necessary, as well as the desire to install heat-recovery systems. Schematic Design The design team is assembled and should include the owner, project manager, an architect with environmentally responsible design, HVAC engineer, plumbing engineer, lighting



designer, structural engineer, the commissioning agent, an energy analyst, the building operator and building occupants. This team should discuss the energy performance target, high-performance system strategies and technologies, and energy-related design concepts that include, building siting, orientation, building form, building envelope, arrangement of spaces, shading, fenestrations, use of natural lighting and other design features that impact energy use during an Energy Performance Charrette. A computer model of the design should be created and used in all subsequent design phases to document expected energy performance of design alternatives. It is important that the holistic design reflect a balance of energy efficient measures between the building envelope and the MEP components. The design direction should not result in a disproportionate burden of efficiency being placed on the MEP components. Design Development Develop comprehensive high-performance system strategies, model options for optimizing the building envelope and systems, including wall and roof insulation, natural shading to reduce the cooling load, low-e glass, daylighting and shading analysis to reduce electrical lighting and cooling requirements, high efficiency lighting, and other options such as those listed in the ASHRAE GreenGuide. Begin developing a commissioning plan and have the commissioning agent assess the constructability of the design options and evaluate if the design meets the owner’s objectives. Model the design to determine if it meets the energy performance target of 30% over the ASHRAE 90.1 standard, and at the end of the Design Development Phase the Design Team must submit the ASHRAE 90.1 Compliance Report, computer modeling, and the peak loads as well as total annual energy consumption. Begin developing an effective operation and maintenance program, which may include required training, operational procedures, maintenance and ongoing monitoring beyond the initial 18 months. Construction Documents Review the documents to ensure that all energy-related strategies are included as modeled and approved in the ASHRAE 90.1 Compliance Report. Ensure that metering of all utilities is included in the construction documents to measure energy use. If “value engineering” is necessary to get a project within budget or other cost reductions are considered to award a construction contract they shall be evaluated based on a Life-Cycle Comparative Study (LCCS) to quantify the impact to energy and long-term operating costs, and reviewed by the Provost Office prior to being incorporated into the Construction Documents. Complete the development of an effective operation and maintenance program. Construction and Commissioning At the pre-construction meeting, emphasize to the contractor and sub-contractors the goal to construct a high-performance building meeting a specific energy performance target. Ensure material submittals meet the energy performance targets. Document any design changes and use the computer model to ensure that performance targets will still be met, and provide as-built documents. Provide commissioning to ensure that the building functions as intended and meets energy performance and operational goals. Commissioning should also include the required system and equipment training and the development of an effective operational and maintenance program.



Measurement and Verification Document actual energy use over an 18 month period following occupancy and compare the actual energy use to the anticipated energy consumption. Follow-up with the design team, contractors and occupants to make necessary adjustments to meet the performance target. Initiate ongoing performance monitoring, beyond the initial 18 months, for the life of the equipment/systems. Operation and Maintenance At the conclusion of the construction phase and commissioning, maintenance staff should be trained to achieve a complete understanding of the design parameters and operating sequences, and receive the necessary training of all systems and components to ensure that they are properly operated and maintained achieve peak performance through the life of the building. The maintenance and operational procedures should also be reviewed again after the first year of occupancy to ensure that all systems are being operated and maintained at peak efficiency. End of Document: D:\Steve\KU DCM\Design Stds\Oct., 2000 Revisions\Stds_sas_Div-07.doc

KU Design & Construction Standards Electrical 26


Electrical

GENERAL

Designers shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Variances from these standards are to be submitted for written approval, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form in Appendix A1.1.



� Division 1 - General Requirements: Refer to sections regarding construction testing and field quality control requirements.

� Unless directed otherwise, the Owner shall separately contract for quality control testing during construction, not the Contractor. Verify with DCM for each project.

� Division 2 –Sitework: Contains information about site utility systems.

� Division 15 - Mechanical: Review all sections of Division 250000 and 230000 for related work and systems that must be coordinated with provisions of Division 260000.

� Appendix A15.3, SOP - Commissioning: For projects involving a commissioning agent as part of the project team, the Designer shall coordinate with the commissioning agent for function test procedures for equipment and systems of Division 270000.

� Division 26 - Electrical Standards of Practice: The University has adopted specific electrical system construction practices that are referenced by the applicable AIA-Masterspec section and/or University Standards of Practice (SOP). The Designer shall use the following supplemental guidelines and standards of practice in development of project construction documents, in addition to these Division 260000 Standards.

� Appendix A16.1, SOP - Emergency Lighting Systems

� Appendix A16.2, SOP - Electrical Power Metering

� Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System

� Appendix A16.4, Outdoor Lighting Standards

METERING REQUIREMENTS

Electrical metering for projects that require new services to be fed from the University distribution system shall be in accordance with requirements of Appendix A16.2, Standard of Practice - Electrical Power Metering.

26



UTILITY SERVICE PROVIDER

Projects that require new services to be fed from the University distribution system shall be in accordance with requirements of Appendix A16.3, Standard of Practice - Campus Electrical Distribution System.

For projects that require the establishment of new electrical services, the Designer shall determine, by discussions with University personnel, whether the service would be from the campus distribution system or from a utility provider. The Designer will use this information to inform his editing of electrical specification sections references above.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL – 260500

Basic Minimum Raceway Requirements: In order to facilitate long-term cable management, wiring systems (including but not limited to DDC, fire alarm, telecommunications, security, and power) shall be installed in raceways.

Concealing new circuits: Electrical work in architecturally finished spaces shall be concealed. The Designer shall obtain University approval for design of new circuits that must be installed in surface raceway systems where concealment is not possible.

Firestopping: Identify and provide installation details for utilization of firestopping materials associated with the particular construction materials that will be encountered. Include details of firestop systems in plans and list specific UL or other approved test assembly numbers. Use removable pillows for cable tray penetration firestop.

Cathodic Protection: Cathodic protection is required for certain underground piping systems. The need for cathodic protection shall be reviewed with the university for each project.

Electrical Test Data: Specify the operational tests and test methods required for the following equipment and materials:

� Primary cable and equipment.

� Engine-generators and emergency power system.

� Auditorium sound systems

� Audio/Video systems

� Fire alarm systems

� Lightning protective systems

� Transformers

� Ground fault protective systems

� Secondary service conductors/bus duct

� Voice/Data systems



� Electrical grounding systems

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES – 260513

Voltage Classifications: The Designer shall use this specification section to specify electrical cables carrying power at phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages of between 2001-volts and 35,000-volts. For projects on the main Lawrence campus, this would include any cables installed in the 12,470-volt circuits between the KPL substations and a building service entrance transformer.

� Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for additional discussion.

Appropriate Cable Assemblies: In general, medium voltage power cables will be installed on the Lawrence main campus, in either underground ductbank systems or in cable tray systems within tunnels and equipment rooms.

� Cable installed in underground ductbanks shall be specified as shielded single conductor.

� Cable installed in cable tray systems shall be specified as shielded and armored multiconductor cable. Armoring shall be specified as interlocking galvanized steel or aluminum with a PVC or PE jacket.

� The Designer shall evaluate the project-specific installation requirements and specify, and clearly designate on drawings, the use of single or multiconductor cable assemblies as appropriate for the project.

� Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for specification and installation details.

Submittals - Supplemental Text: Because of the expectations for an extended operating life for these power distribution cable systems, the University is concerned that prospective contractors possess, and be able to demonstrate, a high level of competency in the installation of the systems. The Designer shall include the following supplemental text in the specifications paragraphs related to Submittals:

Prior to scheduling any outage for purposes of completing cable splices or terminations, the contractor shall complete, in the owner’s presence, the preparation of a sample cable end suitable for installation of a splice or termination kit.

Quality Assurance - Supplemental Text: In addition to the above paragraph, the Designer shall include the following supplemental text in the specifications paragraphs related to Quality Assurance:

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. The installer shall submit, for the owner’s review, a certificate verifying factory training in the use of the specific splice and termination kits provided for the project. KU Facilities Operations personnel shall inspect and approve each installer's qualifications information before final termination work is done.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES – 260519

Prohibited Wires and Cables: Aluminum wire is prohibited.

Prohibited Underground Conductors: To facilitate future replacement of conductors and increase conductor life, do not provide direct-buried conductor systems for underground wiring.

� Conductors shall be THHN for 8 AWG and smaller, THW for 6 AWG and larger.

� Color coding per latest edition of the NEC.

� MC cable is only allowed for fixture whips and must carry a grounding conductor.

UNDERCARPET ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES – 260519.13 PROHIBITED

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 260526

Grounding And Bonding: The building electrical ground shall be exothermically welded to the building steel in the grade beam, the piers, and the columns in at least two different sides of the building in addition to the water pipe ground and any driven rod/counterpoise systems. This applies to all new buildings and additions, and where possible, to renovated buildings. Renovated buildings are usually possible to make at least one steel connection in one location when planned in the design phases.

� Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the University campus electrical distribution system grounding grid and for details regarding required electrical design practices on the main Lawrence campus.

� Provide ground riser diagrams for power distribution and telecommunications systems in the contract documents.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 260533

Limitations of Raceway Use: The Designer shall incorporate the following considerations in the construction documents.

� Nonmetallic raceways are prohibited for use inside of buildings, unless specifically permitted elsewhere in this standard.

� Thinwall indenter, pressure cast, or slip-on metallic fittings are prohibited.

� Compression conduit connections shall be utilized. Set screw fittings are acceptable.

� Conduits shall not be considered grounding systems. All conduits shall include a separate grounding conductor.

� Use of flexible conduit shall be limited to recessed lighting fixtures, motors, and equipment. These connections shall be of minimum length and a maximum of 6’-0”.

� Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. Rigid non-metallic raceways may be used below grade, embedded in concrete, and for special service applications such as corrosive locations.

� Elbows in buried PVC conduit runs shall be PVC covered steel.



Bus Duct and Busway: Plug-in and feeder busses 225 amp and larger shall have built-in ground bus. Plug-in devices shall have an integral, built-in ground connection for attachment to bus ground.

Conduit Drainage: Where probability exists of moisture entering buried conduits, provide methods for drainage.

General Box Requirements:

� Due to safety hazards and maintenance problems, the use of flush mounted and surface mounted floor outlets is prohibited.

� Surface boxes used on or in exterior building surfaces, or on the site, shall be cast type.

� Installation: Provide title rings over outlet boxes in glazed tile walls and wood paneling.

� To reduce sound transmission, wall outlet boxes shall not be installed back-to-back in partitions.

� Where boxes are installed in concrete block walls, the box mounting height shall be at the block joint.

Floor Penetration Details: Specify concrete curbs and fire barriers where duct runs pass through concrete floor slabs and fire rated walls.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 260548

Prohibited Support: Lead, fiber, or wood anchors are prohibited for support of raceways or equipment.

IDENTIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – 260553

Identification: The Designer shall edit specification section 260553 to identify specific requirements for labeling and identifying electrical equipment and devices. All switching, protective devices, and metering on main distribution switchboards shall be identified with black-white-black laminated 1/8 inch thick plastic plates. Plastic plates shall be attached to the equipment with screws or rivets.

� Identification plates are required for all electrical distribution equipment from the service through branch circuit panelboards and motor control centers. Labels shall identify both the equipment designation and the source supplying the equipment.

� The Designer shall specify both numbering and wording of identification plates.

� Motor and associated equipment numbers shall be the same.

� Raceways shall be labeled where appropriate, i.e., red for fire alarm, RED/GREEN for emergency lighting, etc.



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS – 261200

Building Service Entrance Transformers: Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the specification requirements for campus distribution system transformers.

Design for non-resistive loads: The Designer shall specify transformers and all other components of the electrical distribution systems to be rated for the anticipated non-sinusoidal load currents of modern electrical/electronic equipment.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – 261300

Sectionalizing Switches: Refer to Appendix A16.3, SOP - Campus Electrical Distribution System for a description of the specification requirements for campus distribution system sectionalizing switches.

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – 262300 & SWITCHBOARDS – 262413

Overcurrent Protective Devices: The design engineer shall conduct short circuit and coordination studies to determine protective device ratings and requirements, and shall not assign the responsibility for this to the contractor.

Sizing of Secondary Service And Distribution (600 Volt And Below): The Designer shall specify new secondary service and distribution systems to be of adequate size to provide for load growth during the life of the building. The facility type and use shall be considered in determining capacity to be provided in excess of initial demand. Design criteria documents shall identify to the University the reserve capacity provided in the design.

Ground Fault System: A ground fault protection system, where required by Code, shall be designed to provide minimum possibility of power outage to critical building facilities. Designers, who are involved in switchgear or panelboard upgrades that serve existing feeders, shall consider a coordinated system on the feeders rather than a main service entrance type ground fault system to permit incremental settings thus providing reasonable continuity of electric service.

� Additional ground fault protection may be required at point-of-use receptacles to provide personnel protection. Exterior power outlets and interior uses at lavatories and service sinks shall be provided and shall be GFCI protected and corrosion resistant.

� Current pickup and time delay range shall be specified for all sensors. Construction documents shall state that ground fault sensors shall be set at "0" time delay and "minimum" ground current flow during construction period. When the project is turned over to the University the two settings shall be changed to values selected by the DESIGNER.

� Specifications shall require that the Contractor test the system ground fault performance when first installed and submit a written record of the test to the University. A copy shall be included in final project data submittals. Tripping curves and characteristics shall be



submitted to the University. Identify the method to be used to test ground fault protection in the field.

Power Factor Correction: The Designer shall review with the University whether any secondary voltage power factor correction is required. It may not be desired in most locations because medium voltage rated power factor correction is already in place at both main campus substations.

Design for Available Fault Current: The Designer is responsible for determining available fault current at the point of equipment installation and for specifying bracing to withstand the available short circuit current, asymmetrical, RMS at rated voltage. Values shall be specified.

Distribution Switchboards: The Designer shall include the following provisions in construction documents:

� Do not locate plumbing facilities above the vault and switchboard space.

� The phase arrangement on three-phase busses shall be "A-B-C," from left to right as viewed from the front of the switchboard.

� Specify provisions for future protective devices. Base provisions on need for possible future increases in electrical requirements. In order to increase flexibility provides spaces in lieu of spare devices.

� Include continuous ground bus, equipped with bolted pressure clamp type lugs, full length of switchboard.

� Busses shall be copper. Design shall include provisions for future extension of main bus.

PANELBOARDS – 262416

Panelboards and Cabinets: The Designer shall include the following provisions in construction documents:

� In order to accommodate future additional wiring; provide spare conduit stubs from flush panels into suspended ceiling spaces or other accessible spaces. The spare circuits and spaces available in panel shall determine the quantity.

� Each electrical panel shall be furnished with a clear, plastic covered, typed circuit schedule mounted in a metal cardholder. The schedule shall identify circuits by room number using final numbers furnished by the University. Verify room numbers with the University.

� Provide a number designation on each circuit protective device. Odd numbers shall be used in sequence down left side and even numbers in sequence down right side.

� Provide cross breaker connectors and bus for the spare circuit breakers indicated in panelboard schedules. Provide a minimum of 25% spare spaces with single pole 20A circuit breakers.

� Neutral bus shall be rated for 200%.



MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS – 262419

Motor Control: The Designer shall review the following for guidance regarding designs and specifications for electrical motor operation and control.

� Motor Control Centers - In areas where there are eight or more three-phase motors, a motor control center shall be provided. MCC bus work shall be braced to withstand the available short circuit current, asymmetrical, RMS at rated voltage. Values shall be specified.

� Motor Electrical Service - With the exception of portable maintenance equipment, motors over 1/3-h.p. shall be three-phase.

� Motor Starters - Starters shall be full voltage with fusible disconnect except as follows: For 20 h.p. and larger motors on 120/208 volt systems, and for 40 h.p. and larger motors on 277/480 volt systems, starters shall be autotransformer or part winding type with fusible disconnect.

Coordinate starter type selection for use with specific motor as identified in Division 23000.

� Control circuit voltage shall be 120 volt. Where transformers are needed, fuses shall be employed in both primary and secondary sides.

� Where two pumps are provided, with one intended as a standby, an alternator shall be incorporated which allows the stopping and automatic switching for restart through one BACS stop/start point.

� Magnetic starters shall incorporate a minimum of two auxiliary contacts and a HAND-OFF-AUTO switch.

� A motor control center schedule shall be included on the electrical drawings.

� Electrical Interlocks: A schematic wiring diagram of circuits involved in an interlocked system shall be included in the DESIGNER's drawings. Devices used shall be specified.

� Starters shall have fusible disconnects rather than circuit breakers or MCPs. Control circuit voltage shall be 120 volt or less. Specify push button start/stop control in lieu of hand/off/automatic control for fan motors controlled through BACS.

WIRING DEVICES – 262726

Ratings of Convenience Receptacles and Lighting Switches: General use receptacles and light switches shall be heavy-duty, 20 amp, grounding type for general service applications. Install power receptacles with the ground pins up.

Surge Suppression Receptacles: One receptacle per office may have surge protection and shall be equipped with both audible and light alarms. Review with DCM Project Manager.

Cover Plates: All cover plates shall be stainless steel, type 302, brushed satin finish meeting Federal Specification W-P-445a, unless aesthetic requirements call for a different type of finish.



Floor Maintenance Equipment Receptacles: For corridors, large assembly areas, and other areas where floor maintenance equipment is used, locate receptacles so that a 45-foot cord will reach any part of the floor. Provide at least one duplex receptacle in each room where floor maintenance equipment is needed and receptacles are not otherwise available in accordance with the NEC.

Devices in Wet Areas: Receptacles, switches, and plates in damp or corrosive areas shall be specifically designed for use in that environment. Exterior power receptacles and interior receptacles at lavatories and service sinks shall be GFCI protected and corrosion resistant.

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS – 262923

Provide Danfoss brand. May be provided by Johnson Controls through State Contract. Review with DCM Project Manager.

ENGINE GENERATORS – 263213

Provide as appropriate for each project. Review specific criteria with DCM Project Manager.

EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEMS AND EMERGENCY/EGRESS LIGHTING – 263323

General: The Designer shall refer to Appendix A16.1, SOP - Emergency Lighting Systems for guidance regarding University preferences for design of emergency / egress and exit lighting systems.

Loads Requiring Emergency Power Supplies: In general, the University provides backup electrical power supply capability for the following loads:

� Emergency egress and exit sign lighting.

� Building sprinkler system fire pumps.

� Security systems, fire alarm systems.

� Selected ADA-compliant egress passenger elevators.

� Communications systems equipment, computer workstations, or servers only if required to maintain operation of life safety equipment.

Emergency Power Systems: For projects involving emergency power requirements, an emergency generator shall be utilized. The preferred fuel is # 2 diesel fuel. When diesel generators are used, the fuel shall be and the storage quantity shall be as small as possible and still meet code and maintenance requirements. Fuel storage shall be aboveground, typically in generator base. Standby generator installations shall comply with NFPA 110. Please specify the NFPA required on site load testing.

Inverter-based Emergency Lighting Systems: Do not use, Do not use, Do not use.



Self-Diagnostic Battery Packs: If a generator-based system is not affordable or desirable, self-diagnostic battery packs in dedicated emergency light fixtures shall be utilized. This requires approval from both DCM and the University Fire Marshal Authority. Do not use emergency ballasted type fixtures.

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY – 263353


INTERIOR LIGHTING – 265100



Lighting Criteria: The Designer shall coordinate with the University to establish and document design criteria for lighting levels during schematic design. Lighting design shall follow the recommended and accepted lighting standard levels consistent with energy conservation and visual performance.

� The number of foot-candles of illumination designed for particular functions of the building shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society Handbook in accordance with Kansas Lighting Standards.

� Furnish design calculations, either by hand or by computer output, to the Office of Design & Construction Management during the design review process to help evaluate compliance with the IES standard.

� Occupancy sensors shall be considered as a means of controlling lights and conserving energy in large rooms.

� Provide exterior emergency egress lighting at all exits to the public way (30’).

� It is presumed that fluorescent lighting will be satisfactory throughout, although there is some concern with the noise (audible & EMI) level created by such lighting. This can be reduced to a satisfactory minimum for most applications by proper electrical design. This matter shall be discussed with the Building Committee whenever the situation so dictates.

� Fluorescent lighting shall be with highest-efficiency electronic ballast’s available with a two-year or more good reliability record. Harmonics shall be less than 20% Total Harmonic Distortion.

Light Fixture Switching and Control: The Designer shall use the following guidelines in circuiting, switching, and controlling interior lighting systems.



� Three-way and four-way controls shall be provided in long corridors, gymnasiums, auditoriums, and other large spaces.

� Provide inboard/outboard switching or dimming of fluorescent fixtures in private offices, classrooms, laboratories, and conference rooms.

� Occupancy sensors shall be integrated in the control schemes of classrooms, restrooms, storerooms, and multiple occupant office areas. Use sensors with combined ultrasonic/infrared technology, provided with an integral manual over-ride switch and ambient light level sensor.

� The Designer shall review the feasibility of automatic light level control areas with prominent daylighting.

Dimming Systems Designs: For general use, provide IC dimming ballast’s with wall controller/switches.

� Where specialty systems have been stipulated in a project program, a comprehensive design will be considered to consist of the following, at a minimum:

� Circuiting of fixtures to be dimmed.

� Location of controller modules.

� Location of programmable controllers.

� Locations of dimmer panels.

� Emergency lighting relay if required.

� A detailed written sequence of operation and control modes for the dimming system.

Lamps: Linear florescent lamps shall be T5 or T8 with a correlated color temperature of 3500K.

Lens: Provide parabolic lens’ in ceiling fixtures in classrooms and offices to prevent reflected glare and provide enhanced appearance.


Removal and Disposal of PCB Ballasts: On remodeling projects, the Designer shall consult with the University Department of Environmental Health and Safety (DEHS) for requirements for handling and disposal of PCB ballasts. Removal and disposal of ballasts containing PCB material shall be accomplished per EPA requirements.



� The Designer shall note in the construction documents that the Contractor shall examine existing ballasts that are to be removed from service. If ballast is not clearly labeled to indicate that it does not contain PCB, it shall be assumed to contain PCB.

� The University's EHS department will provide a ballast collection container at or near the project site. PCB containing ballasts shall be placed in the ballast collection container as they are removed.

� The University will dispose of the container.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING – 265600




Communications

General: The Designer should be aware that the University organizational structure includes a Department of Networking and Telecommunications Services (NTS), which is responsible for installation and maintenance of all telecommunications and computer networking systems on campus.

� Refer to Division 270000 - Telecommunication Systems for detailed requirements for all University telephone systems.

� At the earliest possible stages of programming or design, the Building Committee should review with DCM and NTS the options available for each project regarding the provision of telephones and other telecommunication systems, and verify how that project's telecommunication systems shall be designed and constructed.

For projects that involve the addition or relocation of telephone and/or computer communications outlets, the Designer shall review and verify outlet locations with the space occupants. This review shall identify outlets that are needed for immediate program needs, as well as future outlet locations.

27



� The Designer shall include installation of all conduit, boxes, and mounting devices in the project construction documents.

Design of Communications Terminal Room: Refer to Division 270000 - Telecommunication Systems for specific requirements.

Provisions for Elevator Communications: The Designer shall review Appendix A14.1 - Elevator Telephones for specific requirements for specifications and design of passenger elevator telephone installation on campus.

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISON SYSTEM – 274113

Requirements for these systems will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Where applicable, reference the University Media Committee standards and/or specific Audio/Video consultant.

� Cable and/or satellite television systems require written approval from University Provost prior to installation. University Dean, Department Chair or Building Committee Chair shall submit this request in writing to the Provost.

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS – 275116


� EPAS- Emergency Public Address System for Mass notification- Refer to fire alarm standards for installation requirements.

SOUND-MASKING EQUIPMENT – 275119


INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS– 275123

Requirements for this will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Intercom service may be provided through the phone system.

EDUCATIONAL INTERCOMMUNCIATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS – 275123.50

Requirements for this will be determined on a project-by-project basis. Do not provide master clock system unless directed by Building Committee.

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_Div-26_2009-Electrical.doc



A 26.1 Emergency Lighting Systems

GENERAL



Comply with all applicable codes adopted by the State Fire Marshal and DFM including the Kansas Fire Prevention Code to provide safe egress in the event of loss of power.

� Provide a central system for emergency lighting in all buildings.

� Be energy efficient utilizing minimum lighting levels for ‘always on’ night lights.

� Provide non-switched egress lighting to comply with the Kansas Fire Prevention Code.

� Provide ‘NORMALLY OFF’ emergency lighting in all lecture/classrooms above 49.

� Provide system incorporating features that minimize maintenance and testing requirements. Testing is required every 30 days.

� Provide exterior egress and emergency lighting.

� Provide emergency lighting that activates upon loss of branch power per code.

DESIGN PROCESS

It is the Designer’s responsibility to prepare a code-compliant emergency lighting design and submit it to both the DCM project manager and the University Fire Marshal Authority (UFMA) for review before completion of the Contract Documents. Contract documents then get reviewed by the AHJ in Topeka submitted through UFMA.

Performance: Emergency and Egress lighting shall exceed minimum levels prescribed by code (1 foot-candle at the floor within a 40 to 1 brightness ratio). The University’s experience, from previous completed projects, is that this range shall be an average of between 3 and 5 foot-candles, with a minimum level of 1 foot-candles and a maximum level of 20 foot-candles. A level of 20 foot-candles below any fixture would allow for a 1 foot-candle minimum between fixtures, which stays within the 40 to 1 ratio as required by code. At the conclusion of the project, egress and emergency lighting levels shall be verified during commissioning and testing. Systems MUST maintain full lighting levels for 90 minutes.



Design Criteria: The Designer shall use the following criteria as guidelines in evaluating and selecting a system with the appropriate functional performance for the specific project circumstances. Systems utilizing emergency ballast type fixtures shall only be allowed with special permission from the University Fire Marshal Authority and DCM.

System types by order of preference:

� ALWAYS ON (NIGHT LIGHT) SYSTEM- Emergency and egress lighting utilizing the general lighting system connected directly to the emergency power source through the emergency power transfer switch. Exit signs, fire alarm, egress elevators, fire pumps and all life safety associated equipment shall be connected. Any other loads shall be on their own transfer switch per NEC. Circuits will be verified by the AHJ at final inspection.

� Classrooms and Lecture rooms- Utilize normally off emergency lighting- Smart, self-diagnostic battery packs or room lighting on relays connected to the local hot leg of the lighting circuits. Fixtures must be labeled.

� Egress lighting in normally off areas- must provide minimum lighting at egress paths within rooms or areas in assembly occupancies over 49 were normally off emergency lighting is used. Wall LED floor wash lighting or strip/rope lighting is recommended circuited to the emergency lighting circuit.

� Relay controlled lighting- for normally off areas must be labeled at each room for annual and 30 day testing. Provide 2” x 4 1/2” sign as noted below.

� Exterior Emergency Lighting- provided at all required exits up to 30 feet away from building or to the public way. Lighting should be connected to emergency power switched off during the day with photo cell.

� Stairwells- Provide minimal lighting to meet code, recommend two level lighting.

� Theatrical Dimmed Lighting systems- Require egress lighting per code and emergency lighting connected to a UL labeled system relay integrated into the system. Provide test information and label fixtures connected to relay.

� NORMALY OFF EMERGENCY LIGHTING- Self contained individual or tandem smart self-diagnostic battery packs connected to local lighting circuit. This system requires exhaustive testing every 30 days and is not to be used without permission from DCM and UFMA.

� CONCEALED ‘POP OUT’ FIXTURES ARE NOT TO BE USED!

� INTERGRATED EMERGENCY BALLAST TYPE FIXTURES ARE NOT TO BE USED.

� Classrooms and Lecture rooms- Smart, self-diagnostic battery packs.

� Egress lighting in assembly occupancies- Wall LED floor wash lighting or strip/rope on normal power not switched.

� Egress lighting (night lights)- provide non-switched lighting throughout exit path including stairwells, restrooms and exterior paths.

� Exterior Emergency Lighting- Smart, self-diagnostic battery packs.

� Stairwells- Provide smart, self-diagnostic battery packs.

� EXISTING LIGHTING INSTALLATION FOR ALWAYS ON (NIGHT LIGHT) SYSTEM- This system would re-circuit existing lights to a separate, (always-on) circuit connected to



the an emergency generator. In this system, it is imperative that the lighting levels be at the minimum design criteria since they will be on 24 hours a day. This is generally the most economical system since existing lighting circuits are not easily re-grouped for control purposes.

� Classrooms and Lecture rooms over 49 occupants- Smart, self-diagnostic battery packs. Review with KU on normally off relay option. Provide egress lighting.

� Exterior Emergency Lighting- provided at all required exits up to 30 feet away from building or to the public way. Lighting should be connected to emergency power switched off during the day with photo cell.

� Stairwells- Provide minimal lighting to meet code, recommend two level lighting. Try to capture the existing lighting circuit and change light fixtures as needed. Remove switches to existing circuits. Egress and Emergency lighting can not be switched.

� Theatrical Dimmed Lighting systems- Require egress lighting per code and emergency lighting connected to a UL labeled system relay integrated into the system. Provide test information and label fixtures connected to relay.

General Lighting Criteria:

Emergency light fixtures shall be located at the following locations:

� Interior egress paths- Provide in corridors and stairwells at 3 to 5 fc.

� Exterior egress paths- Provide to the public way or 30 foot away from building at 1 fc.

� Electrical and mechanical equipment rooms- Provide at 1 fc. Small rooms can be switched since these areas are not required to have emergency lighting.

� Public restrooms- Provide at minimum levels- (not required by code but requested by KU) If existing circuits cannot be isolated to switch a single fixture to the emergency lights, then a separate fluorescent fixture may be added.

� Private restrooms- not required, not requested.

� Lecture and classrooms with occupancy of over 49 (required)- Recommended normally OFF lighting. Provide smart, self-diagnostic battery packs or room lighting on relays connected to the local hot leg of the lighting circuits is recommended. Fixtures must be labeled, testing instructions must be provided at each room.

� Lecture / Classrooms devoid of windows- 25 to 49 occupants. These rooms should have emergency lighting same as rooms with 49 or more occupants however they are not required by code. Normal classrooms and labs with exterior windows shall not receive emergency lights.

� Tunnels- utilize smart self diagnostic battery pack units if no generator circuit is available. Egress lighting is not required therefore the .01 foot-candle minimum is allowed.

� Generator and generator support equipment areas- Provide smart self diagnostic battery packs as prescribed by code for maintenance of generator equipment and circuits if system is down.

� Occupied Roofs- Required, provide to the exits. Should be on photo cell.

� Normal Roof Areas- not required, not requested.



Emergency and Egress Lighting Design Criteria

� Emergency light fixtures shall be located throughout the exit path at intervals that are designed to maintain a minimum light intensity of 1 foot-candle at floor. In a normal 8-foot wide corridor it has been found that 35 to 45 foot spacing for a typical 2 light T-8 fluorescent fixture is acceptable. This yields approximately 1 to 3 fc

� Stairwells shall be partially lit by none-switched emergency/egress lights. To save energy switched lighting also should be utilized. All night lighting should be minimum levels.

� Control relays shall be fused; accessible and labeled with the area serve.

� Control relays must have testing instructions within the room they serve indicating what breaker and panel serves the emergency lighting. Provide a sign; gray with red letters, 4 1/2 inches wide (the width of double gang wall switch) and 2 inches high; text ¼” high, located just above the typical room lighting wall switch on the latch side of the primary entrance door to the room. Sign should be mounted just above the wall switch or at 60" above finished floor. Sign shall state the following:

EMERGENCY LIGHTING PROVIDED TO TEST (REQUIRED MONTHLY) TRIP CIRCUIT _____ AT PANEL _____ PANEL LOCATED IN ROOM_________

� All emergency light fixtures shall be labeled with a ¾” permanent red DOT.

� All conduits connecting the emergency lighting system shall be labeled with red and green electrical tape at all junction boxes and spans over 30 feet.

Exit and Area of Refuge Sign Criteria: New signs shall be placed in all locations required by the applicable codes.

� New exit signs shall be LED type, without flashing function.

� Locations shall reflect egress paths as defined by the approved code footprint.

� Shall be submitted to both the DCM project manager and UFMA for approval before CDs are completed.

� Areas of refuge signs, if any, shall be similar to exit signs connected to the emergency lighting system in compliance with applicable codes and the ADAAG. Text on the sign shall read "AREA OF REFUGE", and shall display the universal accessibility symbol.

SPECIFICATION DETAILS

The Designer shall use the following as guidance in the preparation of specification documents for installation of emergency lighting system equipment on campus.

General: An Integrated Life Safety System shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of power and shall operate during a utility line deficiency without interruptions of power to the load.

� The Integrated Life Safety (ILS) System shall be UL listed.



� Applicable codes and standards include UL924 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; UL1778 Standard Uninterruptible Power Supplies; and ANSI C62.41.

Emergency Generator: Diesel generators with #2 diesel fuel are preferred.

� Environmental air permitting is required for emergency generators. No construction work can begin on the project until the required permits are obtained. Permitting process is a minimum of six months.

� Provide University with required data on the generator so that permit application can be submitted.

� Generator sets shall be located to disperse exhaust fumes and noise without affecting the normal functions of the building and surrounding site.

� Specify a method of damping vibrations to acceptable levels.

� The Designer shall specify that the manufacturer provides contacts for remote indication of generator status, alarm and shutdown, and battery charger alarm to the campus BACS network. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote indication of transfer switch position.

� Size generator with a minimum or 25% additional capacity for future loads.

� Provide separate transfer switch per NEC for life safety loads.

Centralized Battery Inverter: SHALL NOT BE USED !

End of Document: G:\STAFF\Design Standards\2009_Approved-Updates\Stds_BR_Div-26_A1-EmergLightg.doc

The University of Kansas Design & Construction Standards Telecommunications Systems 27

Revision Date: © December 23, 2009 Page 1 of 42

Telecommunications Systems

GENERAL........................................................................................................................................3

Related Documents & Requirements...........................................................................................3 Codes, Standards and Best Practices .........................................................................................4 Bid Documents.............................................................................................................................4

DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................................4 Entrance Facility (EF)...................................................................................................................4 Equipment Room (ER) .................................................................................................................4 Telecommunications Room (TR) .................................................................................................5 Backbone (Riser) Cabling ............................................................................................................5 Horizontal Cabling........................................................................................................................5 Communications Outlet................................................................................................................5 Communications Pathways..........................................................................................................5 Outside Plant (OSP) Cabling .......................................................................................................5 Outside Plant (OSP) Pathways ....................................................................................................5

REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................6 Communications Rooms Minimum Requirements .......................................................................6

Telecommunications.................................................................................................................6 Architectural..............................................................................................................................9 Electrical ...................................................................................................................................9 Mechanical ...............................................................................................................................9

Entrance Facility (EF).................................................................................................................10 Telecommunications...............................................................................................................10 Architectural............................................................................................................................11 Electrical .................................................................................................................................11 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................11

Equipment Room (ER) ...............................................................................................................12 Telecommunications...............................................................................................................12 Architectural............................................................................................................................12 Electrical .................................................................................................................................13 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................13

27



Telecommunications Room (TR) ...............................................................................................14 Telecommunications...............................................................................................................14 Architectural............................................................................................................................15 Electrical .................................................................................................................................17 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................17

Server Room (SR)/ Datacenter (DC) .........................................................................................17 Backbone/Riser Communications Cabling.................................................................................17

UTP Copper............................................................................................................................17 Fiber Optics ............................................................................................................................19 Coax .......................................................................................................................................21

Horizontal Communications Cabling ..........................................................................................21 UTP Copper............................................................................................................................22 Coax .......................................................................................................................................24

COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ..................................................................................................25 General...................................................................................................................................25 Information Outlet Termination ...............................................................................................26 Wireless Installations..............................................................................................................26 Telecommunications Wall Phone Outlet:................................................................................26 Public Phones:........................................................................................................................26 BACS & Fire Alarm:................................................................................................................27

Inside Plant (ISP) Communications Pathways...........................................................................27 General...................................................................................................................................27 Conduit ...................................................................................................................................28 Cable Tray ..............................................................................................................................29 J-Hooks ..................................................................................................................................30

Entrance and Outside Plant (OSP) Communications Cabling ...................................................30 UTP Copper............................................................................................................................30 Fiber Optics ............................................................................................................................32

Entrance and OSP Pathways.....................................................................................................33 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................36 Firestopping ...............................................................................................................................37 Designer/Consultant Requirements ...........................................................................................37 Contractor Requirements ...........................................................................................................39

APPENDIX A .................................................................................................................................42



GENERAL Information Technology (IT) is the responsible unit for low-voltage installations at the University Kansas (KU). This responsibility includes but is not limited to any and all University of Kansas property and structures including hand-holes, maintenance holes, pull-boxes, pedestals and enclosures as well as inside and outside plant installations. Designers for projects relating directly or indirectly to areas listed above shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s design, drawings, specifications and final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the DCM Project Manager, using the KU Standards Variance Request Form found in Appendix A1.1, for review and written approval or rejection as indicated on the form. Requests for variances on designs where IT is prime shall be submitted in writing to the IT Engineer or Construction Services representative for review and written approval or rejection. Contractors working on projects relating directly or indirectly to areas listed above shall verify that all applicable portions of these standards are incorporated into the project’s final construction. Requests for variances from these standards shall be submitted in writing to the General Contractor. Requests for variances on designs where IT is prime shall be submitted in writing to the IT Engineer or Construction Services representative for review and written approval or rejection. Related Documents & Requirements Refer to the following project and/or University specifications for requirements that also apply to work of this section.

General Requirements Sitework: Site Utility systems Special Construction: CCTV Cameras, Security Systems Conveying Systems: Elevator phones Electrical: Raceways and boxes

The specifications contained herein are the minimum acceptable standard for voice, data, video, and other general telecommunications distribution systems at the University of Kansas. These specifications may be modified by the University’s Information Technology department, (IT), a Division of Information Services, as necessary to accommodate special design or functional requirements of any particular space. It is recommended that coordination between telecommunications designers and KU IT begin early. KU IT welcomes any questions or concerns that may arise, and would be happy to comment on preliminary sketches for locations of equipment, etc. AutoCAD submittals of any stage shall comply with the University of Kansas Department of Design and Construction Management (DCM) standards. Any outages in service shall be carefully coordinated with KU IT as early in the design and construction processes as possible.



Telecommunications standards are dynamic in nature and continually change as technology evolves. Designers shall coordinate with KU IT to ensure the latest standards are being used. Contractors shall coordinate with KU IT to ensure the proper specifications are being used prior to ordering products or beginning work. The contractor shall purchase, install, test, and document all communications cabling, connectivity and support hardware as specified herein. Active telecommunications network equipment (electronics) will typically be supplied and installed by KU IT but may be specified for installation by a contractor in accordance with specifications from KU IT. Designer shall verify requirements for each specific project with KU IT during the design phase. These standards are not to be used as final specification or bid documents. They are intended to be a standards reference and starting point in a process of collaboration between the architect/designer, DCM, the occupant, and KU IT throughout the project design process. Codes, Standards and Best Practices KU’s communications systems follow the codes and standards set forth by standard-making bodies, including but not limited to current editions of the NEC, NESC, NFPA, ANSI/TIA/EIA Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards, FCC, IEEE and BICSI’S Design and Installation Manuals. When a discrepancy arises between the above mentioned standards and the standards contained in this document, it shall be brought to the attention of KU IT immediately for resolution. Typically the more stringent of the two guidelines will be implemented. Bid Documents It is expected, that as a result of the collaboration between KU IT and the designer/consultant, a quality bid package will be provided containing commonly accepted and standard language of the industry, such as what is included in the Division 27 standard specifications prepared by the Construction Specifications Institute (MasterFormat) and the American Institute of Architects (MasterSpec). Bid drawings shall include detailed information for installation including, but not limited to floorplans with jacks, jack identifiers and pathways located as well as connectivity schematics and details for telecommunications spaces, wall field layouts, labeling, etc. DEFINITIONS Entrance Facility (EF) Location where the main telecommunications service enters a building from the outside; where the demarcation between the inter-building and intra-building cabling systems occurs. Equipment Room (ER) Location that provides space and maintains a suitable operating environment for large communications equipment. Equipment Rooms tend to serve an entire building as compared to a Telecommunications Room that serves a single floor. This space may be co-located with the Entrance Facility and/or Telecommunications Room, provided the room is sized for all functions.



Telecommunications Room (TR) A room where the connection between the horizontal cabling and the building backbone cabling occurs. This room also contains the electronic equipment that transitions between the data, voice and video building backbone and the end user’s telecommunications equipment. This space may be co-located with the Entrance Facility and/or Equipment Room, provided the room is sized for all functions. Backbone (Riser) Cabling The cabling that connects multiple Telecommunications Rooms to each other, to the Equipment Room and/or to the Entrance Facility. Horizontal Cabling The cabling between the Telecommunications Room and the Work Area that carries voice, data and video signals. Communications Outlet Any point of connectivity for voice/data/CATV at the user end (i.e. work area, desk, etc.). Communications Pathways Conduits, cable trays or other supports with the sole purpose of carrying communications cabling. Communications pathways shall not be used by other low-voltage systems, including but not limited to: fire alarm, security systems, and or building automation wiring or air/vacuum tubes. Outside Plant (OSP) Cabling Communications cabling and terminations primarily located outside the building footprint including, but not limited to copper and optical cabling, splicing and terminations, lightning and electrical protection, and work related to their construction. Outside Plant (OSP) Pathways Communications pathways primarily located outside the building footprint including but not limited to conduits, maintenance holes, handholes and work related to their construction.



REQUIREMENTS Communications Rooms Minimum Requirements The following minimum requirements apply to all university Communications Rooms (i.e. EFs, ERs and TRs): Telecommunications Communications Rooms shall be secured and dedicated to this purpose with no other building services sharing the space. Communication Rooms (for new and remodel projects) must comply with both PCI (Payment Card Industry) and LPA (Legislative Post Audit) requirements. Telecom Consultants and Contractors shall verify compliance with KU IT during design phase. The room identifier shall be coordinated with KU IT and shall follow the diagram below:

Communications Room Identifier Pathway Entrances: The location, number, and size of communications pathways into Communications Rooms shall be coordinated with KU IT during the design phase of the project. No communications pathway shall have a fill that is greater than 40%. Conduits and sleeves shall extend 2" above floor level or 2” beyond the face of the wall for intra-building conduits. For most buildings, (2) 4” conduits (or other approved equivalent pathway) between the EF, ER, and TRs will be a minimum requirement. However, some buildings may require more. Equipment Rack(s): A 7’, 19” Ortronics Mighty MO 3 equipment rack shall be provided for housing fiber optic terminations and electronics. The rack shall be mounted to the floor and grounded. Coordinate the location of the rack with KU IT during design. Wall mounted equipment racks are not preferred, but may be used in some circumstances with approval of KU IT. Conduit, receptacles and bolts attached to the rack shall be painted to match the color of the rack, with the exception of grounding conductors and connections. Scrape the paint of the rack off at the grounding connection location to ensure a good bond to steel.



Cable Management Tray: Cable tray shall be provided around the perimeter of the room at 8’ A.F.F. Cable tray shall also be installed between two walls, centered over the top of the equipment rack(s). Secure tray over equipment racks and support the cable tray as recommended by manufacturer. Deburr sharp edges of cable tray; provide spillways where cables transition out or in. Ground cable tray to Telecommunications Grounding System. Final size and location of tray will be determined by design and shall be coordinated with KU IT. Cable Management: Cables shall not be bundled along the horizontal path but be laid in their natural manner in cable management. Where required for dressing, support or routing within a communications room, cables may be loosely bundled using Velcro cable wraps; plastic tie wraps are prohibited. All cables, whether on the backboard or in the rack shall have cable management devices installed. Cable management devices that come with the termination devices or racks shall be used as required for a neat and workmanlike installation. Rack mounted Vertical and horizontal finger ducts shall be manufactured by Ortronics (OR-60400437 - Finger Duct with Cover, 4" x 4" x 7', black or OR-60400438 - Finger Duct with Cover, 2" x 4" x 7', black). GigaBIX Management Rings (Belden part number AX101478) shall be used between NORDX blocks for Category 5e installations. For Category 6A installations, horizontal managers designed for the specific solution must to be used for cable management.. Wall Field Termination Block Labeling See the following diagram for termination block labeling and termination information. Note that labeling information applies to both Category 5e and Category 6A installations.



Termination Block Labeling

CATV Equipment: CATV equipment shall be coordinated with KU IT on a per-project basis. Preferred CATV equipment includes: Directional Tap: Taikan Series 55 Wall Mount Amplifier: PCT-MDA-42-RTA

Rack Mount Amplifier: RMDA-86A-30 5200-83 860 MHz, 30 dB Push-Pull Amp with Active Return Path

Fiber Optic Mini-Node: PCT part number PCT-MFN-FAS Equalizers/Attenuators:

VMI-CEQ8V 9377A-xx Plug-in Equalizer, 860 MHz, Values 0-20 dB VMI-AT 9320-xx Plug-in Attenuator, 1000 MHz, Values 0-18 dB



Architectural Ceiling and height of room: Communications Rooms shall be open to structure with a minimum structure height of 9'-6". False or recessed ceilings are not allowed. Door: Communications Rooms shall have a fully opening, lockable door, which is at least 36" wide and 80" in height. The door shall be keyed to match KU IT’s AB1 lock. Walls: Brick and gypsum board walls shall be painted or sealed to minimize dust. Each wall, except the wall which contains the entrance door, shall be lined with 3/4" A-C Grade, fire-retardant-treated plywood with the (A) side of the plywood installed facing out. Prior to equipment installation, plywood shall be painted with two coats of white, fire retardant low-gloss paint. At least one of the legible grade stamps on each sheet of plywood shall be masked or covered prior to painting for KU IT verification. The plywood shall reach from corner to corner and be installed a maximum of 6" AFF. The plywood shall be anchored securely to wall substrate with a minimum of five (5) equally spaced fasteners along each vertical edge and down the centerline of each sheet of plywood. Fasteners shall be of the appropriate type for each substrate. Blocking or additional studs are to be provided in framed walls to receive plywood backup panel fasteners. Electrical Lighting: Minimum lighting shall be the equivalent of 540 lux (50 foot-candles) measured 3 feet AFF. Power: The standard electrical outlet is a four-plex outlet. The circuit shall be a dedicated circuit, surge protected, with no shared neutral. On each wall, except the wall containing the door, one A/C 20-amp electrical fourplex outlet shall be installed, evenly spaced, at standard height. Note: Project plans may specify the need for additional electrical outlets to be installed, depending on the location of the electrical equipment. A four-plex electrical outlet shall be installed in the bottom of the equipment rack to support rack-mounted UPSs. UPSs are typically provided by the University. The final size and type of UPS may affect the electrical receptacle required. The telecom consultant shall coordinate this with KU IT early in the design phase. Mechanical Communications Rooms shall not have any plumbing or HVAC piping or ductwork within the room's interior space, interior walls, routing horizontally on the floor directly above the room, or within the floor slab. Additionally, sufficient room shall be left around the Communications Room for cable management tray access into the room.



HVAC: Communications Rooms shall have HVAC to control temperature and humidity. Temperature under load shall remain between 64 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit. The specific BTU's of heating and cooling to be provided will be specific to each building. Humidity shall be controlled at 50% +/- 15%. Electronics loads shall be verified with KU IT. Smoke and Fire Detection: Communications Rooms shall have a smoke/fire sensor that is part of the overall building fire alarm system. Sprinklers in Communications rooms are not recommended, but if required by code, sprinkler heads shall be caged to avoid accidental damage or activation. Entrance Facility (EF) Telecommunications Pathway Entrances: For inter-building conduit entrances (OSP/entrance), conduits and sleeves shall extend 4" above floor level or 4” out from wall face for a “through-wall” penetration. For most buildings, (2) 4” conduits shall be installed from the nearest maintenance hole or handhole to the EF, one of the 4” conduits shall be a Carlon 4-way MultiGard conduit or approved equivalent. The final number shall be determined during the design phase of the project. Phasing: The EF shall be completed early as possible during construction. Grounding: Telecommunications Grounding shall follow ANSI J-STD-607-A and the Grounding section of these standards. A Harger (minimum) 12” long x 4” wide x 1/2” thick Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be provided in the EF and shall be labeled “TMGB” with mechanically produced text. The TMGB shall be pre-drilled copper with holes for use with standard-sized lugs. The TMGB shall be located at the lower left corner of the plywood backboard; 18” A.F.F. Equipment Rack(s): Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Cable Management Tray: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. UTP Copper Termination Field: For Category 5e installations, NORDX 300 pair GigaBIX blocks shall be wall mounted in the EF to support riser and feeder cables. For Category 6A installations, ADC 20 pair solution CopperTen Frame 6450 2 155-00 containing 6468 5 300-00 voice grade blocks shall be wall mounted in the TR to support riser cables. Location and size of the copper termination fields shall be coordinated with KU IT. Building entrance protection shall also be coordinated with KU IT. See Entrance and Outside Plant section for information concerning building entrance protection.



Cable Management: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. CATV Equipment Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Architectural Location: The Entrance Facility shall be located to provide easy access to OSP and entrance conduits. Termination of entrance cables in the EF shall be within 50’ of entering the building to reduce the requirement for rigid or intermediate conduit. Size: The Entrance Facility shall be sized as follows:

• When serving buildings with less than 5,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 4' x 5'.

• When serving buildings greater than 5,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 6' x 8'.

When the EF is also used as an ER and/or TR, the room shall be sized to accommodate the type and number of the services being supplied to the building. The size of the room shall be coordinated with KU IT as early as possible during the design phase. Ceiling and height of room: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Door: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Flooring: Floors shall be vinyl composition tile and all exposed concrete shall be sealed to minimize dust. Floors shall be designed to support a minimum of 4.8 kPA (100 lb'/ft2). Walls: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Electrical Lighting: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Mechanical HVAC: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Plumbing/Piping: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply.



Smoke and Fire Detection: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Equipment Room (ER) Telecommunications Pathway Entrances: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Grounding: Telecommunications Grounding shall follow ANSI J-STD-607-A and the Grounding section of these standards. A Harger (minimum) 12” long x 2” wide x 1/2” thick Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be provided in the ER and shall be labeled “TGB” with mechanically produced text. The TGB shall be pre-drilled copper with holes for use with standard-sized lugs. The TGB shall be located at the lower left corner of the plywood backboard; 18” A.F.F. Equipment Rack(s): Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Cable Management Tray: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. UTP Copper Termination Field: For Category 5e installations, NORDX 300 pair GigaBIX blocks shall be wall mounted in the ER to support riser cables. For Category 6A installations, ADC 20 pair solution CopperTen Frame 6450 2 155-00 containing 6468 5 300-00 voice grade blocks shall be wall mounted in the TR to support riser cables. Location and size of the copper termination field shall be coordinated with KU IT. Cable Management: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. CATV Equipment Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Architectural Location: The ER location shall ensure that backbone cabling pathways are easily accessible. Accessibility for delivery of equipment shall also be kept in mind. The ER shall be located away from EMI, machinery causing vibration, piping, drains, clean outs, and shall not be located in the basement or lowest level of a facility. The ER shall not be located under or adjacent to restrooms or other areas with flooding possibilities. If the ER is separate from the EF, it shall be located directly above the EF.



Size: The following Equipment Room sizing guidelines shall be used; however final size may be modified during design in coordination with KU IT, based on current and future equipment located in the space.

• When serving an area of less than 1,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 3' x 4'.

• When serving an area between 1,000 and 5,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 6' x 6'.







When the ER is also used as an EF and/or TR, the room shall be sized to accommodate the type and number of the services being supplied to the building and the equipment being housed. The size of the room shall be coordinated with KU IT as early as possible during the design phase. Ceiling and height of room: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Door: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Flooring: Floors shall be vinyl composition tile and all exposed concrete to minimize dust. Floors shall be designed to support a minimum of 4.8 kPA (100 lb'/ft2). Walls: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Electrical Lighting: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Power: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Mechanical HVAC: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply.



Plumbing/Piping: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Smoke and Fire Detection: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Telecommunications Room (TR) Telecommunications Pathway Entrances: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Grounding: Telecommunications Grounding shall follow ANSI J-STD-607-A and the Grounding section of these standards. A Harger (minimum) 12” long x 2” wide x 1/2” thick Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be provided in the ER and shall be labeled “TGB-X” with mechanically produced text (where X corresponds with the Communications Room Identifier). The TGB shall be pre-drilled copper with holes for use with standard-sized lugs. The TGB shall be located at the lower left corner of the plywood backboard; 18” A.F.F. Equipment Rack(s): Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Cable Management Tray: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. UTP Copper Termination Field: For Category 5e installations NORDX 300 pair GigaBIX blocks shall be wall mounted in the TR to support riser cables. Also, NORDX 72 port GigaBIX blocks shall be wall mounted in the TR to support horizontal cables. Location and size of the copper termination field shall be determined by designer. The connection between the horizontal cabling termination field and the network electronics in the equipment rack shall be completed with NORDX IBDN Category 6 Patch Cords, 8P8C (T568B). Jacket color shall be purple (Pantone 291C). Belden part number NXGX-RSOPR-BPR, Anixter part number AC300XXX (XXX varies as to what length is ordered). The part number specified shall be cut in half to create two patch cords with one connectorized and one blunt end. It is highly recommended to coordinate procurement of this material early, as it sometimes requires an extended lead time.

For Category 6A installations

ADC 20 pair solution CopperTen Frame 6450 2 155-00 containing 6468 5 300-00 voice grade blocks shall be wall mounted in the TR to support riser cables. ADC Data block kit for 20 pair solution 6450 1 107-00 shall be wall mounted in the TR to support horizontal cables. Location and size of the copper termination field shall be determined by designer.



The connections between the horizontal cabling termination field and the network electronics in the equipment rack shall be completed with a 6A 568B wired patch cord. Jacket color shall be orange. (ADC 6645-2-855-25 is a 25’ B wired patch cord and other lengths are available.) The cord shall be cut in half to create two patch cords with one connectorized and one blunt end. These shall land on a data distribution block (ADC Data block kit for 20 pair solution. 6450 1 107-00). It is highly recommended to coordinate procurement of this material early, as it sometimes requires an extended lead time. Please be aware that due to cable size and bend radius caution needs to be taken during block field design. These blocks will not layout in the same manner the Nordx have previously. CATV Equipment Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Cable Management: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Architectural Location: The TR location shall ensure that backbone and horizontal cabling pathways are easily accessible. The TR shall be located away from EMI, machinery causing vibration, piping, drains, clean outs, and shall not be located in the basement or lowest level of a facility. The TR shall not be located under or adjacent to restrooms or other areas with flooding possibilities. TRs shall align vertically on each floor of the facility. If TRs are not aligned vertically, then they shall have a readily available means to easily access the TRs on the adjacent floors via conduit sleeves. The location of the TR shall be as close as possible to the center of the floor it is intended to serve, to minimize the horizontal cable lengths. The distance between a TR and the farthest possible Work Area Outlet in the area it is serving shall not exceed 295’, measured as the cabling would travel through the communications pathways. Size: The Telecommunications Room shall be sized as follows:

• When serving an area with less than 5,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 10' x 7'.

• When serving an area between 5,000 and 8,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 10' x 9’.


For small buildings where total useable floor space is 5,000 square feet or less and are Category 5e installations, the Telecommunications Room may be sized as follows:

• When serving an area between 1,000 and 5,000 square feet, dimensions shall be a minimum of 4’-6” x 4’-6”.

• When serving an area of less than 1,000 square feet, The Telecommunications Room may consist of a Rittal and/or lockable Hoffman wall mount enclosure.

• If the design includes the addition of active equipment (and/or other rack mount materials) the rack mount materials may be placed in a lockable Hoffman cabinet with block field installed in the Rittal enclosure.



o Size of enclosure shall be determined during design phase in coordination with KU IT. Size of enclosure shall accommodate existing and future equipment to be located in the space.

o A typical Rittal enclosure of 60”x36”x16”, would be part number 1097.330, however design will dictate appropriate size of enclosure to use. This shall be coordinated with KU IT.

o Rittal accessories shall also be provided for the specific enclosure used, and are typically as follows (fan, vent units and fan cord are not required if unit will not contain active equipment):

Mounting Brackets: Rittal part number 1594.000 Grounding Strap: Rittal part number 2568.000 Locking Handle: Rittal part number 2450.000 with Insert: 2467.000 Fan and Vent Units: Rittal part number 3323.117 and 3323.207 Fan Cord: Rittal part number 9962.136

o Enclosure cutouts shall be made according to templates. o Ground bar shall be provided within the cabinet/enclosure o Cabinet/enclosure shall be grounded utilizing ground straps o A duplex power receptacle shall be provided within the cabinet/enclosure o A typical Hoffman enclosure of 48”x24”x25”, would be part number EWMS482425,

however design will dictate appropriate size of enclosure to use. This shall be coordinated with KU IT.

o Hoffman accessories shall also be provided for the specific enclosure used, and are typically as follows:

Fan kit with power cord: Hoffman EWMF2 Fan filter: Hoffman AFLTR4LD

Category 6A installations of less than 5000 square feet will need to be carefully sized and coordinated with KU IT. When the TR is also used as an EF and/or ER, the room shall be sized to accommodate the type and number of the services being supplied to the building and the equipment being housed. The size of the room shall be coordinated with KU IT as early as possible during the design phase. Ceiling and height of room: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Door: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Flooring: Floors shall be vinyl composition tile and all exposed concrete to minimize dust. Floors shall be designed to support a minimum of 2.4 kPA (50 lb'/ft2). Walls: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply.



Electrical Lighting: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Power: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Mechanical HVAC: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Plumbing/Piping: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Smoke and Fire Detection: Minimum Communications Room requirements apply. Server Room (SR)/ Datacenter (DC) Server Rooms and Datacenters on campus have unique requirements and must also comply with University Policy. These spaces shall be coordinated with KU IT and addressed very early in the design phase. Backbone/Riser Communications Cabling A twisted pair copper cable for voice, a fiber optic cable for data and a coaxial cable for CATV shall be installed from the EF to the ER and each TR. All backbone/riser cabling shall be rated for the space in inhabits (typically riser rated, however cable passing through a plenum shall be plenum rated). UTP Copper Technical Specifications Backbone/Riser twisted-pair cabling shall be reinforced for protection against environmental damage. The sheath shall consist of a corrugated aluminum shield, which is adhesively bonded to an outer jacket of PVC plastic to form an aluminum-polyvinyl-chloride sheath. Riser cable can be used in riser shafts, without conduit, where a fire retardant sheath is necessary to meet NEC low-flame requirements. The riser cable must have a category rating of CMR or higher according to Article 800 of the 2008 NEC. A minimum of one 100 pair category 3 riser cable shall be installed from the EF to each TR. The backbone/riser cable shall meet the following criteria: Gauge: 24 AWG Pair Size: 25 to 1800 Maximum Average DC Resistance: 26.5 ohms/1000ft Maximum Average Mutual Capacitance: 16 nf/1000ft (at 1 kHz) Impedance: 100 ohms +/- 15% (at 1.0 - 16 MHz)



Maximum Attenuation: 2.6 at .064 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 3.6 at .256 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 5.0 at .512 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 6.3 at .772 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 7.2 at 1.0 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 14.8 at 4.0 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 21.4 at 8.0 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 24.4 at 10.0 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) 32.0 at 16.0 MHz (dB/1,000 ft.) Sheath: Aluminum-Polyvinyl-Chloride Shield: Corrugated Aluminum Color Code: Standard PIC 25/50 pair binders Installation The installation of twisted pair copper backbone/riser communications cables shall conform to manufacturer recommendations and the following installation criteria. Minimum installation clearances for cabling shall be as follows:

• 5 inch separation from power lines carrying 2KVA or less • 12 inch separation from power lines carrying from 2 to 5KVA • 36 inch separation from power lines carrying more than 5KVA • 5 inch separation from all fluorescent lights and other sources of electromagnetic

interference (EMI) such as electric motors, HVAC equipment, arc welders, intercoms, etc. Both ends of backbone/riser cables shall be terminated on NORDX GigaBIX 300 pair termination blocks for a Category 5e installation or ADC CopperTen 6A termination block for Category 6A installations. A specific cable pair count will be distributed to each communications room. A binder count will appear in only one communications room. Appropriate bonding of the metallic cable shield is required throughout the physical cable plant with the shield being grounded whenever the outside jacket is opened. Minimum Bending Radius shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications, typically not less than 12 times O.D. for shielded cables. Maximum Pulling Tensions shall not exceed manufactures specifications. If the outer sheath is nicked or damaged, it must be reported to KU IT and the resolution for the repair must be approved by KU IT. Resolution could be a tape wrap or cable replacement, depending on the degree of damage. Labeling: Riser cables shall be labeled with their cable ID and pair count as determined by KU IT. Labeling shall be completed using mechanically produced text at the termination block, when entering or exiting a pull box, and within 6” of their entrance into a communications room. Labels for backbone/riser cables shall be printed on white paper. Riser cable termination blocks shall have manufacturer provided white labels with every first and fifth pair labeled, text to be mechanically produced. See Labeling under Communications Room Telecommunications requirements.



All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to placement of the label type and information printed.

Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all twisted pair copper backbone/riser cables:

• Continuity on all pairs, (test for opens). • Crosses and shorts, on all pairs. • Noise metallic and noise to ground, sampling can be used. • Insulation resistance, sampling may be used.

The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. The maximum allowable defects copper cable pairs shall be in accordance with the following table: Cable size (pair) Allowed Defects (pair) 4 - 100 pr 0 100 - 600 pr 0 600 - 900 pr 0 900 – above less than 0.002% If outer sheath damage is the cause of the bad pairs, the entire cable shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense. Fiber Optics Technical Specifications A minimum of one (1) 12 strand multimode and one (1) 12 strand single-mode shall be installed from the EF to each TR. Plenum Rated part numbers: Corning 12 strand multimode: 12K88-33150-29 Corning 12 strand singlemode: 12E88-31131-29 Riser Rated part numbers: Corning 12 strand multimode: 12K81-33150-24 Corning 12 strand singlemode: 12E81-31131-24 Installation The installation of fiber optic riser/backbone communications cables shall conform manufacturer recommendations and to the following installation criteria. The fiber optic riser cables shall be terminated at each end in a Corning Closet Connector Housing unit. The number of fibers installed will determine the required number of Corning Closet Connector Housing units.



The multimode and single mode fibers shall be terminated in separate Closet Connector Housing units. Multimode fibers shall be terminated utilizing Corning ST pigtails and splice housings. If the use of pigtails is not feasible, then Corning 62.5 micron ST connectors, part number 95-101-52-SP shall be used. Singlemode fibers shall be terminated utilizing Corning ST pigtails and splice housings. If the use of pigtails is not feasible, then Corning ST connectors, part number 95-201-52-SP shall be used. There shall be 15’ of cable slack looped in each Connector Housing unit to facilitate future re-terminations. The minimum bending Radius shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations, typically 20 times diameter of cable when under tension and 10 times the diameter of cable when not under tension. The cable manufactures rated maximum tensile rating shall not be exceeded during installation. Labeling: Riser cables shall be labeled with their cable ID and strand count as determined by KU IT. Labeling shall be completed using mechanically produced text at the termination panel, when entering or exiting a pull box, and within 6” of their entrance into a communications room. Labels for backbone/riser cables shall be printed on white paper. All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to printing information and placing label. Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all fiber optic backbone/riser cables:

• End to end dB loss, both directions, at 850 and 1300 for multimode and 1310 and 1550 nanometers for single mode.

• Distance in feet for actual cable length • Distance in Kilometers for actual cable length • Number of splices in each fiber

The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. The maximum allowable attenuation (db/km) for multimode fiber is 3.5 at 850nm and 1.0 at 1300nm. The maximum allowable attenuation (db/km) for single mode fiber is 0.4 at 1310nm and 0.3 at 1550nm. The maximum allowable loss for splices is .3dB. The maximum allowable loss for connectors is .75dB per connector pair.



Coax Technical Specifications A minimum of one (1) coax broadband riser rated cable, Commscope part number P-3 500JCAR, shall be installed from the EF to the first TR. One (1) broadband riser rated cable, Commscope part number P-3 500JCAR, shall be installed between each TR. Install The installation of coax riser/backbone communications cables shall conform manufacturer recommendations and to the following installation criteria. For each coax cable, 15’ of cable slack shall be left at each end for terminating. Label Riser cables shall be labeled with their cable ID as determined by KU IT. Labeling shall be completed using mechanically produced text at the termination point, when entering or exiting a pull box, and within 6” of their entrance into a communications room. Labels for backbone/riser cables shall be printed on white paper. All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to printing information and placing label. Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all coaxial backbone/riser cables:

• Continuity The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. Horizontal Communications Cabling Horizontal cabling is largely dependant on work area outlet requirements. As early as possible in the design phase, the engineer/consultant shall closely coordinate work area requirements with the building occupants and KU IT to ensure that the needs of the occupant are being met and that they are in accordance with University standards. General Labeling: Horizontal cables shall be labeled with a cabling identifier coordinated with KU IT, and shall follow the diagram below. Labels shall be located at the work area outlet (WAO) end of the cable, 1” from the termination. Labels shall also be located within 6” of their entrance into the TR and within 6” of their terminations inside the TR. All cables shall have strap-on labels.



Horizontal Cabling and WAO Identifier

The following outlet symbol will be used by Consultants and Contractors placing outlets on Scopes of Work and other Construction Documents.

Standard Outlet Symbol

UTP Copper Technical Specifications A minimum of two (2) horizontal cables shall be provided to each work area outlet. All horizontal cabling shall be plenum rated. For Category 5e installations, horizontal data and voice cables shall be yellow unshielded twisted-pair (UTP), each cable consisting of four twisted pairs of 24 AWG solid conductors type CMP, Category 5E, plenum rated. Cable shall be Berk-Tek LANMark 350. Horizontal UTP copper cables shall be terminated in the TR on a 72-port NORDX GigaBIX block. In the TR cable management tray, horizontal cables shall have 10’ of slack (after termination). For connectivity requiring outside plant rated Category 5e Cabling, Berk-Tek CM-00424BKT-5E-OD shall be used. For Category 6A installations, horizontal data and voice cables shall be orange unshielded twisted-pair (UTP), each cable consisting of four twisted pairs of 23 AWG solid conductors type CMP, Category 6A, plenum rated. Cable shall be ADC TrueNet CopperTen. Horizontal UTP copper cables shall be terminated in the TR on an ADC TrueNet CopperTen 6A block. Install The installation of horizontal communications cables shall conform to manufacturer recommendations and to the following installation criteria. Minimum installation clearances for cabling shall be as follows:

• 5 inch separation from power lines carrying 2KVA or less • 12 inch separation from power lines carrying from 2 to 5KVA • 36 inch separation from power lines carrying more than 5KVA • 5 inch separation from all fluorescent lights and other sources of electromagnetic

interference (EMI) such as electric motors, HVAC equipment, arc welders, intercoms, etc.



Installation and physical protection of horizontal cabling is a critical element for the cable to deliver its rated bandwidth. A "kink", "pinch", incorrect bend radius, or stretching of the cable by exceeding the 25 pound maximum pulling tension during installation will damage the cable to the point that it will not meet specifications. Any cable damaged during the procurement, construction or post-construction processes shall be replaced in its entirety, at the contractor’s expense. When terminating horizontal UTP cabling, no more than one-half inch of horizontal UTP copper cables shall be untwisted. Cable runs from the TR to the work area outlet shall not exceed 295 feet, measuring as the cabling would travel through the communications pathway. Horizontal cables shall not be spliced. At the work area outlet end, located in the outlet box or above the ceiling, a minimum of 12” of cabling slack shall be provided (after termination) to facilitate future re-terminations. No open or exposed wiring or conduits will be permitted below finished ceilings. Ivory colored surface raceway, Wiremold 2400 with a 2448-2 box may be used in places where "fishing" of walls is not possible. No substitution of raceway is allowed. Category 6A horizontal runs of less than 10 meters are not acceptable because of cross talk issues. Labeling: For Category 5e installations: On the 72-port GigaBIX block containing the horizontal cabling terminations, each cable termination will be labeled on the block with the jack ID. Labels shall be printed on blue (Pantone 291C) paper. See Labeling under Communications Room Telecommunications requirements and General Labeling under Horizontal Communications Cabling. For Category 6A installations: On the ADC block containing the horizontal cabling terminations, each cable termination will be labeled on the block with the jack ID. See Labeling under Communications Room Telecommunications requirements and General Labeling under Horizontal Communications Cabling. Testing: For Category 5e installations: UTP Horizontal cable testing shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 standard and all addendums and shall be accomplished using a level IIe or higher field tester. The following tests shall be completed and results submitted to KU IT: Wire map Length Insertion Loss Pair-to-pair NEXT PSNEXT loss Pair-to-pair PSELFEXT



Cable return loss Propagation delay Delay skew For Category 6A installations: UTP Horizontal cable testing shall conform to ANSI/TIA-568-C series standard and all addendums and shall be accomplished using a Level IV field tester. Verify tester is approved for use in testing ADC 6A installations. The contractor shall provide a test record report for each horizontal link in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. Where any portion of the system does not meet the specifications, the deviation shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated at no charge to the University. All category 5e cable shall be certified to 100 MHz. Category 6A cables shall be certified to 500 MHz. The contractor shall replace, at no charge to the University, any cable that tests defective, is not installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, is kinked, exceeds bend radius, has stretched jackets or has been damaged with tie-wraps that have been over-tightened. The contractor shall correct at no charge to the University, any cable that has more than 1” of jacket removed at the termination points. Coax Technical Specifications Horizontal coaxial cabling shall be RG6, plenum rated, with a white jacket, Commscope part number 2279V. Installation The installation of horizontal communications cables shall conform to manufacturer recommendations. Coaxial cable termination at the TR shall be coordinated with KU IT, as CATV equipment is reviewed on a case-by-case basis. The work area outlet cable end shall have a minimum of 12 inches of excess cable. At the TR end of the cable there shall be 24 inches of excess cable plus the length needed to reach the designated equipment (typically a tap or splitter). Cable shall be routed so the 24” of slack is managed in a neat bundle. A single RG6 coax cable shall be installed to each conference room, for termination in the standard work area outlet box. Label Horizontal cables shall be labeled with their cable ID, as determined by KU IT. Labels shall be located at the work area outlet, 1” from the termination. Labels shall also be located within 6” of their entrance into the TR and within 6” of termination in the TR. See Labeling under



Communications Room Telecommunications requirements and General Labeling under Horizontal Communications Cabling. Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all coaxial horizontal cables:

• Continuity The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET General The Telecommunications Designer shall provide a WAO identifier on the construction drawings for each cable pulled. These identifiers are provided to minimize confusion in the field and to aid KU IT in provisioning work. The Telecommunications Designer shall also provide in electronic format activation information for each cable pulled to KU IT with the submittal of Construction Documents (i.e. Identify locations of voice, data and CATV that the occupant needs to be activated upon completion of the project). See “Horizontal Cabling and WAO Identifier diagram and Appendix A. Connectivity to each work area outlet (WAO) outlet will need to be carefully coordinated with the building occupants and KU IT. Typically, the minimum connectivity provided to each occupied room will be (1) voice and (1) data connection. The work area outlet box shall be a RACO steel double gang box, 4” X 4” X 2¼” deep with 2-gang plaster rings. Alternate box is the Randl 5 square box with 2-gang plaster ring. Two work area outlet boxes shall be installed for every 100 square feet of office space unless otherwise noted. Conference rooms shall have two work area outlet boxes installed.

At media cabinet locations, a minimum of three (3) horizontal cables are required. At projector locations, one horizontal cable is required. For horizontal cabling conduit runs, the minimum conduit size shall be one and one quarter inch in diameter. A label printed with the outlet identifier, as coordinated with KU IT and identified in the diagram below, shall be placed on the faceplate of each work area outlet. Labels shall have mechanically produced text and shall be printed on white paper. See General Labeling under Horizontal Communications Cabling.



Information Outlet Termination For Category 5e installations, horizontal cabling shall be terminated at the work area end using Ortronics Series II modules in an Ortronics faceplate. For Category 6A installations, horizontal cabling shall be terminated at the work area end using ADC TrueNet CopperTen jack (ADCJF6A02) and ADC 8-port dual-gang faceplate. Part numbers shall be verified with KU IT. Horizontal UTP cabling termination shall follow the 568B-wiring standard. Horizontal coaxial cables shall terminate in an "F" barrel connector, utilizing T&B Snap-N-Seal connectors. When uniformity with electrical receptacles is desired, Ortronics TracJacks and “106” type frames may be used for Category 5e installations, and the ADC TrueNet Copper Ten jack may be used with an ADC “106” type frame for Category 6A installs. The required part numbers shall be verified by KU IT.

Wireless Installations Specific information required for wireless design, such as AP, antenna, AP Enclosure requirements, user specifications, etc. shall be verified with IT during early design stages. Locations requiring wireless shall be coordinated with the building occupants as early in the design phase as possible. Site surveys and/or heat mapping shall be completed by Design Consultants during the design phase. Results shall be provided in electronic format to KU IT for review during design phase. Suggested locations for AP’s shall be submitted to IT for review. .

Telecommunications Wall Phone Outlet: A telecommunications wall phone is defined as a voice connection for a guest or “courtesy” phone. These outlets shall be located at 54” A.F.F. and shall contain a single voice connection. The telecommunication wall phone outlet box shall be a RACO steel double gang, 4” X 4” X 2¼” box with a steel drawn plaster ring secured to the double-gang outlet box prior to the installation of finish material. The appropriate raised single-gang steel drawn plaster ring, i.e. 5/8”, shall be installed so that the outer surface of the plaster ring will be flush with the outer surface of the surrounding sheet rock or finish material. The surface mount wall phone jack shall be Leviton part number 40226-S, with a UPC 07847710506 stainless steel phone wall plate. For wall phone outlet cabling conduit runs, the minimum conduit size shall be one inch in diameter.

Public Phones: A public phone is defined as elevator, payphones or other emergency phones in common areas.



A single voice connection shall be provided. Public phone conduit shall be a minimum of one inch EMT conduit “home-run” back to the TR, (not stubbed out to communications pathways like information outlet cabling). BACS & Fire Alarm: BACS and Fire Alarm connectivity will need to be closely coordinated with KU IT, the Fire Protection Engineer and the University of Kansas’ Facilities Operations Departments. Typically (1) 6 strand multimode cable is provided to the university fire alarm panel that is connected to the University fire alarm fiber optic ring. This is typically terminated on a standard WAO assembly. Coordinate with Fire Alarm engineer and Contractor. A single data connection is provided to each BACS panel back to the TR. BACS and Fire Alarm conduit shall be a minimum of one inch EMT conduit “home-run” back to the TR, (not stubbed out to communications pathways like information outlet cabling). A data connection shall be provided to the gas and power meter. This shall be coordinated with the electrical and mechanical engineering team. Additionally, the Telecom Designer will need to verify with DCM and the Engineering Team whether the building they are working on is going to be added to the University’s Mass Emergency Notification System which would require the Telecom Designer to incorporate a dry copper pair connection into the design. Inside Plant (ISP) Communications Pathways General Clear and accessible pathways for telecommunications cabling shall be provided. These pathways provide physical connection between the EF, ERs, TRs and rooms containing telecommunications outlets. Typically, these pathways shall be located in common hallways to allow easy access with the least disturbance to offices and classrooms. When hallway locations for pathways are not feasible, the Design Team shall coordinate with KU IT to locate them in the least obtrusive location possible. The Architect and design team shall ensure a clear and accessible pathway for telecommunications cabling has been provided. Any pathway that is not accessible or does not provide a clear and workable pathway shall be removed and relocated. There are several methods available for providing a pathway for supporting telecommunications cables. The architectural design of each building is unique and requires an analysis of which method(s) are best suited for that building. Communications Pathways shall be installed in accordance with any applicable electrical code and manufacturer recommendations. Communications pathways shall not be attached, secured to, or be supported by, any portion of the ceiling or ceiling grid system, including the “T” bar ceiling tile support rails or the “T” bar support rail wires. The use of “batwing” support is not allowed.



Communications pathways shall not interfere with ceiling tile installation or removal. The load bearing capacity of communications pathways shall exceed the combined load of the physical pathway and the additional imposed load of the cables installed at 100% fill. Toggle bolts or similar fasteners shall not be used to secure communications pathways to field areas of sheetrock or other finish material. Communications Pathways shall be dedicated for use only by KU IT. No other cabling shall travel in any part of the communications pathways. All pathways are to be designed with a maximum of 40% cabling fill. Pathway fill calculations shall be completed by Consultant to verify adequate sizing. Communications Pathway sizing and final locations shall be verified with KU IT. If, during Construction, the Contractor finds a pathway that will exceed the 40% fill ratio, the Contractor shall notify the Design Consultant and IT project representative immediately. Cabling shall not be unsupported for a distance greater than 4’. Conduit Conduits used to carry telecom cabling are a part of the “communications pathway”. Communications conduit requirements depart from that of “normal” electrical power distribution. Communications conduit sizing does not follow NEC in terms of the maximum number of conductors allowed per unit volume. Due to the need for facilitating frequent additions, moves and changes to the telecommunication systems, communications conduits are generously sized, with a maximum cable filling of 40%. Conduits shall be EMT, unless otherwise noted. Sharp edges of conduits shall be deburred prior to cabling installation. Grounding bushings shall be provided at the ends of communications conduits. Conduit waterfalls (spillways) shall be provided at ends of conduits where cabling transitions over six inches in elevation. The horizontal communications outlet conduit shall connect from the outlet box to the nearest cable tray or consolidated communications pathway. The conduit shall terminate within one foot of the nearest communications pathway. Conduit designated or installed with the probability of fiber optic cabling traveling in it will be carefully coordinated with the fiber optic manufacturer’s cabling bend radius maximums, in addition to the horizontal copper cabling requirements. Conduit runs for horizontal cabling shall not exceed 260 feet in length. The minimum bend radii for conduits shall be as follows:

• If the internal diameter of the conduit is less then 2” then the bending radii shall be a minimum of 6 times the internal diameter.



• If the internal diameter of conduit is 2” or greater then the bending radii shall be a minimum of 10 times the internal diameter.

A pull box shall be installed after every 180-degree change in direction or elevation or every 150 feet. Pull boxes shall be located in readily accessible locations. The installation of pull boxes in the conduit run shall be placed in line with the conduit so that cabling can be pulled through the pull box without incurring damage to the cable. No turns or bends of the conduit run are allowed within pull boxes. All pull boxes shall be labeled with mechanically produced text “KU IT”. A nylon pull cord shall be installed in each empty conduit and run with a 200 pound pulling tension. Conduits in laboratories shall be extended to the nearest hallway or corridor. LB type fittings shall not to be used. PVC conduit or PVC sleeves shall not be used within the footprint of the building. Flexible conduit is not recommended as a telecommunications pathway, however if carefully coordinated with KU IT, flexible conduit may be used under special circumstances. When used, the next higher trade size must be installed. Example: If a 1” EMT conduit cannot be used and a flexible conduit must be used, then the flexible conduit must be 1-1/4” in size. Cable Tray Cable tray provided shall be Cablofil EZ-Tray. Cable tray size(s) will be determined during the design phase of the project, and shall be verified with KU IT. Support of cable tray shall be at intervals in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, or 5’, whichever is more stringent. Communications cabling shall only be placed within the basket area (inside) of the cable tray. No conductors of any kind, or any other materials or systems shall be secured to, attached to, or be supported on the outside surface of the cable tray. If project plans specify the vertical installation of cable tray, the inside of the basket area of the tray shall be installed facing outward, away from the face of the wall. Where cable tray is to be installed horizontally, the inside of the basket area shall face in an upward direction. Cable trays shall be installed level. Exception: Elevation transitions between cable tray sections. Cabletray shall have 12” of accessible space above for future access.



J-Hooks J-hooks provided shall be B-Line Systems model BCH21, BCH32, or BCH64 or Erico Fastening Products "CableCat" system model Cat21 or Cat32. J-hooks may be used to provide cabling support between the horizontal conduit and communications pathway. The maximum 40% cabling fill shall be followed, but cable count inside a J-hook shall not exceed 25. J-hook pathways shall be securely fastened to building structural components at no greater than 4 foot on-center. In most circumstances, J-hooks will be secured to above ceiling CMU’s, poured concrete ceilings/walls or sheetrock covered metal wall studs. If a wall stud is not available at the required maximum spacing distance, a closer spacing of J-hooks securely fastened to building structural components shall be installed in the area affected. Extra J-hooks shall be installed to properly cross hallways and to make turns or a change in direction. Entrance and Outside Plant (OSP) Communications Cabling The number and type of entrance or outside plant (OSP) cables (for voice, data, and video) that will be brought into each specific building will be determined by KU IT and will help establish the number and size of entrance conduits coming into the EF. A ground wire shall be installed at the location the cable enters the building. Reference 2002 NEC Articles 800-40 and 800-50. UTP Copper Technical Specifications Twisted-pair cable used for outside cable plant purposes shall be reinforced for protection against environmental damage and shall be waterproof, ANMW (ASP) or PIC type cable, manufactured by Superior Essex. Entrance/OSP twisted pair copper cabling shall meet the following criteria

Gauge: 24 AWG Pair Size: 25 to 1800 Maximum Average DC Resistance: 27.3 ohms/1000ft Maximum Average Mutual Capacitance: 15.7 nf/1000ft (above 1.0 MHz) Impedance: 100 ohms (above 1.0 MHz) Maximum Attenuation: 5.49 at 772 kHz and 6.25 at 1.0 MHz Sheath: Polyethylene Shield: 8 mil aluminum or equivalent Color Code: Standard PIC 25/50 pr binders Protection Twisted pair copper cabling shall have one end terminated at the building Entrance Facility on a Porta Systems Corp. Series 26 stub in and stub out. The entrance cable will then be terminated on NORDX GigaBIX 25 pair module(s) for Category 5e installations and shall be terminated on an ADC 6468 5 300-00 voice grade block for Category 6A installations. A specific cable pair count is distributed to each building. A binder count will appear in only one building communications



room. Inter-building cables shall be protected at both ends, and there shall be no bridge tap (multiple) on any outside plant cable. Installation The installation of twisted pair copper backbone/riser communications cables shall conform to manufacturer recommendations and the following installation criteria. Outside plant or unlisted cabling shall not extend into a building more than 50 feet unless the cable is enclosed in rigid or intermediate metal conduit for the duration of its run. Appropriate bonding of the metallic cable shield is required with the shield being grounded at the building entrance facility. Minimum Bending Radius shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications, typically not less than 12 times outer diameter for shielded and 8 times outer diameter for unshielded cables. See also NEC Art 300-34. Maximum Pulling Tension shall be in accordance with the following formula (not exceed 6500 lbs.): Tm = .008 x n x CM Tm = Maximum Pulling Tension, lbs, n = no. of conductors, CM = circular mil area of each conductor Maximum Permissible Pulling Length shall be in accordance with the following formula (measured in feet): Lm = Tm/C*W

Tm = Maximum Pulling Tension, lbs W = Weight of Cable per ft., lbs. C = coefficient of friction (usually 0.5 - 0.9)

Labeling OSP/entrance cables shall be labeled with their cable ID and pair count as determined by KU IT. Labeling shall be completed using mechanically produced text at the termination block, when entering or exiting a pull box, and within 6” of their entrance into a communications room. Cables shall also be labeled as they enter and exit a maintenance hole, handhole and where they enter/exit a building. At splices, a label with the cable ID and count will be placed where cables enter and exit a splice case. If the cable is run in a tunnel, the cable shall be labeled every 50’ with the cable ID and count. All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to printing information and placing label. OSP/entrance cable termination blocks shall have manufacturer provided green labels with every first and fifth pair labeled, text to be mechanically produced. See Labeling under Communications Room Telecommunications requirements. All innerduct and cables shall have strap-on labels. All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to printing information and placing label. Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all twisted pair copper entrance/OSP cables:

• Continuity on all pairs, (test for opens).



• Crosses and shorts, on all pairs. • Noise metallic and noise to ground, sampling can be used. • Insulation resistance, sampling may be used.

The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. The maximum allowable defects copper cable pairs shall be in accordance with the following table: Cable size (pair) Allowed Defects (pair) 4 - 100 pr 0 100 - 600 pr 0 600 - 900 pr 0 900 – above less than 0.002% If outer sheath damage is the cause of the bad pairs, the entire cable shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense. Splice Cases Copper splice cases shall be encapsulated, unless otherwise directed by KU IT.

Fiber Optics Tech Specs A minimum of one (1) Corning 12 strand multi-mode and one (1) Corning 24 strand single-mode fiber optic cables shall be installed into each EF. Corning’s double-jacket single-armor fiber optic cable shall be used, multimode part number 012KW5-T4150 D20 and single mode part number 024EW5-T4101 D20. Single-jacket single-armor fiber optic cable may be substituted by approval of KU IT, Corning part number 012KUC-T4130 D20 and 024EUC-T4101 D20.

Installation The installation of fiber optic entrance/OSP communications cables shall conform manufacturer recommendations and to the following installation criteria. The fiber optic riser cables shall be terminated at each end in a Corning Closet Connector Housing unit. The number of fibers installed will determine the required number of Corning Closet Connector Housing units. The multimode and single mode fibers shall be terminated in separate Closet Connector Housing units. Multimode fibers shall be terminated utilizing Corning ST pigtails and splice housings. If the use of pigtails is not feasible, then Corning 62.5 micron ST connectors, part number 95-101-52-SP shall be used.



Singlemode fibers shall be terminated utilizing Corning ST pigtails and splice housings. If the use of pigtails is not feasible, then Corning ST connectors, part number 95-201-52-SP shall be used. There shall be 15’ of cable slack looped in each Connector Housing unit to facilitate future re-terminations. The minimum bending radius shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations, typically 20 times diameter of cable when under tension and 10 times the diameter of cable when not under tension. The cable manufactures rated maximum tensile rating shall not be exceeded during installation. Labeling: OSP/entrance cables shall be labeled with their cable ID and pair count as determined by KU IT. Labeling shall be completed using mechanically produced text at the termination block, when entering or exiting a pull box, and within 6” of their entrance into a communications room. Cables shall also be labeled as they enter and exit a maintenance hole, handhole and where they enter/exit a building. At splices, a label with the cable ID and count will be placed where cables enter and exit a splice case. If the cable is run in a tunnel, the cable shall be labeled every 50’ with the cable ID and count. All cables shall have strap-on labels. Verify with KU IT prior to placement of the label type and information printed. Testing: The following tests shall be completed on all fiber optic entrance/OSP cables:

• End to end dB loss, both directions, at 850 and 1300 for multimode and 1310 and 1550 nanometers for single mode.

• Distance in feet for actual cable length • Distance in Kilometers for actual cable length • Number of splices in each fiber

The contractor shall provide a test record report in electronic format to KU IT within one week of testing completion. The maximum allowable attenuation (db/km) for multimode fiber is 3.5 at 850nm and 1.0 at 1300nm. The maximum allowable attenuation (db/km) for single mode fiber is 0.4 at 1310nm and 0.3 at 1550nm. LEAF attenuation shall be 0.22 at 1550nm, .24 at 1625nm and 1.0 /km @ 1383. The maximum allowable loss for splices is .3dB. The maximum allowable loss for connectors is .75dB per connector pair. Entrance and OSP Pathways Technical Specifications The communication entrance pathway into the EF shall consist of a minimum of (2) four inch conduits run from the nearest existing maintenance hole or handhole, to the EF of the new facility. One of the four inch conduits shall be a Carlon 4-way Multigard conduit.



Outdoor conduit runs for other communication purposes other than entrance cabling or OSP backbone cabling shall be a minimum of one-inch diameter. Steam tunnels shall not be used for the routing of telecommunications cables or cable trays as tunnels facilitate sabotage possibilities, increase liability for worker safety, and the environmental conditions in the tunnels negatively affect the electrical characteristics of the cables and the life expectancy of the cables. The Telecommunications Contractor and all sub-contractors shall coordinate the cable and conduit access facilities for telecommunication services with the University of Kansas and KU IT prior to the installation and acceptance of any completed project. Electrical conduits and electrical branch circuit conductors, including grounding and grounded conductors required to enter KU IT space (i.e. room, cabinet, enclosure, hand-hole or maintenance-hole) shall do so separately from all telecommunications conduits, conduit bodies, sleeves and conductors, observing minimum separation distance requirements as identified in the most current edition of the National Electrical Code. No electrical conductor of any kind shall be installed in the same conduit, sleeve, or raceway containing Telecommunications conduit or cabling. Exception: An approved composite cable associated with the integral operation of Telecommunications equipment as specified in the project drawings. The use of “LB” connections and fittings is prohibited. Installation Communications conduits shall be buried at a minimum depth of 36" and shall terminate 4” after they penetrate the outside wall or floor of the EF. A minimum distance of 12” shall be maintained between the telecommunications conduits and any electrical conduits. OSP and entrance conduits shall not contain more then two 90-degree bends without a maintenance hole or handhole installed. Conduit shall be placed with a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope to allow proper water drainage from the ducts. No run of conduit shall exceed 500 feet between maintenance holes or handholes. New maintenance holes shall contain permanent ladders; pull rings, racking hardware, grounding system, a sump pit, and a floor drainage system to drain water from them. Maintenance holes shall be a minimum of 8’ L X 6’ W X 8’ D (inner measurement) in size and shall contain a French drain to ensure minimal water retention in maintenance holes. Handholes shall be a minimum of 3’ W X 5’ L X 4’ D (inner measurement). New maintenance holes shall contain pull rings, grounding system, a sump pit, and a floor drainage system to drain water. Handholes shall be installed with 12" of gravel below the handhole and 6" of gravel in the base of the handhole. Handhole lids shall be flush with the final elevation grade and shall be secured and labeled.



Maintenance Holes with dimensions of 10’ or greater shall be designed and installed with 4 rows of vertical racking. Maintenance Holes with dimensions less than 10’ shall be designed and installed with 2 rows of vertical racking. Maintenance hole and handhole penetrations shall be sealed with mechanical seals. 4-Way multi-gard conduits as well as the cable in a conduit shall also be sealed with mechanical seals. Conduits shall have some type of sub-space partitioning such as Carlon Snap-Loc spacers. Detectable “fiber optic or telecommunications” warning tape shall be placed 12” to 18” above conduits. Conduits shall be encased in a concrete envelope not less than 2” thick, or as specified by the project plans when a minimum conduit depth of 36” cannot be attained, where conduits pass under roads, driveways, or railroad tracks, sidewalks, or where bend points might be subject to movement. Concrete for encasement shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2500psi. All conduit installations for the specific use or future purpose of supporting telecommunication related activities shall have a durable pull wire provided such as a number 12 gauge steel wire or equivalent with a minimum of 200 lbs. pulling tension. The pull wire shall be installed in each conduit for future cable access. All joints in conduits shall be made so the ends of the pipes come together in the center of the coupling. Duct Plugs shall be used for all unused openings in conduit. Trenching and Backfill The Telecommunications Contractor (TC) shall observe all State, Local, and University policies and regulations for trenching and backfilling on University property. The KU Facilities Operations Engineering department shall be notified prior to any underground work so underground utilities can be documented in the University Underground drawings. Special coordination is required for direct boring on campus. The TC shall protect existing facilities, utilities (overhead and underground), sidewalks, and pavement. Contractor shall repair, at their cost, any damage done by them or any of their subcontractors. The TC shall protect graded areas against erosion. Contractor must re-establish grade where settlement or washing occur at their own expense. The TC shall not fill under footings. If excavation is deeper than necessary, fill with concrete of same strength as footing concrete. Coordinate with the building or project structural engineer. Backfilling shall be compacted as follows:

• Under future and existing roadways, parking areas, walk paving, compact to 95% maximum dry density.



• For other embankments and fills not listed, compact to 90% of maximum dry density. • Place layers horizontally and compact each layer to specified density prior to placing

additional fill. • The contractor may use on-site soils including fat clay and weathered shale as fill. All fill

shall be reasonably free of roots, organic material, trash, frozen matter, and stones larger then three inches. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be hauled off-site.

• Dumping on University property is prohibited. • If the Contractor finds any material that is unsuitable or cannot be compacted as specified,

they shall replace it with suitable material at the contractor’s expense. • Flowable fill may be used in place of granular backfill and compaction.

When a joint-trench method is used for OSP conduit installation, a separation of six inches of concrete between telecommunications and other utilities, (i.e., power, gas, etc). shall be maintained. Grounding General Careful coordination of communications grounding must occur with the building’s electrical grounding system and specifications. All cabling systems and electronics distribution equipment shall be grounded for safety and electromagnetic interference. Telecommunications Grounding Systems at the University of Kansas shall conform to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 grounding and bonding standard, and the following guidelines, whichever is more stringent. Sizing and connectivity of conductors shall be in accordance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 grounding and bonding standard. Each grounding plan shall be tested using a Two-Point Test Method, and the ohmic value shall be less then 0.1 ohm to be considered to have an adequate bonding between the two reference points. A copy of the test shall be provided to KU IT prior to any telecommunication services being activated. Communications pathways, equipment racks, entrance protection, shielded cable, splice cases and any other equipment that is recommended to be grounded per this specification or the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 shall be grounded appropriately. When outside enclosures are included as a part of the design, adequate grounding shall be provided and labeled. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) A green insulated copper ground wire (6 AWG minimum) shall be run from the building’s Main Electrical Ground (MEG) to the Entrance Facility’s TMGB with no splices or connections other than the designated end points, and no conduit bonds if run in metal conduit. This conductor shall be labeled “BCT” in mechanically printed text at any exposed location including at the connection to the MEG and at the TMGB.



Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) A TBB is a green 6 AWG (minimum), insulated, copper Bonding Conductor (BC) that shall provide direct bonding between the TMGB and each TGB(s). When two or more TBBs are used within a multistory building, the TBBs shall be bonded together with a Grounding Equalizer (GE) at the top floor and every third floor in between. The TBB and GE shall be one continuous cable containing no splices. TGBs shall be connected to the TBB via a "tap" connection and the routing of the TBB shall be completed in as direct a manner as possible. This conductor shall be labeled “TBB” in mechanically printed text at any exposed location including at the connection to the TMGB and at each TGB. See Communications Room Requirements for Ground Bar requirements. Firestopping Firestopping is the process of installing UL listed fire-rated materials into penetrations of fire rated barriers to maintain the fire resistance rating of the barrier. Proper firestopping is critical in the construction of a building to ensure personal safety and to meet code requirements. Firestopping shall be designed and installed in accordance with the NFPA and the following guidelines, whichever are more stringent. To facilitate the requirement to meet codes and to have a system that is easily maintainable, EZ-Path fire rated pathway shall be installed at all fire rated assembly penetrations for the telecommunications pathways throughout the building. Refer to the code footprint and or Architectural drawings to determine walls and floors that have a fire rating. In addition, designers should note that separation walls in control zones (labs, etc.) often require fire and smoke protection. For these special penetrations, re-enterable fire caulk shall be provided after the telecommunications cabling has been pulled.

Firestops removed or modified during construction shall be replaced to their original fire rating. Firestopping shall not be installed where it is not required; with the exception of penetrations into Entrance Facilities, Equipment Rooms and Telecommunications Rooms. At these locations, EZ-Path Firestop systems shall be installed regardless of the rating requirement. The model and size of EZ-Path to be used will be determined by the cabling requirements of the building. Each firestop location shall be labeled using EZ-Path manufacturer provided labels, adhered to both sides of the wall, adjacent to the penetration. Labels shall be completed in accordance with STI Firestop recommendations. EZ-Path “waterfall” cable supports shall be provided for both sides of each EZ-Path installation. The model and size of EZ-Path specified will be determined by the cabling requirements of the building or as indicated on the approved set of plans. As a general guideline, cable fill ratios for EZ-PATH products can be based on the EZ-Path Cable Fill Chart found on the STI Firestop EZ-Path website. Designer/Consultant Requirements



Telecommunications Designers shall either be from the KU Pre-qualified Telecommunications Design Pool or shall be evaluated and pre-qualified by KU IT on a per-project basis. This is done to ensure that designers are capable and experienced in successfully designing the telecommunication systems according to KU IT and industry standards. The Telecommunications Designer/Consultant evaluation includes, but is not limited to, the following requirements:

• Provide a copy of the current RCDD certificate for the RCDD completing the design and stamping the project (RCDD of Record).

• Provide a resume for RCDD of Record that identifies work experience • Provide supporting documentation that identifies a minimum of five (5) projects for which

the RCDD of Record has completed similar work (size and complexity) within the last five years.

Telecommunications 100% construction documents or “T” sheets shall be approved and stamped by a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD of Record) prior to submitting the drawings to DCM for review by KU IT. The RCDD of record shall make weekly inspections of the job site whenever work is being performed that relates to the telecommunications system. These inspections are required to ensure the telecommunications system is being installed per the specifications and drawings and the craftsmanship is per industry standards. All discrepancies must be reported to the Telecommunications Contractor (TC), DCM Project Manager, and KU IT. When the discrepancies noted have been corrected, the contractor shall request and schedule a re-inspection by the RCDD of Record. When the discrepancy has been resolved, approved, the RCDD of Record will then submit approval documentation to the TC, DCM Project Manager and KU IT. When a project scope includes wireless, the locations for the Access Points need to be carefully coordinated with KU IT. Typically the Telecom Consultant will design the location for the telecommunications outlet for the wireless AP connection, and then KU IT will install the actual AP and Antenna during KU IT service provisioning. This will need to be verified with KU IT on a per-project basis. The Telecommunications Designer shall provide a WAO identifier on the construction drawings for each cable pulled. These identifiers are provided to minimize confusion in the field and to aid KU IT in provisioning work. The Telecommunications Designer shall also provide activation information for each cable pulled to KU IT with the submittal of Construction Documents (i.e. Identify locations of voice, data, wireless and CATV that the occupant needs to be activated upon completion of the project). Activation information can be integrated into the drawings, but must also be provided as a separate excel spreadsheet provided to KU IT . See Appendix A for template. Please note that The University of Kansas IT representative must be notified of the occurrence and timing of punch lists to be able to provide timely input into the Construction Project.



Contractor Requirements Telecommunications Contractors (TCs) shall either be from the KU Pre-qualified Telecommunications Installation Pool or shall be evaluated and pre-qualified by KU IT on a per-project basis. This is done to ensure that bidders are capable and experienced in successfully completing the telecommunication systems specified prior to bid opening. Bids from non-pre-qualified TCs will not be opened. The Telecommunications Contractor evaluation includes, but is not limited to, the following requirements:

• Must be able to have an RCDD on staff and available on-site to inspect the installation, and to certify in writing that the installation meets all TIA and NEC standards and codes, and that the installation was done per the specifications and drawings.

• Provide a minimum of five (5) references for which the contractor has completed similar work (number of drops and cost) within the last five years.

• Must have a minimum of one of the following installer certifications: ADC, Systimax, Siemon, Leviton, Ortronics, Belden IBDN Certified System Vendor or a Belden IBDN Installation Qualified Contractor.

• The TC shall certify in writing and provide supporting documentation to support that the lead technician on the job site is BICSI Installer Level II Certified and has a minimum of five years of experience installing similar telecommunications structured cabling systems.

Additionally, the TC shall consistently demonstrate exceptional craftsmanship and professional integrity along with the items mentioned above to maintain their KU IT pre-qualified status. Failure to maintain the qualification requirements will result in removal from pre-qualification status. If the scope of work requires outside cable plant installation (conduits and/or cabling), the contractor performing these tasks shall have five years of experience and provide five references for which the contractor has completed similar work within the last five years. The contractor shall furnish and install all material required for a complete system, including the installation and termination of communication cables, communication outlets, and the termination of all cables in the EF, ER and TR. If cables lack the proper slack, the contractor will replace the cable at no charge to the University. A one-year materials and labor warranty shall be provided on all cable and hardware installed by the telecommunications contractor. The contractor is prohibited from using any materials, replacement or new, which contains asbestos in any form. The contractor is prohibited from using any paint product containing lead. The contractor shall warrant that all persons assigned to a project shall be employees of the contractor or subcontractor and shall be fully qualified to perform the work required. The contractor shall include a similar provision in any contract with any subcontractor selected to perform work under this contract.



The contractor must remove, on a daily basis, all debris in associated work areas left as a result of the installation of the telecommunications systems. Contractor shall supply all splicing and bonding and grounding hardware and material. Where communication equipment and related materials are installed in new, existing or renovated KU IT communications rooms or other effected spaces, remove all communication related construction debris, cable scrap and accumulated dust from the floor and from the surfaces of newly installed communication equipment and materials and rooms of the building. The TC shall comply with the manufacturer’s applicable instructions and recommendations for installations, unless otherwise noted in this document. The TC shall inspect each item, material or equipment, immediately prior to installation and reject damaged and defective items. The TC shall provide connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not other wise indicated. Allowance for expansion, contraction, and building movements shall also be made. The TC shall provide uniform joint attachment widths and spacing in exposed areas of work for the best possible visual and operational effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to KU IT for final decision. The TC shall provide work during conditions of temperature, humidity, dust, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion that will ensure the best possible results for each unit of work. Each unit of work shall be isolated from non-compatible work to prevent product, service, or material deterioration. The TC shall coordinate enclosure (closing up) of work with required inspections and tests to avoid unnecessary uncovering or reopening work for inspections purposes. The TC shall arrange for inspection of work by University inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance required. Except as otherwise indicated for required approval, labels, and operational data, the TC shall not permanently attach or imprint markings on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior work. Please note that The University of Kansas IT representative must be notified of the occurrence and timing of punch lists to be able to provide timely input into the Construction Project.

As-Built Drawings and Information: The Contractor shall prepare and submit record drawings, at an industry recognized scale. The Contractor shall submit three drawings on white paper with black print. Paper size shall be 24" x 36", unless otherwise approved by KU IT. The Contractor shall also submit electronic copies on CD-ROM, in AutoCAD as directed by KU IT, DCM or Project Architect.



Record drawings shall include the following: • Copper feeder cable information: cable type, size, gauge, year installed, cable number,

pair counts, distance(s) and splice location(s). • Fiber feeder cable information: type cable, size, cable number, fiber count, distance(s),

splice locations, and length of cable. • EF, ER, TR information: Room identitifier, quantity and type of protectors, quantity and

type termination blocks, cable and pairs entering and/or leaving. • Riser cable information: cable type, size, gauge, year installed, length, splice points, cable

number, and pair count(s). • Outlet locations with jack identifiers. • Wireless access point locations with AP identifiers.



APPENDIX A

End - The University of Kansas Division 27 Design and Construction Guidelines - Changes from last version (dated 06/01/2008) are noted by an underline. W:\1 NTS Business Service Units\12 Network Planning & Engineering Services\MasterSpec\KU Division 27\Division 27 KU 12-23-09.doc